Smithdeal Practical Business College, 

1002 E. BROAD ST., opposite New City Hall, 




No Vacations. Students Entered at Any Time. 



This Institution is now the practical embodiment of seven schools, 
and is the oldest school of the kind in the State, if not in the South, 
the "Old Dominion " branch of the consolidation having been estab- 
lished here in 1867, and chartered by the State Legislature in 1868. 

The fact that several other business schools have started here and 
closed doors in a few months, while we have kept steadily growing, 
must mean something. The truth is, while we have not made much 
fuss about it, we have tried to do good, honest work in all our 
departments, and the success of our students shows that our efforts 
have not been in vain 

Bacheldor's E 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS. 



toil 






Shelf. 



$56 



this Institutioi 
eldor, A. M. am 

Here we teac 
Shorthand,' 

We have recei 
tion in Spelli 
metie, Corre 

All our depar 
night sessions. 

We do all in c 
as soon as they 
regard has beei 
cause we recom, 
We also furnish schools with teachers of our branches 

In asking us to go in their National Select School Directory 
Register Publishing Co., Ann Arbor, Mich., say in a recent letter : 

The book will be thoroughly reliable in every respect 



UNITED STATES OF AMERICA. 



united with 
J. M. Bach- 
ruction. 
ithmetie, 



for instruc- 
r, Arith- 

t'or day and 



•e positions 

cess in this 

:>ss men, be- 

1 H_inwiui <ii5 uui-ii <i pjmca Lions call for. 



The 



/ 



<&B 



I 



great care will be exercised in admitting schools, only 
those being selected which, after a careful investigation, 
we can most heartily recommend. Only one school of a 
class in a State will be included in the work, and your insti- 
tution has been chosen as the one best representing its class 
in your State. We sincerely trust, therefore, that you will 
allow US to include it." 

For full particulars, address 




'l^ce^z-< 




PRESIDENT. 



\ 



MMSH (f^RMIM 



•PELLIN& 



AND 





na. 




%<-i$<*z-£L 



FOR USE IN BUSINESS COLLEGES, ACADEMIES, 
PUBLIC AND PRIVATE SCHOOLS, 



tf- 



BY 



Gk HI. SMITHDEAL, 

Formerly Teacher of Rhetoric, Spelling, Dictation and 
Reading i?i the Richmond High School, Richmond, Va. 



COPYRIGHT, 1894, by G. H. SMITHDBAL. 



Taylor <fc Taylor, Printers. Richmond, Ya. 



TEm 



&$<> 



Hresmb. 



®= £:« r 



It has been the wish of the author, in the preparation of 
this book, to be as simple, as thorough and as practical as 
possible. The matter contained is the outgrowth of years 
of active experience in the school room, and is adapted to 
individual instruction without a teacher, as well as to the 
work of the class room. 

It has been prepared especially for giving a practical, 
comprehensive knowledge of the subjects treated, within a 
comparatively short time. 

Grammar, Spelling and Letter- Writing form a valuable 
combination, not often embraced in the same volume— in 
fact, the only combination of the kind known to the author. 

These subjects are, however, intimately associated with 
each other in laying the foundation of an English education. 
Without a knowledge of them, any person must be ignorant, 
indeed; with this knowledge, he is qualified to maintain a 
desirable position in the business and social worlds. 

The Grammar of this volume embraces a treatment of 
the forms of the grammatical construction of our language, 
together with lessons on Capitalization and Punctuation. 

Attention is called to the concluding lessons on Clearness 
and Force, subjects really belonging more to the province 
of Rhetoric than to that of Grammar. It is, however, not 
enough that one should learn to express language without 
grammatical errors. Clearness and Force are equally nee- 



essary, if a strong and a pleasing impression is to be left in 
the mind of the listener or reader. 

It has been said that English spelling is arbitrary to a 
large extent. That is true; but a person is not excused for 
bad spelling on that account. Few things more quickly 
and forcibly give an impression of ignorance than does 
wrong spelling. 

The author believes that the arrangement of most of the 
lessons in Spelling will assist the pupil in classifying words* 
as well as in spelling them. 

It is thought by some persons that rules of spelling serve 
more to hinder than to help. This may be true regarding 
some of them, but not of those which are employed in the 
most ordinary writing. The author, believing these neces- 
sary, has given them, with lists of words for their appli. 
cation. 

In the Letter-Writing, the different forms of correspond- 
ence are treated as simply as possible. The forms of 
business, of society, of official position, are given, enabling 
the pupil to arrange and to express properly letters of these 
classes. Grammar and spelling here play important parts, 
as they do in all expression. In the preparation of this 
department, Westlake's "How to Write Letters" has been 
frequently consulted. 

It is hoped that the time and the labor spent in preparing 
this volume will insure its success as a text book, on the 
simple basis of true merit. 



(gQRTEKPS. 



GRAMMAR. 



Parts of Speech 7 

Sentences 11 

Nouns 15 

Properties of Nouns 16 

Pronouns 21 

Personal Pronouns 22 

Common Errors 25, 33, 46,50, 53, 55 

Relative Pronouns 27 

Interrogative Pronouns 28 

Adjectives 31 

Comparison of Adjectives 32 

Verbs 35 

Participles 36 

Auxiliaries and Principal Verbs 37 

Regular and Irregular Verbs 37 

Principal Parts of Verbs 38 

Properties of Verbs 41 

Adverbs 49 

Prepositions 52 

Conjunctions 54 

Interjections 56 

Words used as different parts of speech 56 

The Simple Sentence 57 

The Complex Sentence 59 

The Compound Sentence : 62 

Conversion of Elements 64 

Pure English and its proper use 65 

Clearness of Expression 71 

Force 74 

Miscellaneous Exercise 80 

Review Questions 82 

Rules for Capitalization 86 

Exercise on Capitals 88 

Rules for Punctuation 89 

Exercise on Punctuation 102 



SPELLING 



Articles of Commerce 113 

Arms and War 142 

Articles in a Drug Store 122 

Beauty and Ugliness 11? 

Birds 116 

Business 133 

Banking 138 

Botany 152 

Common Words Often Mis- 
spelled 110, 119, 132 

Celebrations 115 

Crime 119 

City 125 

Conveyances 130 

Color and Appearance 140 

Chemical Terms 150 



Definitions 106 

Describing Persons 126 

Describing Things 129 

Derivatives, 114, 13 8, 119, 123 
128, 135, 138, 143, 146 

Dry Goods 120 

Disposition 139 

Death 141 

Diseases ' 147 

Expenditure 124 

Express, Post Office, Telegraph 

and Insurance Affairs 139 

Education 144 

Exercise to be corrected 156 

Fun and Gayety 113 

Flowers and Plants 114 



Fruits and Vegetables 115 

Food and Taste 117 

Fishes 118 

P'ireand Heat 122 

Flowers 122 

Farming 125 

French Expressions 130 

Fifty Principal Cities 149 

Groceries 114 

Geographical Terms 121 

Household Words Ill 

Human Body 151 

Intemperance 118 

Irregular Plurals 145 

Light and Darkness 114 

Latin Words and Phrases..! 30, 137 

Law 136 

Letter- Writing 138 

M asculine and Feminine Forms 110 

Months, Days and Seasons Ill 

Manners and Society 123 

Music 139 

Movement 144 

M edicine 147 

Names Given to Men Ill 

Names Given to Women 112 

Names Given to Persons 112 

Nouns and Verbs 115 

Navigation 137 



Oratory 117 

Occupations 127 

Pain and Pleasure 113 

Praise and Blame 124 

Phrases .Equivalent to Posses- 
sive Nouns.... 125 

Prefixes that mean "Not." 132 

Pictures and Sculpture 145 

Poetry 146 

Quadrupeds 116 

Rules 107, 108, 109 

Reptiles and Insects 117 

Synonyms 128, 142, 145 

States, Territories and Capitals 148 

Sciences 149 

Stones 150 

Trees 112 

Time 116 

Traveling 120 

Test Exercises, 124, 131, 132, 143 
150, 151, 152 

Titles 127 

Words Spelled Two Ways. 131 

Worship 140 

Words Derived from Proper 

Nouns 141 

Wealth and Poverty 143 

Words Pronounced Alike 152 



LETTER-WRITING. 



Classes of Letters 158 

Structure of Letters 159 

The Heading 160 

Outline of a Letter L 161 

The Address 164 

The Salutation 165 

The Body of the Letter 170 

The Conclusion 170 

Folding 173 

The Superscription 174 

The Stamp 178 

Postal Cards 180 

Important Suggestions 180 

Letters of Recommendation 184 

Letters of Application 185 

Letters of Introduction 186 

Letters of Credit 188 

Letters Ordering Goods 189 

Telegrams 192 

Advertisements 192 

Exercises in Business Letters 193 

Social Letters of Introduction 195 

Letters of Svmpathy 196 

Letters of rbngratulation 197 

Letters of Affection or Friendship 197 

Notes 197 

Informal and Formal Notes 198 

Wedding Invitations 201 

Cards 203 

Exercises in Social Letters 206 

Business Forms 207 

Abbreviations 213 




ERRATA. 

1. Page 45, line 6, for "Tho," read "Thou." 

2. Page 50, line 24, for "most rapidly," read "most wisely. 

3. Page 53, line 34, for "best," read "better." 

4. Page 65, line 33, for "Columbus'," read "Columbus's." 

5. Page 66, line 4, for "great," read "greatly." 




ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

1. Grammar teaches the art of speaking and writing 
language correctly. 

2. English Grammar teaches the art of speaking and 
writing correctly the English language. 

3. Etymology treats of the classification and derivation 
of words. 

4. Syntax treats of the construction of sentences. 

5. Analysis is the separation of a sentence into its ele- 
ments. 

LESSON I. 

6. PARTS OF SPEECH. 

With reference to their use, words are divided into eight 
Parts of Speech. 

1. Nouns, 5. Adverbs, 

2. Pronouns, 6. Prepositions, 

3. Adjectives, 7, Conjunctions, 

4. Yerbs, 8. Interjections. 

Note. — The Participle, which has been treated by some grammarians 
as a separate part of speech, is not so considered in this work, because 
it has no independent use, but is a noun, an adjective, or a part of a verb. 
It is classed with the verb, because it is always derived from a verb. 

7 . PARTS OF SPEECH DEFINED. 

1. NOUNS. 

A Noun is the name of any person, place, or thing. 

Examples. — Mary, boy, New York, joy, home, Mr. Brown, 
truth, &c. 



8 

Exercise. 
Point out the Nouns: 

1. The children are singing. 

2. The birds rock their babies in the tops of the trees. 

3. The World's Fair was held in the city of Chicago. 

4. Joy, sorrow, hope, despair, go to make up life. 

5. In life or death, we are under the care of God. 

6. Jack Frost slid to the earth on a starbeam. 

7. That night, on my pallet of straw, I saw a vision. 

8. Leonidas and his brave band were killed to a man. 

9. The glory of Venice began with the Crusades. 

2. PRONOUNS. 

A Pronoun is a word used instead of a noun. 

Examples. — /, thou, he, she, it, who, them, they, us, my, your, 
their, &c. 

Exercise. 
Point out the Pronouns: 

1 . John does his work well. 

2. Mr. Brown told his son he could accompany him. 

3. We, the citizens of Virginia, declare that our rights 
shall not be taken from us. 

4. Mary's mother said she could go with us, if we would 
take good care of her. 

5. The Spartans were a brave people, and they showed 
their appreciation of bold deeds by richly re warding them. 

6. Who has offended you? 

7. The man who lends loses both his coin and his friends. 

8. He told the story to me and denied it to you. 

3. ADJECTIVES. 

An Adjective is a word used to describe or limit a noun 

or a pronoun. 

Examples. — These, many, three, bright, sad, beautiful, yon, few, 
gentle, the, a, an, &e. 

Exercise. 
Point out the Nouns aud Adjectives: 

1. Old age should be respected by young people. 

2. Ten men were killed the day before. 

3. Many cooks will spoil a good pie. 

4. The.se persons have few comforts. 



5. Yonder mountain towers above the surrounding hills. 

6. Both girls were reproved for making much disorder. 

7. The dazzling sun has given way to mournful night. 

8. Pure thoughts and noble actions spring from the same 
source. 

4. VERBS. 

A Verb is a word that denotes action or mere being. 
Examples. — Bun, go, play, appear, is, were, am, come, write, &c. 

Exercise. 
Point out t he Verbs and Nouns : 

1. The birds rock in the tree-tops. 

2. The crickets chirrup and sing merrily. 

3. His sad story touched me. 

4. The children dance and play in the green fields. 

5. I am sure you made the mistake. 

6. You should have written your letter yesterday. 

7. We are going to the mountain. 

8. He taught me that it was wicked to waste time. 

9. His words struck me with horror. 



5. ADVERBS. 
An Adverb tells how, when, where, why, or to 

What degree anything is done. 

Examples. — Quickly, gently, easily, now, then, there, very, ex- 
tremely, &c. 

Point out the Adverbs, and tell what each denotes: 

1. He walks slowly. 6. Come to see us often. 

2. I live there. 7. I am extremely sorry for 

my fault. 

3. He is very poor. 8. When did you come? 

4. Come with me now. 9. Why must you leave? 

5. He spoke angrily. 10. She loves you very dearly. 



6. PREPOSITIONS. 

A Preposition shows the relation between its object and 
another word with which it connects its object. 



10 

Examples. — To, at, from, with, in, into, across, beyond, behind, 
between, over, under, &c. 

Exercise. 

Point out the Preposition, its object, and the -word with 
which it connects the object: 

1. He sat beside me. 5. He hesitates between two 

courses. 

2. He lives across the river. 6. He spoke to me in gentlest 

manner. 

3. The sky is above us. 7. He sailed over the sea. 

4. He crept under the table. 8. I come from home. 



7. CONJUNCTIONS. 

A Conjunction joins words, sentences, and parts of sen- 
tences. 

Examples. — And, but, if, because, or, though, &c. 

Exercise. 
Point out the connecting words, and tell what they connect: 

1. Lee and Jackson were brave men. 

2. To conquer or to die was his determination. 

3. I will go, if you do not object. 

4. I went there, but I did not remain. 

5. I yielded, though I was not wrong. 

6. I study, because I wish to learn. 

8. INTERJECTIONS. 

An Interjection denotes sudden or strong emotion. 
Examples. — Alas! oh! ha! bravo! ah! &c. 

Exercise. 
Point out the Interjections: 

1 . Ha ! now I have you. 4. Ah ! now I see you. 

2. Alas ! all hope is dead. 5. Pshaw ! that is nonsense. 

3. God, be merciful ! 6. Bravo ! you did that well. 



11 

LESSON II. 
8. SENTENCES. 

A Sentence is a thought expressed in language. 
Aecording to use, sentences are divided into four classes : 

Declarative, Interrogative, Exclamatory, Imperative. 

The Declarative Sentence asserts or declares something. 

Note. — The Declarative Sentence is always followed by a period. 

Examples. 

1. The winds are moaning. 3. Honesty is the best policy. 

2. The lightning flashes. 4. Sin walks abroad. 

2. The Interrogative Sentence asks a question. 

Note. — The Interrogative Sentence is always followed by an interro- 
gation point. 

Examples. 

1. Why did you leave us? 3. Who told you that? 

2. Is all hope dead ? 4. Which is the right road ? 

3. The Exclamatory Sentence expresses emotion, or 
strong feeling. 

Note. — The Exclamatory Sentence is always followed by an exclama- 
tion point. 

Examples. 

1. What a dreary prospect ! 3. How I long for home ! 

2. How cruel you are! 4. What happiness lies buried 

there ! 

4. The Imperative Sentence expresses a command or 
an entreaty. 

Note. — The Imperative Sentence is usually followed by a period, but 
in cases of strong excitement it may take an exclamation point after it. 

Examples. 

1. Do as I tell you. 4. Tell me what you saw. 

2. Have pity on me ! 5. Blow, winds, and crack 

your cheeks. 

3. Go to your place. 6. Save me from this dark de- 

spair. 



12 



Exercise. 

Change the following declarative sentences to exclama- 
tory and interrogative forms : 

Examples. — The wind blows hard. (Dec.) 

How hard the wind blows! (Ex.) 
Does not the wind blow hard? (Int.) 

1. I long to see my old home. 

2. You are an 'ungrateful person. 

3. He has been with us only a short time. 

4. Fond memory brings the light of other days around me. 

5. Nero was a cruel tyrant. 

6. This hour of calm is very peaceful. 

9. SUBJECT, PREDICATE, AND OBJECT. 

Every sentence may be divided into two parts. 

One part tells what is spoken of, and is called the Sub- 
ject, The other part tells what is said about the subject, 
and is called the Predicate. 

We thus see — 

1. The Subject of a sentence is that of which something 
is said. 

2. The Predicate is that which is said of the subject. 

Example. — Boys play. Boys is what we are speaking of, 
and is the subject. Play tells what is said of the boys, and is 
the predicate. 

Every complete sentence has a subject and a predicate. 

In the interrogative sentence, a part of the predicate 
usually comes before the subject; as, Has he come? 

In the imperative sentence, the subject is usually omitted, 
and thou or you is understood, and should be supplied by 
the mind ; as, (You) Sit down. 

3. The Object is the part of the sentence that completes 
the meaning of the verb. It answers the questions What? 
or Whom? asked after the verb. 

Examples. — John struck James. He sells groceries. I found 
a knife. 



13 



Note* — The verb to DO, "with its various forms (am, is, are, was, were, 
&c.) never takes an object. Nouns used after these words form a part 
of the predicate of the sentence. 

Example. — Dogs are animals. Animals is a part of the 
predicate of the sentence. 

Exercise. 

Select the Subjects, Predicates, and Objects in the folio-w- 
ing sentences, and tell -whether the sentences are declar- 
ative, interrogative, exclainative, or imperative. 

1. Alcohol is injurious. 

2. Lower your weapons. 

3. The curfew tolls the knell of parting day. 

4. How bright is the winter snow ! 

5. Come ye in peace? 

6. What did you find under the hillside? 

7. Errors, like straws, float upon the surface. 

8. We arranged matters satisfactorily. 

9. The night has a thousand eyes. 

10. Shall I defend a man in error? 

11. Trust God for the future. 

12. He is my best friend. 

10. ENLARGED SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 
The simple subject taken with its modifying words is 

called The Enlarged Subject, 

The simple predicate taken with its modifying words is 

called The Enlarged Predicate. 

"Bountiful Nature gives freely the treasures of land and 
sea." 

1. Nature tells what is spoken of. Subject. 

2. Gives tells what is done by the subject. Predicate. 

3. Bountiful describes Nature. Adjective Element. 

4. Freely tells how the giving is done. Adverbial Ele- 
ment. 

5. Treasures tells what Nature gives. Objective Ele- 
ment. 

6. Of land and sea describes the treasures. Adjective 
Element. 



14 



" Bountiful Nature" is the enlarged subject of this sen- 
tence. "Gives freely the treasures of land and sea" is the 
enlarged predicate. 

The Subject and Predicate are the Principal Elements of 
every sentence. 

The Subordinate Elements are— 

1. The Adjective Element, which modifies a noun or 
pronoun. 

Examples. — The man of sense acts honestly. The dark day 
is ended. This is a school for small children. 

Note. — Every element which modifies a noun or pronoun must be an 
adjective element, because it either describes or limits the noun or pro- 
noun. 

2. The Objective Element, which is the object of a verb, 
and answers the questions what? or whom? 

Examples. — I love my friends. She dislikes deceit. They 
followed us. He tried to kill the children. 

3. The Adverbial Element, which tells how, when, 

where, why, or to what degree any thing is done. 

Examples.— I go to school. He is exceedingly kind. I will 
go on your return. He acted nobly. 

Exercise. 

1. The blood circulates freely through the body. 

2. Fond memory brings the light of other days around me. 

3. You are a cruel and ungrateful man. 

4. The lowing herd winds slowly o'er the lea. 

5. He gave gold for medicine. 

In the above sentences, what kind of an element is— 

1. Freely? through the body? circulates? blood? the? 

2. Fond? memory? light? brings? of other days? 
around me? 

3. Man? cruel and ungrateful ? you? a? 

4. Lowing? herd? winds? slowly? o'er the lea? 

5. He ? gave ? gold ? for medicine ? 

In the above sentences, what is the enlarged subject in the 
first sentence ? In the second? In the fourth? What is the 
enlarged predicate in the first ? In the second ? In the third ? 
In the fourth ? In the fifth ? 



15 
LESSON III. 

NOUNS. 

11. CLASSES OF NOUNS. 

1. Proper Nouns are names of particular persons, places, 
or things. 

Examples. — Kansas, John, England, Parliament, Mr. Brown, 
New York, &c. 

Note. — Proper nouns and words derived from proper notms must be 
written with capitals ; as, Spanish, English, American, America, Spain &c. 

2. Common Nouns are names that may be applied to any 
one of a class of objects. 

Examples. — Boy, house, girl, town, shoe, horse, &c. 

Note. — Common Nouns may be divided into four classes : 

1. Class Nouns representing any one of a class of objects ; 
as, dress, chair, man, &c. 

2. Collective Nouns, which have a plural meaning, but a 
singular form ; as, nation, army, audience, Congress, &c. 

3. Abstract Nouns, which are the names of special qualities 
belonging to objects ; as, despair, joy, hope, &c. 

4. Participial Nouns, which are the names of different actions 
or states of being; as, Singing is pleasant. Playing is health- 
ful. Being sick is disagreeable. / 

Exercise. 
Select the Proper Nouns and the Common Nonns, and tell 
which are Collective Nouns. Tell the subjects and predicates 
in the sentences. 

1. America is a large country. 

2. Congress has adjourned. 

3. Tender plants require great care. 

4. The history of Rome is interesting. 

5. Painted pictures are dead speakers. 

6. A man's will makes his energy. 

7. Sir Ralph tore his hair in violent despair. 

8. Arabia, yields sweet spices. 

9. Prevention is better than medicine. 

10. The house lay snug as a robin's nest beneath a flower- 
ing tree. 

11. The mother draws her child from a downward fate. 

12. King John of England gave to his people the bill of 
rights called the Magna Charta. 

13. The love of money is the root of all evil. 

14. The nation is in great danger of being destroyed by 
its army. 



16 

LESSON IV. 

PROPERTIES OF NOUNS. 

GENDER, PERSON, NUMBER, AND CASE. 

12. GENDER. 

Gender distinguishes male from female. There are really 
only two genders, masculine and feminine; but, for 
the sake of better classification, we divide nouns into — 

1. The Masculine Gender, denoting male. 
Examples. — King, Mr. Smith, ox, emperor, boy, man, &c. 

2. The Feminine Gender, denoting female. 

Examples. — Jennie, lioness, girl, woman, princess, Mrs. Smith, 
lady, &c. 

3. The Common Gender, denoting either male or female. 
Examples. — Bird, parent, companion, traveler, &c. 

4. The Neuter Gender, denoting neither male nor 

female. 

Examples.— House % anger, gold, wood, sorrow, joy, table, chair, 
stone, &c. 

MASCULINE AND FEMININE NOUNS. 



Masculine. 



Feminine. 



Masculine. 



Feminine. 



Murderer. 


Murderess. 


Nephew. 


Niece. 


Landlord. 


Landlady. 


Author. 


Authoress 


Host. 


Hostess. 


Prince. 


Princess. 


Son. 


Daughter. 


Duke. 


Duchess. 


Widower. 


Widow. 


King. 


Queen. 


Husband. 


Wife. 


Father. 


Mother. 


Master. 


Mistress. 


Sir. 


Madam. 


Executor. 


Executrix. 


Jesse. 


Jessie. 


Actor. 


Actress. 


Giant. 


Giantess. 


Uncle. 


Aunt. 


Man. 


Woman. 


Tiger. 


Tigress. 


Francis. 


Frances. 


Lion. 


Lioness. 


Emperor. 


Empress. 


Heir. 


Heiress. 


Jew. 


Jewess. 


Hero. 


Heroine. 


Earl or Count. 


Countess. 



Give the gender of people, New York, companion, hat, 
legislature, traveler, earth, bird, animal, paper, dog, friend. 



17 

13. PERSON. 

Person represents the one who is speaking, the one who 
is spoken to, or the one who is spoken of. 
1. First Person denotes the speaker. 

Examples. — 1. I, John, saw these things. 

2. Come to see us. 

3. We, the people of the United States, &c. 

4. Our place is here. 

2. Second Person denotes the person spoken to. 

Examples. — 1. My son, remember my laws. 

2. Yes, Mary, you may go. 

3. Ladies and gentlemen, I rise to address you. 

3. Third Person denotes the person or thing spoken of. 

Examples. — 1. I saw the boy. 

2. Give me the book. 

3. We love our. 



14. NUMBER. 

Nouns and pronouns are either Singular or Plural Num- 
ber. 

1. Singular Number denotes onlv one. 

Examples. — Poet, tooth, ox, knife, mouse, &c. 

2. Plural Number denotes more than one. 

Examples. — Poets, teeth, oxen, knives, mice, &c, 

FORMATION OF PLURALS. 

1. Some nouns are alike in singular and plural ; as, deer, 
sheep, swine, trout, perch, vermin, grouse, &c. 

2. Some nouns have no singular forms; as, trousers, 
scissors, goods, tongs, pantaloons, &c. 

3. Some nouns form their plurals irregularly; as, man, 
men ; child, children ; mouse, mice, &c. 

4. Letters, figures, marks, and signs form their plurals 
by adding 's; as, 2's and 3's ; n y sandm y s; IPs; — 's. 



18 



5. In compound words, the part which is described by 
the rest is generally pluralized ; as, club-foot, club-feet ; 
brother-in-law, brothers-in-law; knight-errant, knights- 
errant. 

6. Some compound words have both parts pluralized; 
as, man-child, men-children ; woman-singer, women-singers ; 
knigh t- templar, kn igh ts-templa rs . 

7. Nouns consisting of a name and a title may have either 
part pluralized, but not both. If, however, a number pre- 
cedes the noun, only the name becomes plural ; as, The 
Messrs. Johnson; the Misses Smith; the two Miss Ben- 
sons ; the three Mr. Smiths. 

8. Some nouns usually singular are made plural when 
referring to different kinds of the same substance; as, wines, 
sugars, the peoples (meaning the nations) of the earth. 

9. Some nouns from foreign languages retain their foreign 
plurals, changing us to i, radius, radii; um and on to 
a, phenomenon, phenomena, stratum, strata ; is to es or ides, 
analysis, analyses, ephemeris, ephemerides ; x to ces or ices, 
index, indices. 

10. Some nouns have two plurals of different meanings ; 
as, Index, Indices (algebraic signs) and Indexes (tables of 
contents). Brother, [Brothers (of a family) and Brethren 
(of a society). Head, Heads (of bodies) and Head (of 
cattle). Genius, Genii (spirits) and Geniuses (men of talent.) 





Exercise. 




Form the plurals of the following: 




Hanger-on. 


Axis. 


Cupful. 


Wisdom-tooth. 


Appendix. 


Flag-staff. 


Pailful. 


Step-mother. 


Window-gl 


Woman-hater. 


Loaf. 


Looker-on. 


Miss Manson. 


Mr. Brown. 


Penny. 


Account-book. 


Letter-writer. 


Sheep. 


Valley. 


Man-slayer. 


Tooth. 


Goose. 


Alleghany. 


Deer. 



19 



15. CASE. 
Case denotes the relation that a noun or pronoun bears 
to other words in the sentence. 
There are four cases : 

1. Nominative Case is the use of a noun or pronoun as 
the subject or predicate of a sentence. 

Examples. — Mary sings. Charles was crowned king. Dogs 
are animals. 

2. Possessive Case denotes fitness or possession. 

Examples. — The author's books; the bird's flight; ladies' 
dresses. 

Note 1.— The Possessive Case of Singular Nouns is formed by 
adding ' s to the noun. The Possessive Case of Plural Nouns is 

formed by adding the apostrophe alone, if the plural ends in g, and by 
adding 's, if the plural does not end in g. 

Singular, boy's, man's, lady's, child's. 

Plural, boys', men's, ladies', children's. 

Note 2. — When the noun in the possessive case has another noun in 
apposition with it, the 'g should be placed with the last one. 

Example. — This is Mr. Brown, the merchant's, house. 
In the names offirms, put the 'g only to the last name; as, Brown 
& Smith's warehouse ; Handy & Co.'s machines. 

3. Objective Case is the use of a noun or pronoun as 

the object of a verb or of a preposition. 

Examples. — The murderer killed his victim. John likes 
music. He sits behind the door. He came from England. 

4. Absolute Case or Case Independent is the inde- 
pendent use of a noun or pronoun, bearing no relation to 
other words in the sentence. 

Examples. — 0, horror! My son, listen to me. 
Nouns may be in the absolute case — 

1. By direct address; as, Mary, come here. 

2. By pleonasm; as, My father— how I loved him! 

3. With a participle; as, Our troubles ended, we 
began to hope. 

4. By exclamation; as, Oh, horrible sight! 
Nouns in apposition with other nouns (meaning 

the same person, place, or thing as other words) always 



20 



have the same case as the words with which they are 

in apposition. 

Example. — Paul, the great apostle, was a learned man. 

Here apostle is in apposition with Paul, and it is in the 
nominative case, because Paul is nominative. Washington, 
our capital city, is a beautiful place. Mr. Smith, the lawyer, 
has just left. The Stars and Stripes, the flag of our Union, 
waves proudly. 

TO BE CORRECTED : 

1. Several strange phenomenons have startled us lately. 

2. I have three brother-in-laws and two sisters-in-law. 

3. I counted four wagons-load of furniture passing here. 

4. This is my father's, Mr. Brown's, house. 

5. The three Misses Smith are very pretty. 

6. Several mens' hats were stolen. 

7. Behind them rode a body of knight-templars. 

8. He bears off the honors that seemed within his brother's 
Henry's grasp. 

9. He was the peoples choice. 

10. The childs' slumbers were disturbed. 

Exercise. 

Give the case of the nouns in the following: 

1. Mary is my sister. 

2. I study grammar. 

3. Mary, my sister, came with me. 

4. The book is on the table. 

5. Come, my friend, to my heart. 

6. He lives in Virginia, my old home. 

7. The story finished, we left the room. 

8. John's hat is stolen. 

9. Milton, the poet, was blind. 

16. PARSING. 

Friends, the time has come when Freedom's heel must 
crush her enemies. 

Friends. Time. Freedom's. Enemies. 

Com. N. Com. N. Proper N. Com. N. 

Com. Gender. N. Gender. Fem. Gender. Com. Gender. 

2d Person. 3d Person. 3d Person. 3d Person. 

Plural No. Sing. Number. Sing. No. Plural No. 

Absolute Case, Nom. Case, |Poss. Case, Obj. Case, 

By direct ad- Subject of verb Possesses Object of 

dress. has come. heel. must crush. 



21 



17. ORDER OF PARSING NOUNS 

Class. 
Gender. 
Person. 
Number. 
' Case and Why. 



LESSON V. 

18. PRONOUNS. 

Frequently to prevent the repetition of a noun, we use in 
its place another word called a Pronoun, Instead of say- 
ing " Mary told John that JKary's mother would allow 
JKavy to accompany John," we say " Mary told John that 
her mother would allow her to accompany him. 99 

In speaking of males, we use the pronouns he, his, 

him. 

In speaking of females, we say she and her. 
In speaking of things, we say it and its. 
In speaking of more than one, whether male, female, or 
neuter, we say they, their, and them. 

19. PROPERTIES OF PRONOUNS. 
As Pronouns stand for nouns, they have, like nouns, 
Gender, ^Person, JVtimber, and Case. 

20. ANTECEDENTS. 

The Antecedent of a Pronoun is the noun for which it 

stands or to which it refers. 

Example. — "The commander cheered his men." Com- 
mander is the antecedent of Ms. 

"Mary loves her mother." Mary is the antecedent of her. 

Sometimes the antecedent of a pronoun is not expressed. 

Example. — "Jam sorry for my fault." Here the noun 
for which I and my stand is not expressed, so we say their 
antecedents are understood. 



22 



21. CLASSES OF PRONOUNS. 

There are three classes of pronouns : 

1. Personal Pronouns stand for nouns and show by 

their form whether they are first, second, or third 

person. 

The personal pronouns are 2, thou, he, she, it, with their 
various forms. 

2. Relative Pronouns relate to some noun before men- 
tioned in the sentence. 

The relative pronouns are who, whose, whom, which, that, and 
sometimes what. 

Examples. — People who try will succeed. Things which 
puzzle us often aid us. 

3. Interrogative Pronouns are those which refer to some 

noun, and are used in asking questions. 

The interrogative pronouns are who, whose, whom, which, 
and what, when they are used to ask questions. 

Examples. — What is the matter? Which did you choose? 
Who is there? Whom did you see? 



LESSON VI. 
22. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

Personal Pronouns are divided into two classes : 

1. The Simple Personal Pronouns are I, thou, 

he, she, and it, with their different forms. 

2. The Compound Personal Pronouns are 

formed by adding self or selves to the Simple. 

Examples. — Myself, ourselves, yourself, themselves, himself, her- 



23. DECLENSION 


OF 


PERSONAL 


PRONOUNS. 






FIRST 


PERSON. 




Singular. 

Nominative. I. 
Possessive. My or mine. 
Objective. Me. 


Plural 

We. 

Our or ours. 

Us. 





23 



SECOND PERSON- 



Singnlar. 

Nom. You. 

Poss. Your or yours. 

Obj. You. 



-MODERN FORM. 

Plural. 

You. 

Your or yours. 

You. 



SECOND PERSON— POETIC OR ANCIENT FORM. 



Singular. 

Nom. Thou. 
Poss. Thy or thine. 
Obj. Thee. 



Plural. 

Ye. 

Your or yours. 
You. 



THIRD PERSON. 



Nom. 
Poss. 
Obj. 



Singular. 

M. F. N. 
He — she— it. 
His — her — its. 
Him — her — it. 



Plural. 

They. 

Their or theirs. 

Them. 



COMPOUND PERSONAL PRONOUNS 

FIRST PERSON. 



N. 


and O. 


Singular. 

Myself. 


Plural. 

N. and O. Ourselves. 








SECOND PERSON. 


N. 


andO. 


Singular. 

Yourself. 


Plural. 

N. and O. Yourselves. 

THIRD PERSON. 


N. 


and 0. 


Singular. 

Himself. 
Herself. 
Itself. 


Plural. 

(Mas.) N. and O. Themselves. 

(Fem.) 

(Neut.) 



24, AGREEMENT OF PRONOUNS AND ANTECEDENTS. 
A Pronoun must always agree with its antecedent in 
gender, person, and number. 

Example.— The sentence ''Every man must do their duty" 
is wrong, because the pronoun their does not agree with its 
antecedent man in number, their being plural number, while 
man is singular. It should be "should do his duty." 



24 



Exercise. 

Correct the following and tell whether the pronouns do 
not agree with their antecedents in gender, person, number, 
or case. 

1. Every person believes their own way to be best. 

2. Every one of those girls has done well in their studies. 

3. I love my friends — they who have stood by me. 

4. The old tree bent his waving boughs. 

5. Every person thinks they know more than their neigh- 
bor. 

6. It was Mary— her who first warned you. 

25. CASE FORMS OF PRONOUNS. 

/. Only the nominative case form of prononns should 
be used as subjects or predicates. 

Examples. — Thou art an enemy. We love music. They see 
no danger. It is /. It was he who fell. It was she who 
called. He and /are great friends. They and / are opposed 
to each other. 

2. Only the objective case form of pronouns should be 
used as the object of a transitive verb or a preposition. 

Examples.— John struck me. God will punish thee. Come 
with us. I gave the parcel to you and him. There is hard 
feeling between him and me. Between you and me, that was 
a failure. I came to see him and her. 

j. Only the possessive case form of pronouns should be 
used to indicate ownership or possession. 

Examples.— That boy is my brother. Her name is Mary. 
Their labor was in vain. 

QUESTIONS. 

1. What pronoun is first person singular, nominative case ? 

2. Give the objective plural form of he. 

3. Give the nominative singular form of them. 

4. What pronoun represents the neuter gender? 

5. What case is me ? their? us? Tier? its? you? my? he? I? 
his? them? she? our? they? mine? we? him? 



25 



Exercise. 

Correct the folio-wing and give reasons: 

1. Her and me are good friends. 

2. It was me who called. 

3. Pray for he whom thou lovest. 

4. Deal gently with they that err. 

5. This is him of whom you spoke. 

6. No one but he knows my secret. 

7. Them are my parents. 

8. I ask favors' of none but thou. 

9. Him and I sit together. 

26. COMMON ERRORS. 

/. The pronoun "you " is both singular and plural, but 

always takes the plural verb. 

Examples.— "You were always true to me," "You are 
mistaken," not "You was always true to me," "You t« 
mistaken." 

2. When personal pronouns of different persons are 

used, the second person comes first, third person next, 

first person, or speaker, last. 

Example. — " You, Tie, and I are good friends," not "J, lie, 
and you are good friends." 

j. Do not use the different forms of " thou " and "you" 

in the same connection. 

Example. — "Prepare yourself for death, for your time has 
come," not "Prepare thyself for death, for your time has 
come." 

4. Do not use " theirn "for " theirs" " hisn "for " his" 
"yourn "for "yours" " hern "for " hers." 

Do not use the apostrophe to indicate the possessive of 

pronouns. 

Examples— "My interests are the same as yours" (not 
yourn). "Hers (not liefs) was declared the best specimen." 

5. Do not use both the pronoun and its antecedent as 
the subject of a sentence. 



26 

Example. — "James has been quite sick, " not "James Tie has 
been quite sick." 

6. Do not omit pronouns that are subjects of sentences. 

Example. — "I hope you enjoyed yourself," not "Rope you 
enjoyed yourself." 

J. When the antecedent of a pronoun is modified by 
"each" "every" "either" "neither" or " not a" the 
pro?ioun should be singular. 

These words can modify only singular nouns. 

Examples. — "Every person strives for Ms own interest," not 
"their own interest." "Neither child has done his duty," 
not "their duty." 

8. Pronouns that modify participial nouns should have 
the possessive case form. 

Examples. — "I do not object to your going with me," not 
"I do not object to you going with me." "His being sick 
need not detain you," not "He being sick need not detain 
you." 

Exercise. 
Correct and give reasons: 

1. Theirn is the best way. 

2. Many words they darken counsel. 

3. Each little flower of the fields has their own laws of 
growth. 

4. The package was for you and I. 

5. Him leaving early need not hurry you. 

6. The right to do evil is neither your's nor hisn. 

7. No person can call me their enemy. 

8. You should not wait till thy best moments are past. 

9. Mr. Smith and I and you will go together. 

10. He spoke of them doing so much good. 

11. Many people they do not understand our laws. 

12. Sorry I had to leave so soon. 

13. Neither one would say they were to blame. 

14. Either boy is able to fill the place if they will but do 
their best. 

Note. — See model for parsing personal pronouns after "The Inter- 
rogative Pronouns." 



27 

LESSON VII. 

27. RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 

The Relative Pronoun relates to some noun already 
mentioned in the sentence. 

It does not show its person by its form. 

The Simple Relatives are who, whose, whom, 
whieh, and that . 

The Compound Relatives are formed by adding 

ever, SO, and soever to the simple relatives. 

Examples. — Whoso, whomsoever, whichsoever, whoever, whichso, 
whatsoever, &c. 

Who is used to refer to persons. 
Example. — This is the man who sent me. 

Which refers to animals and inanimate objects, 

Examples.— I give you the books which were sent. The dog 
which you see is mine. 

That refers to either persons or things. 

Examples. — "The man that is slow to wrath is great." 
11 Books that injure the mind should be avoided." 

What is a relative when it can be changed to that 
which, that being the direct object of the verb. 

Exercises. — "Give me what you have brought me" is 
equal to " Give me that which you have, &c. 

Note. — Several clauses introduced by relative pronouns and depend- 
ing on the same word should begin with the same relative pronoun. 

Ex. — He that hath a contented mind and that hath gained mastery- 
over himself, controls the universe, not He that hath a contented mind 
and -who hath gained mastery, &c. 

28. DECLENSION OF RELATIVES. 

Singular and Plural. Singular and Plural. 

Norn. Who. Which. 

Poss. Whose. Whose. 

Obj. . Whom. Which. 



28 



Exercise. 

Point out the relatives and their antecedents in the follow- 
ing : 

1. He who would reap well must sow well. 

2. Pride, which stifles the better nature, loses us many 
friends. 

3. Leonidas, who is a prominent historical character, and 
whose small force defeated the Persian host, perished at 
Thermopylae. 

4. Plato's school of philosophy, which was presided over 
by him for forty years, was of world-wide fame. 

5. The person whom you can trust is the one in whom to 
confide. 

6. The man whose heart is pure leads a true life. 

Note. — See model for parsing Relatives after "Interrogative Pro- 
nouns." 

Exercise. 

Unite the pairs of sentences into one, by the use of a relative 
nrononn. 

1. The man is my father. 
You spoke to the man. 

2. That is the boy. 

I borrowed his books. 

3. The girl is named Mary. 
You punished her. 

4. We lived in a city. 

It was burned during the war. 

5. I know the man. 

You have just been talking with him. 



LESSON VIII. 
29. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 

An Interrogative Pronoun is a pronoun used in asking a 
question. 

The Interrogative Pronouns are who, whose, whom, 
Which, and what, when used in asking questions. 

Examples. — Who goes there? Which is hers? Whom di 
you see? Whose mistake was that? What is the matter? 



29 

30. THE SUBSEQUENT OF AN INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN. 

The Subsequent of an Interrogative Pronoun is the noun 
or pronoun that comes after the question and answers it. 

Note. — The subsequent of an interrogative pronoun corresponds to 
the antecedent of a relative or a personal pronoun. It is called sub- 
sequent, because, as it answers the question, it conies after the pro- 
noun. Antecedents go before the pronoun. 

The Interrogative Pronoun must always agree with its 

subsequent in gender, person, and number. 

Examples. — "Who is that? Mary." Here who is feminine 
gender, third person, singular number, to agree with its 
subsequent Mary. "What have you there? Three books." 
Here what is neuter gender, third person, plural number, to 
agree with its subsequent books. 

31. DECLENSION OF INTERROGATIVES. 

S. and P. S. and P. 

Nom. Which. Who. What is indeclinable. 

Poss. Whose. Whose. 
Obj. Which. Whom. 

Correct the folio-wing sentences and give reasons : 

1. It was me who called you. 

2. This man he has acted dishonestly. 

3. I, he, and you are good friends. 

4. The package ^vas sent to he and I. 

5. I am older than her. 

6. Who did Napoleon marry ? 

7. The mistake was hern. 

8. The dog who barks seldom bites. 

9. People what do such things cannot be trusted. 

10. The men and women which have just passed are 
Indians. 

11. The error was their's. 

12. Who do you expect to-day? 

13. Am sorry to trouble you so much. 

14. He which laughs best laughs last. 

15. Let you and I try to do better. 

16. He mentioned you studying Latin. 

17. Is this yourn or theirs ? 

18. She is no better than him or me. 

19. I saw Mary and he walking together. 

20. Between you and I, the affair was a failure. 

21. Who the child loves he will obey. 

22. Who called? Me. 

23. I and my sister and you will form the party. 



30 



24. Him and I started out together. 

25. The spider weaves it's web. 

26. Upon each man's conduct in this world depends their 
future happiness. 

27. Each person must decide for themselves. 

28. Who the king loves he will favor. 

29. You cannot do a person any good if you do not trust 
them. 

30. Us children must stay at home. 

31. As for you and I, we will do right. 

32. Dogs who are allowed in the street are dangerous. 

33. Neither one of the boys would own their fault. 

34. Not a single person can carry their wealth to heaven. 



32. MODEL FOR PARSING. 

1. We seldom tell people of the error of their ways. 

2. Save the child whom thou lovest, 

3. Who was with you ? My father. 



We. 



Their. 



Sim. Pers. Pro. Sim. Pers. Pro. 
Ant. understood. Antec. people. 
Com. Gender. Com. Gender. 
1st Person. 3d Person. 

Plural No. Plural No. 



Whom. 



Who. 



Sim. Relative Pro. Interrog. Pro. 
Antec. child. Subse. father. 

Com. Gender. Mas. Gender. 

3d Person. 3d Person. 

Singular No. Singular No. 



Declension. Declension. Declension. 

Sing. Plu. S. P. S. and P. 

N. I. We. N. He. They. 'N. Who. 

P. My. Our. P. His. Their. P. Whose. 

O. Me. Us. O. Him. Them. O. Whom. 

Nom. Case, Poss. Case, Objective Case, 

Subject of verb Possesses Object of 

"tell." "ways." "lovest." 



Declension* 

S. and P. 

N. Who. 
P. Whose. 
O. Whom. 
Nominative Case, 
Subject of verb 
" was." 



33. ORDER OF PARSING PRONOUNS. 



Class. 

Antecedent. 

Gender. 

Person. 

Number. 

Declension. 

Case and Why. 



31 
LESSON IX. 

34. ADJECTIVES. 

An Adjective describes or limits the meaning of a noun 
or pronoun. 

Examples. — A dark sky; many words; ten men; the ha,t; a 
rose; an apple; pleasant manners. 

Note. — Every modifier of a noun or pronoun is an adjective element. 

CLASSES OF ADJECTIVES. 

1. Descriptive. 

2. Limiting. 

3. Participial. 

4. Proper. 

1. Descriptive Adjectives describe a noun or pronoun, 

giving some quality belonging to it. 

Examples. — A bright day; a tiresome visitor; white sails; 
the golden sun ; a bad boy. 

2. Limiting Adjectives limit the meaning of a noun or 

pronoun without giving any quality. They point out or 

limit in quantity. 

Examples. — T7ie,a, an, many, same, much, more, this, that, these, 
latter, former, both, <ftc. 

Note.— The Limiting Adjectives, the, a, an, are called articles. An 

is used instead of a before words beginning with a vowel sound ; as, an 
apple, an alliance, an ugly man. 

3. Participial Adjectives are those words which are 

derived from verbs, but modify nouns or pronouns. 

Examples. — Bleached cotton; whitened faces; the army 
drawn up in battle array ; the letter written to you ; our loved 
ones ; the boy, whistling merrily, ran away. 

4. Proper Adjectives are those derived from proper 



Examples. — Miltonic; American people; French nation; 
Byronic. 



32 



Nouns may often be converted into adjectives ; as, a garden 
party ; forest scenery ; willow branches ; Virginia hospitality ; 
landscape painting. 

35. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 

Comparison of adjectives is giving the different degrees of 
quality belonging to them. 

Many adjectives do not admit of comparison. 

DEGREES OF COMPARISON. 

Positive. 

Comparative. 

Superlative. 

1. The Positive Degree is the first, or simplest degree. 

Examples.— A happy man ; plain clothing ; much wisdom ; a 
bad venture ; a beautiful child. 

2. The Comparative Degree is the next higher or lower 
degree. 

It is usually formed by adding er or more to the Positive 
Degree. 

Examples. — A happier ma,n ; plainer clothing; more wisdom ; 
a worse venture; a more beautiful child. 

3. The Superlative Degree is the highest or lowest 
degree. 

It is usually formed by adding est or most to the Positive 
Degree. 

Examples. — The happiest man; plainest clothing; most 
wisdom ; the worst venture ; the most beautiful child. 

In Descending Comparison, less is added to the Positive 
to form the Comparative, and least, to form the Super- 
lative. 

Examples. — Pos. modest, Com. less modest. Super, least modest; 
wise, less wise, least wise, &c. 



33 



SOME ADJECTIVES COMPARED. 



P. 


C. 


S. 


Many. 


More. 


Most. 


Much. 


More. 


Most. 


Far. 


Farther. 


Farthest. 


Bad. 


Worse. 


Worst. 


Evil. 


Worse. 


Worst. 


Good. 


Better. 


Best. 


Little. 


Less. 


Least. 


Gentle. 


Gentler. 


Gentlest. 


Honorable. 


More honorable. 


Most honorable. 


Skilful. 


Less or more skilful. 


Least or most skilful. 


Simple. 


Simpler. 


Simplest. 


Bold. 


Bolder. 


Boldest. 


Cautious. 


More cautious. 


Most cautious. 



Remark. — Many adjectives can be used as nouns; as, 
"The good are happy." "Many came with us." "The simple 
are often the wise,''' &c. 

36. COMMON ERRORS. 

/. Many adjectives cannot be compared ; as, " round, 

square, perfect, complete" &c. 

"My theory is more complete than yours" should be "My 
theory is more nearly complete than yours." We cannot say 
anything is more than perfect or complete or round &c. 

2. Never add " er" and "more" or "est" and" most" 

to the same adjective. This is called double comparison, 

and is a gross error. 

Example. — "He is more happier than before" should be 
"He is happier than before." "This is the most sweetest of all 
moments " should be "This is the sweetest of all moments." 

j. Do not use the superlative degree when only two 

objects are compared with each other. 

Examples. — "Which is the tallest, Mary or her sister?" 
should be " Which is the taller, Mary or her sister?" 

4.. Do not compare adjectives by using " er" and " est" 

when " more" and " most" should be used. 

Examples. — Dreadfuler should be more dreadful. Awfulest 
should be most awful. 



34 

5- Adjectives that are singular or plural in meaning 
should modify corresponding singular or plural nouns. 

Examples. — " These (or those) kind of people annoy me," 
should be " This (or that) kind of people annoy me." This is 
singular number, and we cannot say " these or those kind" any 
more than we can say " these or those book.' 1 '' 

"I bought three bushel of apples " should be " three bushels of 
apples." But " This is a five-pound note ;" " a two-foot rule ; " 
" a two-bushel measure," are correct. 

6. Do not use the pronoun "them" for the adjective 
" those. " 

Examples. — li T7iem are not my sentiments" should be 
" Those are not my sentiments." 

"Them things disturb me" should be "Those things dis- 
turb me." 

Exercise. 

Correct and give reasons : 

1. This is much the best of the two offers. 

2. The awfulest kind of an accident occurred to-day. 

3. The more gentler means*willbe found to be the most 
strongest. 

4. It was hard to say which of the two men was the 
worst manager. 

5. He is dishonester than I thought. 

6. This apple is rounder than that one. 

7. You will only be more happier for having done right. 

8. Which is most improving, meditation or active study? 

9. They told the horriblest tales to frighten us. 

10. This is the most complete work of the kind I ever saw. 

11. Will your plan or mine be most easily carried out? 

12. He is the foolishest person I ever knew. 

13. Of two evils always choose the least. 

14. He bought five pound of sugar and two barrel of flour. 

15. Those sort of expressions are very wrong. 

16. The room measures twenty foot square. 

17. I have two pair of shoes just alike. 

18. Them words thrilled me with their power. 

Exercise. 

Point ont the adjectives in the sentences, give their degree 
of comparison, and tell what nouns or pronouns they modify. 

1. The poorest man may be happy. 

2. Their loftiest peaks are wrapped in dazzling snow. 

3. Often the wisest man is not wise at all. 



35 



4. Beneath her torn hat glowed the wealth of simple 
beauty and rustic health. 

5. I am more unhappy than ever before. 

6. His eager face was full of the keenest intelligence. 

7. I have less desire now for those things. 

8. He is more prudent than I am, but he is less apt to be 
guided by his instincts. 

9. He comes from a far country. 

10. The way was long, the wind was cold. 

11. Her worn dress and torn hat could not hide her beauty. 

37. MODEL FOR PARSING ADJECTIVES. 

A thousand sweetest voices took up the mournful strain. 

Thousand. Sweetest. Mournful. 

Limiting Adj. Descriptive Adj. Descriptive Adj. 

Cannot be com- P. Sweet. P. Mournful, 

pared. C. Sweeter. C. More mournful. 

S. Sweetest. S. Most mournful. 

Has no Degree. Superlative Degree. Positive Degree. 

Modifies voices. Modifies voices. Modifies strain. 

38. ORDER OF PARSING ADJECTIVES. 

Class. 

Comparison. 
Word Modified. 



LESSON X. 

39. VERBS. 

A Yerb is a word that expresses action or mere being". 

Examples.— " The soldier fought bravely" and "lam writing 
a letter" denote action. "He is my friend" and "He looks 
sad" express mere condition or state of being. 

40. TRANSITIVE, INTRANSITIVE AND NEUTER VERBS. 

1. Transitive Verbs are those which take an object to 
complete their meaning. 



36 



Examples.— I love my friends. He pleases me. I saw Mary. 
We eat food. John struck James. I wrote a story. He found 
some money. 

Note.— The object of a transitive verb answers the questions whom? 
or what ? after the verb . 

2. Intransitive Verbs cannot take an object. 

Examples. — The boy runs. I will lie down. The child 
along. I came with my friend. I shall go home soon. 



3. Neuter Verbs express mere condition or being, with- 
out any action at all. 

Note. — Prominent among the neuter verbs are the forms of the verb 
to "be, when not used with a principal verb ; as, am, was, been, is, 
was, were. 

-Examples. — He is here. These men are soldiers. I am in 
danger. He was my friend. They were solemn. I have been 
his enemy. 

Remark.— Be careful not to use adverbs instead of the 
adjective predicate after verbs denoting mere condition ; as, 
He stands guilty The fruit tastes pleasant. The man appears 
happy. The flowers smell sweet. The stars seem bright. Her 
dress looks showy. I feel sick. Not, He stands guiltily. The 
fruit tastes pleasantly. The man appears happily. The flowers 
smell sweetly, &c. 

41. PARTICIPLES. 

A Participle is a word which is derived from a verb, and 

has the properties of a verb, an adjective, or of a noun. 

Examples. — I love singing (used as a noun.) Singing birds 
fill the air with music (used as an adjective.) We are singing 
(part of a verb.) 

Note. — Participles with the adjective use have been discussed under 
Participial Adjectives. Those with the noun use, under Partici- 
pial Nouns. 

There are three kinds of Participles : 

1. The Present Participle denotes the continuance of 
action or condition. It always ends in " ing." 

Examples.— Seeing, running, doing, telling, making, being, 
saying, &q. 

2. The Perfect Participle denotes the completion of 
action or condition. 



37 



Examples. — I have done. We are seen. He has written. He 
has come. He is gone. It is found. 

3. The Compound Participle is formed by adding 

having or having been to the Perfect Participle. 

Examples. — Having done; having been seen; having written; 
having come ; having gone ; having been found. 

42. AUXILIARIES AND PRINCIPAL VERBS. 

1. Auxiliaries are helping verbs. They help to form 

other verbs. 

The auxiliaries are do, did, has, have, had, shall, will, would, 
may, might, can, could, must, am, is, were, was, be, been, &c. 

2. The Principal Verb is the main part of the verb, that 

expresses the action. 

Examples. — I have finished. Finished is the Principal Verb, 
and have is the Auxiliary. I am listening. Listening is the 
Principal Verb, and am is the Auxiliary. 

Exercise. 

Tell which are principal verbs and which are auxiliaries in 

was seen ; have been told ; might have gone ; were stolen ; do know ; 
did foretell ; could tell ; may run ; must attend ; is worshiped ; 
could be seen ; may be known. 



LESSON XI. 
43. REGULAR AND IRREGULAR VERBS. 

1. Regular Verbs are those which form their past tense 
and perfect participle by adding d or ed to the simple form 
of the verb. 

Examples. — Becite, recited, recited ; follow, followed, folloioed. 

2. Irregular Verbs do not iorm their past tense and 
perfect participle by adding d or ed. 

Examples. — See, saio, seen ; do, did, done ; go, went, gone. 



38 



44. PRINCIPAL PARTS OF VERBS. 

The Principal Parts of Verbs are the Present Tense, 
Past Tense, and Perfect Participle forms. 



I saw you yesterday, I have 
love, loved, loved; know, knew, 



Examples.— I see you now, 
seen you. Come, came, come; 
known, &c. 

Direction. — * n reciting the list of the parts of verbs given below, 
see that the pupil can put each one in a short sentence ; as, Present, I 
hear now ; Past, I heard yesterday ; Perf. Par., I have heard. 



Exercise. 

Tell whether the verbs are regular or irregular, transitive 
or intransitive. 

1. We left the city. 

2. Many words darken counsel. 

3. You must do your duty. 

4. He came yesterday. 

5. We cherish our friends. 

6. Misery loves company. 

7. Run home now. 

8. He died from the effects of the poison. 

9. Fall upon your knees. 
10. I will walk with you. 



45. PRINCIPAL PARTS OF SOME IRREGULAR VERBS. 

Notice that some of these verbs have Regular as well as 
Irregular forms. 



Present. 

Am. 

Arise. 

Awake. 

Bear {to carry.) 

Bear {to bring forth.) 

Beat. 

Become. 

Begin. 

Behold. 

Beseech. 

Bend. 

Bereave. 

Bite. 

Blend. 

Blow. 

Break. 

Bless. 



Past. 

Was. 
Arose. 
Awoke. 
Bore. 
Bore. 
Beat. 
Became. 
Began. 
Beheld. 
Besought. 
Bent (bended.) 
Bereft (bereaved.) 
Bit. 

Blent (blended.) 
Blew. 
Broke. 
Blest (blessed.) 



Perfect Participl< 

Been. 

Arisen. 

Awoke (awaked.) 

Borne. 

Born. 

Beat (beaten.) 

Become. 

Begun. 

Beheld. 

Besought. 

Bent (bended.) 

Bereft (bereaved.) 

Bitten. 

Blent (blended.) 

Blown. 

Broken. 

Blest (blessed.) 



39 



Present. 



Past. 



Perfect Participle. 



Burn. 


Burnt (burned.) 


Burnt (burned.) 


Burst. 


Burst. 


Burst. 


Buy. 


Bought. 


Bought. 


Catch. 


Caught. 


Caught. 


Choose. 


Chose. 


Chosen. 


Cling. 


Clung. 


Clung. 


Creep. 


Crept. 


Crept. 


Cost. 


Cost. 


Cost. 


Cut. 


Cut. 


Cut. 


Come. 


Came. 


Come. 


Dare. 


Durst (dared.) 


Durst (dared.) 


Deal. 


Dealt. 


Dealt. 


Dig. 


Dug (digged.) 


Dug (digged.) 


Draw. 


Drew. 


Drawn. 


Dream. 


Dreamt (dreamed.) 


Dreamt (dreamed.) 


Drive. 


Drove. 


Driven. 


Do. 


Did. 


Done. 


Dwell. 


Dwelt (dwelled.) 


Dwelt (dwelled.) . 


Eat. 


Ate. 


Eaten. 


Feel. 


Felt. 


Felt. 


Fight. 


Fought. 


Fought. 


Flee. 


Fled. 


Fled. 


Fly. 


Flew. 


Flown. 


Flow. 


Flowed. 


Flowed. 


Find. 


Found. 


Found. 


Forbear. 


Forbore. 


Forborne. 


Forget. 


Forgot. 


Forgotten. 


Forgive. 


Forgave. 


Forgiven. 


Freeze. 


Froze. 


Frozen. 


Give. 


Gave. 


Given. 


Go. 


Went. 


Gone. 


Get. 


Got. 


Gotten. 


Grind. 


Ground. 


Ground. 


Grow. 


Grew. 


Grown. 


Hang. 


Hung (hanged.) 


Hung (hanged.) 


Have. 


Had. 


Had. 


Hear. 


Heard. 


Heard. 


Hide. 


Hid. 


Hidden. 


Hit. 


Hit. 


Hit. 


Hold. 


Held. 


Held. 


Hurt. 


Hurt. 


Hurt. 


Keep. 


Kept. 


Kept. 


Kneel. 


Knelt. 


Knelt. 


Know. 


Knew. 


Known. 


Lay (to place.) 


Laid. 


Laid. 


Lie (to recline.) 


Lay. 


Lain. 


Lead. 


Led. 


Led. 


Light. 


Lit (lighted.) 


Lit (lighted.) 



40 



Present. 



Past. 



Perfect Participle. 



Lose. 


Lost. 


Lost. 


Make. 


Made. 


Made. 


Meet. 


Met. 


Met. 


Mean. 


Meant. 


Meant. 


Pay. 


Paid. 


Paid. 


Put. 


Put. 


Put. 


Quit. 


Quit (quitted.) 


Quit (quitted.) 


Rend. 


Rent. 


Rent. 


Ride. 


Rode. 


Ridden. 


Ring. 


Rang (rung.) 


Rung. 


Rise. 


Rose. 


Risen. 


Run. 


Ran. 


Run. 


Say. 


Said. 


Said. 


Seek. 


Sought. 


Sought. 


See. 


Saw. 


Seen. 


Sell. 


Sold. 


Sold. 


Shake. 


Shook. 


Shaken. 


Shear. 


Sheared. 


Shorn (sheared.) 


Shed. 


Shed. 


Shed. 


Shine. 


Shone. 


Shone. 


Shoot. 


Shot. 


Shot. 


Sing. 


Sang (sung.) 


Sung. 


Slay. 


Slew. 


Slain. 


Sleep. 


Slept. 


Slept. 


Sink. 


Sank. 


Sunk. 


Smite. 


Smote. 


Smitten. 


Sow. 


Sowed. 


Sown (sowed.) 


Speak. 


Spoke. 


Spoken. 


Spend. 


Spent. 


Spent. 


Spring. 


Sprang (sprung.) 


Sprung. 


Stand. 


Stood. 


Stood. 


Steal. 


Stole. 


Stolen. 


Strike. 


Struck. 


Struck (stricken.) 


Strive. 


Strove. 


Striven. 


Swear. 


Swore. 


Sworn. 


Swell. 


Swelled. 


Swollen (swelled.) 


Take. 


Took. 


Taken. 


Teach. 


Taught. 


Taught. 


Tell. 


Told. 


Told. 


Think. 


Thought. 


Thought. 


Throw. 


Threw. 


Thrown. 


Thrust. 


Thrust. 


Thrust. 


Tread. 


Trod. 


Trodden (trod.) 


Wear. 


Wore. 


Worn. 


Weave. 


Wove (weaved.) 


Woven (weaved.) 


Weep. 


Wept. 


Wept. 


Wring. 


Wrung. 


Wrung. 


Write. 


Wrote. 


Written 



41 
LESSON XII. 
PROPERTIES OF VERBS. 
46. ACTIVE AND PASSIVE VOICE. 

1. The Active Voice of a transitive verb denotes that 

the subject is acting. 

Examples. — I saw him. He dislikes nonsense. He tore the 
paper. Mary struck me. 

2. The Passive Voice denotes that the subject is being 

acted upon by an object. 

Examples. — He was seen by me. Nonsense is disliked by him . 
The paper was torn by him. I was struck by Mary. 

The Passive Voice is formed by adding some form of the 
verb " to be " to the perfect participle of the principal 
verb ; as, was seen, am loved, has been taken. A verb in the active 
voice may be changed to the passive voice by making the 
direct object in the active the subject in the passive; as, 
Mary loves music. Music is loved by Mary. 

Exercise. 
Change from active to passive or from passive to active voice. 

1. The man has stolen a large sum of money. 

2. The legislature of our country makes the laws. 

3. The house was entered by thieves. 

4. The sweetest song was sung by the blind boy. 

5. 1 heard the roaring of the waves. 

6. The poor beggar was helped by my mother. 

7. Idleness brings on poverty. 

8. Her burden was lightened by your sympathy. 

9. We miss you very much. 

10. He told us a story of love and war. 



LESSON XIII. 
47. MODE. 

Mode means the manner in which action or being is 
expressed. 



42 
There are jive modes : 

1. Indicative. 

2. Subjunctive. 

3. Potential. 

4. Imperative. 

5. Infinitive. 

1. The Indicative Mode asserts the act that is expressed 
by the principal verb. 

Examples. — I will go. The boys play. I see danger in this. 

2. The Subjunctive Mode is used in a clause to express a 
doubt or a condition. 

The clause expressing the doubt is generally introduced by 

if, though, unless, lest, whether, &c. 

Examples. — Spare him, lest he stain his hands with thy 
blood. If this be true, all hope is lost. 

3. The Potential Mode expresses permission, power, 
necessity, duty or possibility, by the use of may, CQjfl, 
must, might, could, would and should. 

These words are the signs of the Potential Mode. 

Examples. — You may go now (permission). You can do 
that easily (power). You must obey (necessity). You should 
obey your parents (duty). He might not return (possibility). 

4. The Imperative Mode expresses a command or an 
entreaty. 

In the use of the Imperative Mode, the subject is generally 
omitted. Thou or you should be supplied by the mind. 

Examples. — Soldiers, do your duty. Ring out, wild bells. 
Save my child ! 

5. The Infinitive Mode merely names the action without 
affirming it of anything. 

To is the sign of the Infinitive, usually expressed, but some- 
times omitted. 

After bid, dare, feel, help, let, make, need, see, the sign of the 
Infinitive is usually omitted. 



43 

Examples.— To know ; to tell; bid him (to) come; let me (to) 
go; to be; help me (to) do this; I saw him (to) drown; to 
hinder ; to follow ; &c. 

Exercise. 

Tell the mode of the verbs : 

1. I can discern your meaning. 

2. He asserts his authority. 

3. If he be false, then none are true. 

4. Give me a moment to think. 

5. Your will must bend. 

6. I will not let thee #0 unless thou bless me. 

7. The winds are howling. 

8. Have pity, Lord ! 

9. Be true to thyself. 

10. You might have been mistaken. 



LESSON XIV. 
48. TENSE. 

Tense means time. There are six tenses. 

1. Present. 

2. Present Perfect. 

3. Past. 

4. Past Perfect. 

5. Future. 

6. Future Perfect. 

1. Present Tense denotes present time, or time right 

now. 

Examples. — I live here. I am going to school. I teach 
algebra. 

2. Present Perfect Tense denotes an action completed 
in present time. Save and Tfias are the signs of this 
tense. 

Examples. — I have noticed him. He has finished his speech. 

3. Past Tense denotes past time. 

Examples. — I saw you yesterday. He gave me notice of it. 
He knew of the accident. 



44 



4. Past Perfect Tense denotes an act completed pre- 
viously to some other action finished in past time. Had 
is the sign of the Past Perfect Tense. 

Example. — I had finished my work before he came. 

5. Future Tense denotes time to come. Shall and 

will are the signs of the Future Tense. 

Examples. — We will start to-morrow. He shall accompany 
you when you go. 

6. Future Perfect Tense denotes an action which will 

be completed at or before some future time mentioned. 

Shall have and Will have are the signs of the Future 

Perfect Tense. 

Example. — Before you begin your work, I shall have finished 
mine. 

Signs of the tenses. 

Pres. Perf. Past Perf. Future. Future Perfect. 

Has or have. Had. Shall or will. Shall have or will have. 

Exercise. 
Give the tense of the verbs : 

1. He shows a great desire for learning. 

2. He has been working hard all day. 

3. We will start in a short while. 

4. He formerly gave me a great deal of trouble. 

5. John will have been studying an hour before it is time for 
him to recite. 

6. He had left before I arrived. 

Using the signs of the tenses given above, tell the tense of 
each of the following verbs : 

Has listened ; shall go ; may see ; shall have brought ; had taken ; 
was seen ; will do ; might have been ; has finished ; shall talk. 



LESSON XV. 
49. PERSON AND NUMBER. 

By the Person and Number of a verb is meant the different 
forms the verb has, to make it agree with its subject. 



45 



In the use of the verb " to be" with the first person pronoun 
we use am {lam), with the second person art or are (thou art 
or you are), and with the third person is (he is). We, there- 
fore, say am is first person, art is second person, are is third per- 
son, to agree with their subjects. With thou, st or est is 
joined to the verb ; as, Thou hast. Thou lovest. Tho hatedst 
sin before the world was formed. In the ancient, or solemn 
style, th or eth is joined to the third person, singular form 
of the verb ; as, He hath. He knoweth. He doth. 

Infinitives have no person and number, because, as they do 
not affirm action of anything, they never have subjects. 

We usually add S to verbs to indicate singular num- 
ber, and omit it for plural number. 

We say ''The boy plays." Here plays is singular form, 
because its subject is singular number. 

We say "Boys play" Here play is plural form, because its 
subject is plural number. 

Exercise. 

Tell the person and number of the verbs from their subjects: 

1. Apples, pears and nuts spoil the voice. 

2. Youth will have its pleasures. 

3. You are too timid to succeed. 

4. A wise man sometimes changes his mind. 

5. Thou art the noblest of men. 

6. I know your treachery. 

7. We prefer death to slavery. 

8. He hath brought many captives back to Rome. 

9. You are mistaken. 

10. Countrymen, lend me your ears. 

Exercise. 

Make the necessary corrections in the forms of the verbs, 
and tell in -what they do not agree -with their subjects : 

1. He have gone. 2. We was ready. 3. You is mistaken. 
4. She are my sister. 5. They does not know you. 6. He 
am here. 7. I are sick. 8. They walks too slowly. 9. We 
has everything ready. 10. Thou are a brave man. 11. She 
do not know you. 12. You shows great talent. 13. The 
boys runs fast. 14. He am a good boy. 15. I has been in 
error. 16. I walks rapidly. 17. Thou do not falter. 18. He 
don't (equal to do not) act honestly. 19. They isn't (equal 
to is not) right. 20. She don't believe you. 21. Isn't they 
too fond of trifles? 22. I does as I please. 23. Thou speaks 
in strange language. 24. Thou did not tell me truly. 25. 



46 



Thou has given thy life for me. 26. We knows your plans. 
27. Thou do not feel my woes as I feels thine. 

50. COMMON ERRORS. 

i. Do not use the perfect participle of verbs for the 

past tense or the past tense for the perfect participle. 

Examples. — "Before you come all went well" should be 
" Before you came," &c. " He done all I told him " should be 
"He did all" &c. 

2. Do not use regular forms with irregular verbs. 

Examples. — "I knowed all about it" should be "I knew all 
about it." "You throwed the stone" should be "You threw 
the stone." " The wind blowed a gale " should be " The wind 
blew a gale." 

j. Things that are true at all times should be expressed 

in the present tense. 

Examples.— "I have always known that honesty was the 
best policy" should be "that honesty is the best policy." 
"People have believed for many years that the earth was 
round " should be " that the earth is round." " Our Revolu- 
tionary fathers declared that all men were born free and 
equal " should be "all men are born free and equal." 

/j.. When the subject is modified by "each" "every" 

" either" or " neither" the verb should be singular. 

Examples. — " Every sweet strain of the birds remind me 
of home "should be " reminds me of home." "Eachboy in this 
country have a chance to rise" should be u has a chance to 
rise." 

5. After verbs expressing desire, hope, fear, intention 

or expectation, the infinitive should be expressed in the 

present tense. 

Examples. — "I intended to have written to you" should be 
"I intended to write to you." " We expected to have arrived 
several days ago " should be " We expected to arrive" &c. 

6. The Subjunctive Mode should be used in expressing 
a wish, a possible future event or a conditiofi implying 

just the contrary. 



47 



Examples. — "I wish I was as good as you" should be "I 
wish I were &c. (expressing a wish). "If I was you, I would 
improve" should be "If I were you, &c. (implying the con- 
trary). "If he fails in this, his ruin is certain " should be 
" If he fail" &c. (possible future event). 

7. Do not use the ancient and the modern forms of 

verbs in the same connection. 

Examples. — "He Tcnoweth we are dust and remembers not 
our sins " should be "He knows we are but dust and remem- 
bers not our sins." "Thou art the only friend who has 
deserted me" should be " Thou art the only friend who hath 
deserted me," or "You are the only friend who has deserted 
me." 

8. A verb with two or more singular subjects connected 
by " and" must be plural. 

But if one of the subjects is affirmative and the other 

negative, the verb agrees with the affirmative subject. 

Examples. — "Time and tide waits for no man" should be 
"Time and tide wait" &c. "Industry and honesty brings 
contentment" should be "Industry and honesty bring''' &c. 
"Industry, and not extravagance, bring pleasure" should be 
"Industry, and not extravagance, brings" &c. 

g. A verb with two singular subjects connected by " or" 

or " nor " should be singular. 

Examples. — "Neither Mary nor John were to blame" 
should be "wasXo blame." "Either John or your brother 
are guilty" should be "is guilty." "Neither poverty nor 
wealth have charms for me " should be " has charms for me." 

10. When the subject is plural in form, but singular in 
meaning, the verb should be singular. 

Examples. — "Five dollars is too much to pay," is correct. 
"Horses is a noun," is correct. "Politics ruins many a 
man," is correct. 

11. When a verb has two subjects of different persons 
connected by " or " or " nor" it agrees with the one nearest 
to it. 

Examples. — "Neither you nor I are to blame" should be 
"Neither you nor I am to blame." "Either you or he ham 
done this " should be " Either you or he has done this." 



48 



12. Do not use "can" for "may" or "shall" for 

"will." 

Can denotes ability ; may denotes permission, desire or pos- 
sibility ; as, "May I go with you?" not " Can I go with 
you?" if "Havel permission to go with you?" is meant. 
"Can I do the work without any assistance?" means 
" Have I the ability to do the work without assistance? " 

Will in the first person is the sign of determination. Shall in 
the first person is the sign of futurity. Will in the second 
and third persons denotes futurity. Shall in the second and 
third persons denotes duty or obligation. 

Examples. — I will certainly keep my word in the matter 
(determination). I shall see you on your return (futurity). 
You will decide to remain with us, I hope (futurity). He 
shall obey me (duty). He will be gone all the summer 
(futurity). 

Exercise. 

Correct and give reasons : 

1. Mary and her sister is going. 2. No person in our 
family are fond of rough sports. 3. There stand one of our 
greatest men. 4. He have mastered the language. 5. I was 
taught to believe that the love of money was the root of all 
evil. 6. The wind blowed furiously. 7. Either loss or gain 
are alike immaterial to me. 8. Not one of these persons are 
competent to give an opinion. 9. You and I am all right. 

10. He that liveth itill all are weary of him lives too long. 

11. He dove to the bottom of the stream. 12. Yes, I done 
that. 13. He has came on important business. 14. I knowed 
you before you come. 15. His perseverance have overcame 
all difficulties. 16. The river has overflown its banks. 17. 
He seen you do it. 18. He had went before I come in. 19. 
Neither you nor I sees things just right. 20. He that finds 
wisdom hath found a great treasure. 21. You should have 
took more pains. 22. I had hoped to have been with you 
before this. 23. The horse d rawed the wagon all right. 24. 
I heared you call me. 25. The pirates have sank the vessel. 
26. I have done finished all required of me. 27. The cold has 
friz everything. 28. He throwed me a bright glance. 29. 
1 expected to have joined his party. 30. I have wrote all I 
know. 31. He done it as well as I could. 32. He knowed it was 
wrong when he done it. 33. Neither one of the boys were to 
blame. 34. How I wish I was rich! 35. He that keepeth 
God for a friend loses nothing. 36. Neither he nor I has 
spoken. 37. Every person are expected to do his duty. 38. 
Some one has driv the horse too fast. 39. School has began, 
40. Each thought represent a portion of one's character, 



49 



41. They, like this man, is afraid to venture. 42. Wecatched 
his meaning very quickly. 43. Every man have his weak- 
ness. 44. This coat costed me $15. 45. The man was 
drownded in the river. 46. The prettiest one of these flowers 
have faded. 47. The enemy attackted us at daylight. 48. 
He dumb to the top of the hill. 49. He, and not you, are 
to blame. 50. I have done finished my work. 51. Can I 
have the pleasure of going with you ? 52. She will not pur- 
sue such a line of conduct if I can prevent it. 

51. MODEL FOR PARSING VERBS. 

I am certain that success will crown his efforts. 
Am. Will Crown. 

Irregular Neuter Verb. Regular Transitive Verb. 

Principal Parts, Principal Parts, 

Am, was, been. Crown, crowned, crowned. 

Has no Voice. Active Voice. 

{Neuter verbs have no voice.) Indicative Mode. 

Indicative Mode. Future Tense. 

Present Tense. Third Person, 

First Person, Singular Number, 

Singular Number, Agrees with subject success. 
Agrees with subject I. 

52. ORDER OF PARSING VERBS. 

Class. 

Principal Parts. 

Voice. 

Mode. 

Tense. 

Person and Number and Why. 



LESSON XVI. 

53. ADVERBS. 

An Adverb is a word expressing time, place, cause, 
manner or degree. 

Examples. — We will go presently (time). He lives there 
(place). Why do you weep? (cause). He walks sfow^ (man- 
ner). I am very tired (degree). 



50 

Adverbs Of Time answer the question When ? 

Adverbs of Place answer the questions Where? 
Whence ? 

Adverbs Of Cause answer the question Why? 

Adverbs Of Manner answer the question How? 

Adverbs Of Degree answer the questions How 
much? How little? 

54. COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 

Many adverbs, like adjectives, can be compared. They 
have the same degrees of comparison, the Positive, the 
Comparative, the Superlative. 

The degrees of Comparison are formed in the same man- 
ner as with adjectives, adding er or more to the Positive to 
form the Comparative, snidest or most to the Positive to form 
the Superlative. 

In descending comparison, less is added to form the 
comparative, and least to form the superlative. 

SOME ADVERBS COMPARED. 

Positive. 

Well. 

111. 

Badly 

Rapidly. 

Wisely. 

Fast. 

Soon. 

Much. 

Distinctly. Less or more distinctly. Least or most distinctly. 

55. COMMON ERRORS. 

/. Never use two negative words to express one nega- 
tive idea. 

1. A negative idea is one which implies a denial. The 
principal words used to express denial are no, not, never, nor, 
none, nothing, nobody &c. 



Comparative. 


Superlative. 


Better. 

Worse. 

Worse. 

More rapidly. 

Less or more wisely. 

Faster. 

Sooner. 

More. 


Best. 

Worst. 

Worst. 

Most rapidly. 

Least or most rapidly, 

Fastest. 

Soonest. 

Most. 



51 

T Example.— " I don't never expect to see him again" 
should be " I expect never to see him again." 

2. When two negative words are used, it is usually better 
to drop the first one. 

Examples.— "They don't think she will never recover" 
should be "They think she will never recover." "I don't 
know nothing about it" should be "I know nothing about 
it." 

3. But, hardly and scarcely very often have a negative sense. 

Examples. — "I did not see himbut once" should be "I saw 
him but once." "I have not hardly had a chance to see 
you" should be " I have hardly had " &c. 

2. Be careful not to use adjectives for adverbs. 

Examples.— "I am tolerable well" should be "I am tolerably 
well." "He was near dead" should be "He was nearly 
dead." 

Exercise. 

Correct and give reasons : 

1. He walks too slow for me. 2. Neither time nor space 
nor nothing else shall separate us. 3. You did not speak 
quick enough. 4. Some people never do nothing worth 
talking about. 5. I did not call but twice. 6. I value your 
services higher than you think. 7. That is easier said than 
done. 8. You have done your work good. 9. She was near 
exhausted. 10. This is an exceeding good opportunity. 11. 
He thinks more faster than I do. 12. She cannot deny nor 
refute the charge. 13. You do not talk distinct. 14. People 
who are so terrible poor must be miserable. 15. She is 
dreadful conceited. 16. We had an unusual good time. 17. 
He writes so rapid I can scarce keep up with him. 18. He 
has acted very bad in this matter. 19. We have had an 
uncommon hard winter. 20. I have not but a few minutes 
to stay. 21. Step soft and talk quiet. 22. I shall not never 
confide in you again. 23. Don't say nothing to nobody 
about this. 24. Talk up brisk. 25. I didn't do nothing to 
be punished for. 26. He has a remarkable fine ear for music. 
27. He isn't doing much I don't think. 28. He has not never 
the power to express himself well. 29. You are in a fearful 
bad condition. 30. Don't never distress yourself about me. 
31. She sings ever so sweet. 32. I have not had no expe- 
rience in that line. 33. I don't think nobody can compare 
with you. 34. Don't never tell nobody about this. 35. Eat 
and drink free of all that is set before you. 36. He does not 
hardly ever take any notice of me. 



52 



56. MODEL FOR PARSING ADVERBS. 

He regrets much that he has not done well. 

Much. 'Well. 

Adverb of Degree. Adverb of Manner. 

Comparison. Comparison. 

P. Much. P. Well. 

C. More. C. Better. 

S. Most. S. Best. 

Positive Degree. Positive Degree. 

Modifies regrets. Modifies has done. 

57. ORDER OF PARSING ADVERBS. 

Class. 

Comparison. 

Degree of Comparison. 

Word Modified. 



58 



LESSON XVII. 
PREPOSITIONS. 



A Preposition shows the relation between its object and 
some other word to which it joins the object. 

LIST OF THE PRINCIPAL PREPOSITIONS. 

At. — I live at home. By. — He lives by his labor. 

About. — We walked about the From. — Accept this from me. 

streets. For.— This is for you. 

Above. — The sky is above us. In.— He is in danger. 

Across. — He lives across the Into. — Come into the room, 

street. Of.— I spoke of you. 

Around. — He ran around the On. — We sat on a rock, 

corner. Through. — We walked through 

Before.— He left before day- the fields, 

break. To. — She came to me. 

Beside.— He sat beside me. Under. — The ball is under the 

But (meaning except). — All but house, 

him are here. Unto. — Give thanks unto God. 

Beneath. — The river ran beneath Upon. — His blood be upon you. 

us. "With. — He came with us 

Between. — He is between two "Without. — He is without friends, 
dangers. 

59. BE CAREFUL TO USE THE PROPER PREPOSITIONS. 

Adhere to. Difference with a person. 

Accuse of (a, crime), by (a per- Difference between things, 

son). Disappointed of what we 

Acquit of. do not get. 



5.3 

Agreeable to. Disappointed in what falls 

Angry with (a person), at (a below our expectations, 

thing). Eager in. 

Attend to (listen), upon (to Entertain by a person, with 
serve). a thing. 

Averse to. Free from 

Bestow upon. Frightened at. 

Correspond with (by letter). Need of. 

Correspond to (similar). Notice of. 

Die of (a disease), by (vio- Profit by. 

lence). Prejudice against. 

Different from. 

Exercise. 

Point out the prepositions and tell between -what words 
they show relation. 

1. She lives in London. 

2. We plodded along the road. 

3. No better man lives in the world. 

4. Come and sit beside me. 

5. We sailed across the bay. 

6. Do your duty without fear. 

7. He has sailed around the globe. 

8. The reef extended far under the water. 

9. Do not turn with anger upon your friend. 
10. I trust nobody but you. 

60. COMMON ERRORS. 

i. Do not use unnecessary prepositions. 

Examples.— " I study for to learn " should be "I study to 
learn." " Where are you living at? " should be " Where are 
you living?" "Take your books from off of the table" 
should be "Take your books off the table." "Where have 
you been tot " should be " Where have you been? " 

2. Do not end a sentence with a preposition. 

Note. — Some writers think this caution unnecessary ; but the usual 
effect is to weaken the sentence, and it is best to avoid it. 

Example. — "Whom are you looking for?" should be 
" For whom are you looking? " 

Exercise. 

Correct and give reasons : 

1. I am not averse from that proposition. 2. He is free of 
many vices. 3. I was disappointed in getting the money. 
4. My opinions are very different to yours. 5. He comes 
only for to bring misery. 6. I am at last rid from his pres- 
ence. 7. The boy whom I am speaking of will be sure to suit. 



5£ 

8. I have great need for patience. 9. The hunters were eager 
about the pursuit of the deer. 10. I adhere strictly with my 
first views. 11. Whom are you laughing at? 12. I was 
much frightened by what I saw. 13. If agreeable with you, 1 
shall proceed. 14. He boasts about his success. 15. I am 
very angry about what you said. 16. The house I lived in 
was burned. 17. Where did you see him at ? 18. Whom did 
you buy that book for? 19. One may greatly profit with 
his past errors. 20. I have the greatest prejudices for such 
customs. 21. Where are you living at now? 22. I am going 
to home. 23. I love for to see him get provoked. 24. His 
words were different to what I expected. 25. I came for to 
take you home. 26. Take your feet off of my dress. 27. He 
was saved from out of great danger. 28. Where are you 
going to ? 

61. MODEL FOR PARSING PREPOSITIONS. 

He lives with his friend. 

With. 

Preposition 
Show the relation 
Between lives and friend. 



LESSON XVIII. 
62. CONJUNCTIONS. 

Conjunctions join words, sentences and parts "of sentences. 

Mary went. I went. We can combine these sentences into 
one and say "Mary and I went." 

I shall leave. I do this because I desire to do so. We can combine 
these two statements into " I shall leave because I desire to 
do so." 

The principal conjunctions are and, but, or, nor, yet, although, 
because, if, for, lest, whether, unless, that, though, since, as. 

63. CLASSES OF CONJUNCTIONS. 

There are two classes of conjunctions: 

1. Coordinate Conjunctions join elements of equal rank, 
as, two independent sentences or two words or two 
phrases &c. 



55 

The principal coordinate conjunctions are and, but, or, nor. 

Examples. — Mary and John went (joins words). In life 
or in death (joins phrases). He came, but I left (joins 
sentences). 

2. Subordinate Conjunctions join elements that are not 
of equal rank; as, independent and dependent clauses. 
Example. — I will go, if you will accompany me. 

Exercise. 

Point out the conjunctions, and tell what they connect: 

1. He and I are good friends. 

2. Neither you nor I can accomplish this. 

3. The wicked seem to nourish, but they are soon destroyed. 

4. I will not leave, lest I miss seeing him. 

5. People cannot succeed, unless they are industrious. 

6. He has failed in life , yet he bears up bravely. 

7. I see that you are determined to oppose me. 

8. He went, for duty called. 

9. He was either a very good man or a great hypocrite. 

64. COMMON ERRORS. 

i. "Neither" should always be followed by "nor" ; 
"either" by "or"; "else" "other" "otherwise" "rather" 
by "than" or, if something additional is meant, ik besides" 
or "but" may be used. 

Examples. — He is no other than my best friend. Shall I be 
allowed to love none else but you? He is neither good nor 
brave. It is either life or death with him. 

2. "Not only — but also" "neither — nor" and "either — 

or" should be followed by the same parts of speech. 

Examples. — "He not only gave me food, but also sympa- 
thy''' should be "He gave me not only food, but also sympa- 
thy." "He not only plays in correct time, but with good taste" 
should be "He plays not only in correct time, but with good 
taste." "He neither gives his time nor his money" should be 
"He gives neither his time nor his money." 

j. Do not use "as" "as how" or "but that" for "that." 

Examples. — "I do not know as I shall go" should be "I 
do not know that I shall go." "He does not deny but that he 
is guilty" should be "He does not deny that he js guilty," 



56 

Exercise. 

Correct and give reasons : 

1. We do not doubt but that your intentions are good. 

2. Neither riches or poverty shall move me. 

3. Icannot give you either encouragement nor good wishes. 

4. She not only sings correctly, but also sweetly. 

5. Our visitor was no other but our old friend. 

6. I cannot say now as I shall be ready. 

7. I cannot help knowing but that you are to blame. 

8. He sent me word as how he would attend to the matter. 

65. MODEL FOR PARSING CONJUNCTIONS. 

The seasons come and go. 

And 

Coordinate Conjunction. 
Connects come and go. 



LESSON XIX. 
66. INTERJECTIONS. 

Interjections are words used independently, to express 
sudden or strong emotion. 

The principal interjections are ah! oh! 0! alas! hurrah! 
huzzah! bravo! hist! hallo! lo! ahoy! ha! 

67. MODEL FOR PARSING INTERJECTIONS. 

Alas! all hope is gone. 

Alas. 

Interjection. 

Used independently. 



LESSON XX. 

68. WORDS USED AS DIFFERENT PARTS OF SPEECH. 

The classification of a word as a Part of Speech is deter- 
mined by its use. Many words become different parts of 
speech by being differently used. 



57 

Nouns and Verbs. — He gave me a cut with the knife. — Noun. 

He has cut his finger. — Verb. 
Give short sentences, using as both nouns and verbs sound, 
skates, drop, face, pity, ride, fall, fast. 
Prepositions and Adverbs. — He passed by. — Adverb. 

He came by the road. — Preposition. 
Use as prepositions and adverbs around, before, aboard, below, 
above, along, behind, beyond, within. 
Nouns and Adjectives.— The good are happy. — Noun. 
He is a good man. — Adjective. 
Use as nouns and adjectives wicked, few, these, former, gentle, 
many, some, beautiful, right, meadow, house, forest, rain, wheat. 

Exercise. 

Tell the parts of speech of the italicized -words : 

1. Do not cross the child. 

2. He made a cross of wood. 

3. Use your talents well. 

4. The use of stimulants is injurious. 

5. All save him perished. 

6. Save the child. 

7. That man is guilty. 

8. The man that you saw is my uncle. 

9. Yonder mountain is very high. 

10. Who goes yonder? 

11. You are better than I. 

12. I will try to better your condition. 



LESSON XXI. 
SIMPLE, COMPLEX AND COMPOUND SENTENCES. 

69. THE SIMPLE SENTENCE. 

A Simple Sentence consists of a single proposition, 
which contains but one subject and one predicate. 

It may have an indefinite number of words and phrases 
but no clauses. 

Examples. — Virtue is the road to happiness. Why do all bright 
things fade so quickly? How I long for home! 

Any of the elements of a simple sentence may be compound, 
that is, having several coordinate terms joined by conjunc- 
tions; as, The boys and girls are playing. Children dance, 
laugh, sing and play. 



58 

70. WORDS AND PHRASES USED AS MODIFIERS. 

A phrase consists of a collection of words, containing no 

subject or predicate and making no sense when alone. 

Examples. — I live in that house. We go to school. Men of 
tlwught are needed. 

Single Words and Phrases may be— 

1. Adjective Modifiers, modifying a noun or pronoun. 

Examples. —Jocund day has appeared. A storm of ap- 
plause followed. This is the time to do your duty. 

2. Adverbial Modifiers, denoting time, place, cause, 

manner or degree. 

Examples. — Make haste slowly. I often go there. I come to 
bid you welcome. Bread should be made of unbolted flour. 

3. Objective Modifiers, answering the questions whom? 
or what? 

Examples.— Our forests yield timber. I like to study. 

4. AppOSitive Modifiers, denoting the same person or 

thing as some other word. 

Examples.— Our best lawyer, Mr. Smith, has left us. Sor- 
row, our sternest teacher, is often our best friend. The law, to 
love, comes from God. 

Exercise. 

Tell what kinds of elements the italicized words and phrases 
are, and give the subjects and predicates in the following 
simple sentences : 

1. One drunkard is the father of another. 

2. The foldings of the brain resemble the meat of an English 
walnut. 

3. Night stretches her leaden scepter o'er a slumbering world. 

4. Opium is smoked throughout the East. 

5. His command, to clear the way, was obeyed. 

6. We are indebted to the Greeks and Romans for much of 
our knowledge of astronomy. 

7. The use of tobacco retards the development of mind and 
body. 

8. He tried to catch a faint echo. 

9. The sun is the central orb of our solar system. 
10. He died to save you. 



59 

71. STATEMENTS COMBINED INTO SIMPLE SENTENCES. 

Combine the statements in each of the following groups 
into one simple sentence, having only one subject and one 
predicate, and make the other statements appositive, 
adjective, objective or adverbial phrases : 

Example. — Mahomet was the founder of the Moham- 
medan religion. He was born at Mecca. Mecca is a city of 
Arabia. He was born in the year 571 A. D. 

Combined. — Mahomet, the founder of the Mohammedan 
religion, was born in the year 571 A. D., at Mecca, a city of 
Arabia. 

1. The army of the first crusaders was reduced by famine. 
It was reduced by the sword and by pestilence. They had 
only about 60,000 men. This was their number on their 
arrival at Jerusalem. 

2. Wickliffe was imprisoned as a heretic. He was an 
English reformer. He is often called "The Morning Star of 
the Reformation." He was imprisoned for translating the 
whole of the Bible into English for the common people. 

3. Marie Stuart is commonly called "Queen of the Scots." 
She was the daughter of James V. She became heiress to 
the throne at the age of eight days. 

4. John Oberlin was a celebrated philanthropist. He 
labored unceasingly to relieve the poor. He did this for 
fifty-nine years. He created industry and happiness every- 
where. 

5. Sir Isaac Newton was never married. He, perhaps, never 
had time to think of it. He was constantly immersed in 
the deepest studies. 



LESSON XXII. 
72. THE COMPLEX SENTENCE. 

A Complex Sentence consists of one principal proposi- 
tion, some part of which is modified by one or more clauses. 

Examples.— I will go when I please. I know that you are 
wrong. 

1. The Principal Proposition is the independent part of 
the sentence, which makes sense when standing alone. 



tr> 



Example. — He gave me advice, which I heeded. 



60 

2. A Subordinate Clause is a group of words, containing 
a subject and a predicate, but not making complete sense. 

Example. — Flowers will bloom when spring comes. 

Subordinate Clauses are usually introduced by (1) The 
Relative Pronouns who, whose, whom, that, which, 

or by (2) The Conjunctive Adverbs when, where, 

why, or by (3) The Subordinate Conjunctions if 

because, than, though, until, as, &c. 

Examples.— 1. I saw the boy who was killed. 2. I will come 
when you call me. 3. I will go, if you desire it. 

73. CLAUSES USED AS MODIFIERS. 

Clauses used as modifiers may be— 

1. Adjective Modifiers. 

Examples. — The man who perseveres will succeed. The place 
where he Ues buried is unknown. This is the time when all things 
smile. 

2. Adverbial Modifiers. 

Examples. — He speaks as he has been told. If wishes were 
horses, beggars might ride. I will go where I please. 

3. Objective Modifiers. 

Examples.— I will see that you obey me. I know where you 
are going. 

4. Appositive Modifiers. 

Examples.— All took up the shout, "Long live the King!" 
The law of nature, that water seeks its own level, is well known. 

74. CLAUSES MAY ALSO BE USED AS 

1. Subjects. 

Example. — "How is bread made?" was next asked. 

2. Predicates. 

Example.— The important question of the day was who 

was wise enough to govern the people. 

Subject clauses, Predicate clauses and Object 
clauses are called Substantive clauses, because they take 
the place of nouns. 



61 

Exercise. 

Identify the classes of clauses in the following: 

1. The voice of free grace cries, ''Escape to yon moun- 
tain ! " 

2. He who surpasses or subdues mankind must look down 
on the hate of all below. 

3. When thought is coined in words, we know its worth. 

4. Love is a ladder, on which we climb to God. 

5. Pay out no moment of time, unless its worth is received 
in value. 

6. When honor is lost, all is lost. 

7. I fondly ask, "Doth God demand day labor?" 

8. "The darkness falls from the wing of night, as a feather 
is wafted downward by an eagle in its flight." 

9. He did not comply with my wish, that he should give 
up his former associations. 

10. Speak, that thy servant may learn wisdom. 

11. That you dislike me, is very evident. 

12. My greatest desire i-s that my life may be helpful to 
others. 

75. COMBINING STATEMENTS INTO COMPLEX SENTENCES. 

Combine each of the following groups of statements into 
one complex sentence : 

Example. — The father was surprised and enraptured. 
He forgot where he was. He forgot the character he was 
filling. Tears of ecstasy rained down his cheeks. He had 
neither the power nor the inclination to stop them. 

Combined. — The father was so surprised and enraptured 
that, forgetting where he was and the character he was fill- 
ing, tears of ecstasy rained down his cheeks, without his 
having either the power or the inclination to stop them. 

1. The sun had just risen. The enemy advanced to the 
charge. They advanced with loud shouts. 

2. The Russians advanced in pursuit of the French army. 
They were joined by the Prussians and Austrians. The 
Prussians and Austrians burned for revenge on Napoleon. 

3. The nations of Europe were assembled in general con- 
gress. This was at Vienna. Napoleon was dissatisfied with 
his position at Elba. He made an effort at this time to 
regain the throne of France. 

4. The French made a furious assault upon the Prussians. 
The Prussians retreated. They left fifteen thousand of their 
number. These were left dead or wounded on the battle- 
field. 

5. Much of Hannah More's life was spent in London. Here 
she moved in the most highly cultured circles. She associated 
with the best literary minds of the day. 



62 
LESSON XXIII. 

76. THE COMPOUND SENTENCE. 

A Compound Sentence consists of two or more inde- 
pendent members, joined by coordinate conjunctions. The 
conjunctions are sometimes omitted. Those most fre- 
quently used are an d, but, or, nor. 

Examples.— We listened, but all was still. I know you, 
and, therefore, I trust you. You must leave the place, or your 
life will be the forfeit. He exonerated himself fully, nor did 
anyone dare to accuse him again. 

Each member of a compound sentence may be a complex 
sentence; as, "I stood for a time, trying to pierce the dark- 
ness which enveloped everything in its cloud of blackness; 
and gradually the speck of distant light, which had been 
my guiding star, advanced toward me." 

Exercise. 

Name the members, and give the subject and predicate of 
each: 

1. I dislike him, yet he has a strange attraction for me. 

2. You must clear this blot from your name, or you stand 
indicted as a traitor. 

3. He will not take up the project himself, nor will he 
allow anyone else to do so. 

4 Office confers no honor upon a man who is worthy of 
it, and it will disgrace every man who is not. 

5. When Louis XIV. danced in public, and stalked across 
the scene, rolling his eyes and turning out his toes, it was 
thought the most sublime spectacle on earth; and all the 
gentlemen of France then walked with a strut, stuck out 
their elbows, and tied themselves in at the waist. 

77. STATEMENTS COMBINED INTO COMPOUND SENTENCES. 

Combine each of the following groups of statements into 
one compound sentence : 

Example. — William Penn was a man of great abilities. 
He had great mildness of disposition He was given to 
extensive charity. He lacked the vanity of greatness. He 
was void of desire for ambition. 

Combined. — William Penn, a man of great abilities and 
great mildness of disposition, was given to extensive charity; 
but he lacked the vanity of greatness, and was void of desire 
for ambition. 



63 

1. Raleigh's plan to colonize North America did not suc- 
ceed. He engaged as captain in the wars of Ireland. He 
became a commissioner for the government of Munster. 

2. England attained a high state of prosperity. This was 
under Queen Elizabeth. It rose to a level with the first 
states of Europe. It had formerly been a secondary king- 
dom. 

3. Marie Stuart escaped from the place of her confinement. 
She raised an army. She was defeated. She fled to Eng- 
land to implore the protection of Elizabeth. All her efforts 
proved to be in vain. She was beheaded. It occurred in 
the castle of Fotheringay. It was done on the charge of 
conspiracy against the life of Elizabeth. 

4. Demosthenes' ability as an orator raised him to the 
head of the government. This was at Athens. His elo- 
quence carried all before him. It was more dreaded than 
the fleets and arms of the enemy. 

5. The friends of Socrates tried to persuade him to escape. 
This was when he "was condemned to drink the cup of 
poison. He rejected the proposal. He resolved to submit 
himself to the decree of the law. 

6. Charlotte Corday was a young French girl. She had 
determined to assassinate the cruel Marat. It was because 
he had murdered and had branded as a traitor her lover. 
She obtained admittance to him by writing a letter. In this 
letter she informed him she had a secret of importance to 
disclose to him. While the tyrant was engaged in conver- 
sation with her, she stabbed him to the heart. He fell dead 
at her feet. 

Exercise. 

Identify the kinds of sentences. When complex, give the 
principal and subordinate clauses. When compound, name 
the different members. Give all the subjects and predicates. 

1. Herschel discovered six moons attending the planet 
Uranus, but we know very little concerning them. 2. He 
that hath no ill fortune is cloyed with good. 3. Good name 
in man or woman is the immediate jewel of the soul. 4. 
During the reign of Queen Elizabeth, ladies wore the farthin- 
gale and stiff, high ruff. 5. A wise man sometimes changes 
his mind, but a fool never does. 6. A bushel of March dust 
is worth a king's ransom. 7. He liveth long that liveth 
well. 8. Love asks faith, and [faith asks firmness. 9. The 
truest jests sound worse in guilty ears. 10. When we have 
gold, we are in fear; when we have none, we are in misery. 
11. Health without money is half a sickness. 12. Where 
ignorance is bliss, it is folly to be wise. 13. When danger is 
past, God is often forgotten. 14. Death keeps no calendar. 
15. Wise men learn by others' mistakes ; fools learn by their 
own. 16. Youxh and white paper take any impression. 



64 



78. QUESTIONS. 

The drawbridge dropped with a surly clang, 
And through the dark arch a charger sprang, 
Bearing Sir Launfal, the gallant knight, 
In his gilded mail, that flamed so bright. 

First Line. — What kind of an element is with a surly clang? 
drawbridge? the? surly? Compare surly. What tense is 
dropped ? 

Second Line. — What kind of an element is through the dark 
arch? Give the principal parts of sprang. In what case 
is charger? Compare dark. 

Third Line. — What does bearing Sir Launfal modify ? What 
word is in apposition with Sir Launfal? What kind of an 
element is gallant? Compare it. 

Fourth Line. — What does in his gilded mail modify ? What 
kind of an element is it ? Is that flamed so bright a phrase or 
a clause ? What kind of an element is so ? gilded ? 



LESSON XXIV. 
79. CONVERSION OF ELEMENTS. 

I. Change the italicized words into phrases : 

Example. — Important matters detained me. Matters of 
importance detained me. 

1. Many energetic men do not prosper. 

2. He is a wealthy man. 

3. Many valuable lessons may be learned by observation. 

4. Brave men are needed. 

5. The author's books are his life-blood. 

6. Wise words are the fooVs abomination. 

II. Change the italicized words and phrases into clauses : 

Example. — Without repentance, all men are lost. Unless 
repent, all men are lost. 

1. With patience, you may prosper. 

2. Tlie heart being right, the actions will be noble. 

3. I confess myself to be the sole cause of the trouble. 

4. Many persons believe the stars to be inhabited. 

5. On my return, I will settle the matter. 

6. The way being open, we entered. 



65 

7. People living in glass houses should not throw stones. 

8. Sis ignorance cannot be doubted. 

9. The man with an honest heart always acts uprightly. 

10. The winds having abated, the vessel was ready to sail. 

11. They deemed the crusades to be the way to heaven. 

12. With his brightness of mind, you might accomplish any- 
thing. 

13. He is working hard to win his way to honor and to wealth. 

III. Change the italicized clauses and members into -words or 
phrases : 

Examples. — It is a dangerous thing when we imitate the vices 
of others. It is a dangerous thing to imitate the vices of others. 
The winter has passed, and the soft winds bring the buds to life. 
The winter having passed, the soft winds bring the buds to life. 

1. I shall be glad when I hear of your safe arrival. 2. She 
regrets that she has accomplished so little. 3. White garments reflect 
the rays of the sun, and they are cooler in summer. 4. A man who 
possesses great capacities should show himself great. 5. Passion 
is a sort of fever in the mind, and it leaves us weak from its 
resistless force. 6. If you would have vigorous health, which is a per- 
petual spring of youth, use temperance. 7. That we should over- 
come evil with good, is a divine command. 8. I cannot tell why 
it is that you avoid me. 9. Before you begin the battle of life, gird 
yourself with the gospel armor. 10. He listens only that he 
may learn to contradict others. 11. After life's fitful fever is over, he 
rests well. 12. He is so foolish that he never sees his own errors. 
13. If we contemplate his character from all sides, -we shall see many 
good qualities. 14. The monarch of Peru found that the ruling 
passion of the Spaniards was greed for gold, and he offered for his 
release a room filled with gold. 15. Joan of Arc, who was a 
brave French girl, led the armies of France against the Eng- 
lish. 16. I supposed that he was willing to give up to me. 17. I 
know that he is an honest man. 18. Columbus' sailors became 
alarmed, when they saw the needle of the compass vary from its direct 
course. 19. Cortez was very desirous that he should have in his 
power Montezuma, who was the Mexican emperor. 20. William 
Pitt received a legacy of ten thousand pounds, because he had 
defended the laws of his country and had prevented its ruin. 



LESSON XXV. 

80. PURE ENGLISH AND ITS PROPER USE. 

No writer or speaker can be successful, who has not at 
his command a good vocabulary of accepted words, and 



66 



who cannot place these words in well-constructed sentences. 
The cultivation of association with persons of culture and 
of the habit of observing and understanding all new words 
w r ill great improve one's power of expression. 

The first elements of a good vocabulary are that the 
words shall be pure English and shall be used in 
their correct sense. 

In order that words shall be considered pure English, they 
must have the authority of cultivated speakers and writers 
of the time in which they are used. To attain this 

Rule I. — Avoid using slang words and low provin- 
cialisms, such as " tairity " hairit" " ain't!' & c - 

Examples. — "To succeed, a man must get a move on him" 
should be "To succeed, a man must be energetic." " He hain't 
anything worth speaking of" should be "He has nothing worth 
speaking of." "I ain't sure this is right " should be "I am not 
sure this is right." " Tain't right to deceive" should be "It 
is not right to deceive." " I am stuck on her appearance" 
should be " I like her appearance very much." 

Rule 2. — Avoid using words that are going out of use 

and words from foreign languages. 

Examples. — 1. "His reputation as a talkist has preceded 
him" should be "as a conversationalist." 2. "Quoth he, 
'Time is money '" should be "Said he," &c. 3. "He stands 
uncertain betwixt two courses " should be "between two 
courses." 4. " She was dressed a la mode" should be " was 
dressed fashionably." 5. "His sangfroid under these circum- 
stances was wonderful " should be " His coolness." 6. " He is 
a man of distingue appearance" should be "distinguished ap- 
pearance." 7. "This painting is the chef Waiuvre of one of 
our greatest masters " should be "is the master-piece" &c. 

81. WORDS FREQUENTLY USED INCORRECTLY. 

I. The following words are most frequently used in an 
incorrect sense : 

1. Like for As.— Use like when "to" can be correctly 
supplied after it. Use as when a comparison of actions is 
expressed, as being the joining word. "He did like he was 



67 



told" should be "as he was told." " He writes very much 
like you do" should be "as you do." But "He looks like 
(to) a king" and "My life is like (to) the sere and yellow 
leaf," are correct. 

2. Respectively for Respectfully .—Respectively 

means relating to each one of several things, taken sepa- 
rately. Respectfully means in a respectful manner. "Yours 
respectively" is frequently written for "Yours respectfully." 
"He referred to his three opponents respectively" is correct. 

3. Except and Without for Unless.— 'No man can 
be happy, except he lives an honest life" should be " Unless 
he lives an honest life." "I will not obey without I see 
some reason for it" should be "unless I see some reason 
for it." Except and without must not be used as conjunc- 
tions. 

4. LeavTl for Teach.— Learn means to receive 
instruction. Teach means to impart instruction to others. 
"She learned me all I know," "Who learned you to do 
that?" "I have never been learned any better," should 
be "She taught me all I know," "Who taught you to do 
that?" " I have never been taught any better." 

5. Set for Sit and Vice Versa. — Set means to place, and 
it takes an object. Sit means to assume the position of 
resting, and it does not take an object. "Sit the chair near 
me" should be "Set the chair" &c. "He sets thinking of 
old times" should be "He sits thinking" &c. Supply the 

correct words in the following : down and rest. He 

aside all opposition. I am by the window. The 

words were to music. 

6. Lay for Lie and Vice Versa. — Lie means to recline, 
and takes no object. Principal Parts are lie, lay, lain. 
Lay means to place, and takes an object. Principal Parts 
are lay, laid, laid. " Let me lay down " should be "Let me 
lie down." "Lie your head on my shoulder" should be 
"Lay your head " &c. Supply the correct words in the fol- 
lowing: 1. Go and down. 2. He has there a long 

time. 3. He has the book on the table. 4. I there 

for nearly an hour. 5. He his hand on my head. 6. 

He should have down an hour ago. 



68 

7. Directly for As soon as.— " Directly he appeared, 
the confusion commenced'' should be "As soon as he ap- 
peared," &c. 

8. Such for So* — Such denotes the quality of the object. 
So denotes quantity or degree, "i know no other man 
who possesses such a few good qualities" should be " who 
possesses so few good qualities." "I have seldom seen 
such a lofty mountain" should be "so lofty a mountain." 
" I have never before seen such a beautiful view " should be 
" seen a view so beautiful." 

9. Heckon and Calculate for Suppose or Expect. 

"I reckon you are right about this" should be "I suppose 
you are right" &c. "He calculates to do more than any- 
one else has done" should be "He expects to do more" &c. 

10. Try and for Try to.— "Let us try and do some 
good in the world" should be "Let us try to do somegood" 
&c. "We will try and help you" should be "We will try 
to help you." 

11. Expect for Suppose.— Expect means to look for- 
ward to something yet to come. "I expect your past 
record influenced him in your favor" should be "I suppose 
your past record " &c. "I expect you had a delightful time 
yesterday " should be " I suppose you had " &c. 

12. Mighty, Dreadfully, Awfully and other 
intensives for Very, Exceedingly, Extremely, 
&C. — He is a mighty (very) nice man. She takes a dread- 
fully (exceedingly) long time to do the work. She is an 
awfully (extremely) stylish girl. I am horribly (extremely) 
tired. 

13. Enough for Sufficient.— Enough means what 
one desires. Sufficient means what one needs. " You did 
not give me enough time to do the work " should be "You 
not give me sufficient time" &c. " He gave me money enough 
to pay my debts" should be "He gave me sufficient money 
to pay" &c. 

14. Aggravates for Irritates or Annoys.— Aggra- 
vate means to increase or add to. "The child's disobedience 
aggravates me" should be "The child's disobedience irri- 
tates or annoys me. "But it is right to say, "His nervous- 
ness was aggravated by the continued talking" and "The 



69 



present hard times are greatly aggravated by the monopoly 
of money by the wealthy." 

15. Illy is never used by good writers or speakers for ill 
or badly. 

16. Whether or no for Whether or not.— ' I 

cannot say whether I shall go or 220" should be " Whether 
I shall go or not." "Whether you agree or no, I shall 
receive her" should be "Whether you agree or not, I" &c. 

17. LeSS for Fewer .—Fewer is used in speaking of indi- 
viduals ; less, in speaking of a mass. "I have given you no 
less than three warnings" should be "I have given you 
no fewer than three warnings." But "I have less money 
than you have" is correct. 

18. ^Between for Among and Vice Versa.— Between 
applies to only two. Among applies to more than two. 
"The money was divided between Mary and Lucy," but 
" among John, Mary, Lucy and William." 

19. Quantity for Number .—Quantity is used in 
speaking of anything in a mass; number, in speaking of 
individuals. "A large quantity of persons objected to the 
law" should be "A large number of persons" &c. But it 
is correct to say, "A large quantity of meat was shipped." 

20. From whence, From thence and From 
hence, for Whence, Thence and Hence.— Whence 
means from where. Thence means from there or from that 
place. Hence means from this place or from here. If from 
is placed before these words, it is equivalent to saying it 
twice. "From whence do you come?" is equal to "From 
from what place do you come?" "Let us depart hence" 
not "from hence." 

21. It is for There is or There are.— "It's only 
three days before Christmas" should be "There are only 
three days" &c. "It's only one of usleft " shouldbe "There 
is only" &c. " If it's anything I do dislike" should be "If 
there is anything" &c. 

22. Above for More than.— "Above five hundred per- 
sons witnessed it" should be "More than five hundred per- 
sons" &c. 

23. Most for Almost.— 1 'The work is most done" 
should be " almost done." 



70 

24. Likewise for AlS0»— Likewise means in like man- 
ner. Also means in addition to. "I am going, and you 
must go likewise" should be "you must go also." But "I 
shall travel by water, and you must travel likewise" is cor- 
rect. 

25. Badly for Earnestly or Greatly.— 1 1 wish to 

see him very badly" should be "I wish very earnestly to 
see him." 

26. Compare with and Compare to.— Things are 
compared with each other to show their relative excellence. 
Things are compared to eachotherto show some similarity. 
"Let us compare Hannibal with Washington." But 
"Someone has compared the parks of London to the lungs 
of the human body." 

27. Either and Neither.— These words apply pro- 
perly to only two objects. "Either of the two girls will 
suit me" is right. But "Either of the five girls" should be 
"Any one of the five girls " &c. 

28. Extra for Unusually.— 'She sang extra well" 
should be "She sang unusually well." 

29. Farther and Further.— Farther away from, but 
further on toward. "As he advanced further on his way, 
he realized that he was getting farther from home." 

30. Two first for First two.— "Sing the £rst two 
stanzas " is correct. Two cannot be £rst. 

31. Graduate for Are graduated.— Students do 
not graduate, but are graduated by their teachers. "She 
was graduated from Vassar College," not "She graduated 
from Vassar College." To graduate, in this sense, means 
to dignify with academical honors or diploma. 

32. Guess for Think or Believe or Suppose.— "I 

guess you are right " should be " I suppose" &c. 

33. Had have for Had.— "Had I have known that," 
&c. should be "Had I known that," &c. 

34. Lot for A great many or A large amount. 

"There were a lot of persons opposed to him" should be 
"There were a great many persons " &c. " He has a lot of 
money" should be " He has a large amount of money or a 
great deal of money." 



71 

35. Party for Person.— 1 ' He is a troublesome party tov 
deal with " should be "He is a troublesome person " &c. 

36. Raise and Reared.— Human beings are reared. 
Plants and lower animals are raised. 

37. Some for Somewhat or Slightly.— ' She is some 
better to-day" should be "She is somewhat better to-day." 

38. Got. — It is right to use got when we speak of some- 
thing acquired by one's own efforts; as, "He has gotten 
quite a reputation forindustry." But "He got sick," " I've 
got something for you," "He got angry," are incorrect. 
"He became sick," "I have something for you," "He became 
angry." 



LESSON XXVI. 
82. CLEARNESS OF EXPRESSION. 

One of the first requisites of good expression is clear- 
fiess. A person who can clothe his thoughts in language 
that will express at once his meaning, will always be some- 
what attractive in speech. 

When a sentence is arranged so that several meanings 
may be applied to it, it is said to be amoigtlOUS, 
Ambiguity is the most frequent cause of a lack of clearness. 

In the sentence, " His chief beside the smiling boy fell 
dead," we do not know whether " The chief fell dead beside 
the smiling boy" or " The smiling boy fell dead beside the 
chief: 1 

Sometimes we fail entirely to discover the meaning of a 
sentence, or the apparent meaning is so ridiculous, we 
know it could not have been the author's thought. In 
sentences of this kind, the fault is that of Obscurity. 



72 

RULES FOR CLEARNESS. 
Position of Parts of the Sentence. 

Rule i. — Place words, phrases and clauses as near as 

possible to the words to which they belong, so that there 

can be no doubt as to the meaning. 

Example. — "He hoped to see her come out of her afflic- 
tion, which seemed to crush her, with a meek and resigned 
will." With a meek and resigned will should be placed after 
come. 

Exercise. 

Rearrange the sentences with a view to clearness : 

1. I could see that he was intoxicated at a glance. 2. Per- 
sons are requested to see the Superintendent before apply- 
ing for admission into the school, at his office on Main street. 
3. He is thought to be generally a good man. 4. He has 
nearly made a million dollars in his business. 5. I would 
like the congregation to be seated, as I wish to say a few 
words, before I begin. 6. He asked the man to do the work 
with a broken arm. 7. We were met by the pastor, at the 
entrance of the church, who was to officiate on this occa- 
sion. 8. We expect to leave to-morrow before daybreak, at 
2 o'clock in the morning. 9. I wish to tell you how glad I 
am, before saying good-bye, at your success. 10. He played 
a beautiful piece on the violin, which he had composed. 11. 
1 only know this one thing about him. 12. It was their 
victory which ruined them, over the French. 13. We expect 
to attend a meeting in the interest of shortening the hours 
of labor, at 4 o'clock this afternoon. 14. He hath too much 
good, that hath no ill-fortune. 15. He declared his deter- 
mination to stand by us repeatedly. 16. He steals trash, 
that steals my purse. 17. We lessen the wants which have 
increased, by lessening our desires. 18. It is the last straw 
that breaks the camel's back usually. 19. Truth has thorns 
about it, as well as a rose. 20. The wicked even hate vice. 
21. Not possession is riches., but use. 22. An enemy cannot 
be hidden in misfortune, formerly believed to be a friend. 23. 
I thought of how I had held familiar converse with him who 
had passed to a better world a thousand times. 24. There 
is much more virtue in the world than vice. 

Antecedents of Personal Pronouns. 

Rule 2. — Be careful to indicate clearly the antecedents 
of personal pronouns. 



T3 



1. In cases of indirect discourse (not using the exact language 
of the speaker), this may be remedied by changing to the 
direct discourse (using the exact words of the speaker). 

Example. — Mary told her sister she had done well, and 
she knew she was proud of her. Change to, Mary said to 
her sister, "You have done well, and you know I am proud 
of you." 

2. Sometimes the sentence is made clear by using the 
words "former" and "latter" or by repeating the antece- 
dent, instead of the pronoun. 

Example. — " When David came into the presence of Saul, 
he threw a javelin at him" should be "When David came 
into the presence of Saul, the latter threw a javelin at him," 
or "Saul threw a javelin at him." 

3. Do not use the personal pronoun in a sentence, until its 
antecedent has been brought in. 

Example. — "When /fohad finished, the orator gazed over the 
audience." Change to "When the orator had finished, he 
gazed" &c. 

Exercise. 

1. He told his pastor that he knew his life-work w r as 
finished. 

2. The lad cannot leave his father, for, if he should, he 
would surely die. 

3. When all persons learn to treat others fairly, they will 
have their gratitude. 

4. He told his friend his secret of success. 

5. Men look with an evil eye on the good of others, and 
think their prosperity protects them. 

6. She told hei friend there was one thing she knew she 
ought to tell her, and she intended to do so then. 

7. John promised his father he would attend to his busi- 
ness better. 

Omission of Necessary- Words, 

Rule j. — Do not omit necessary words. 

It is usually the articles the, a and an, the relative pronouns and 
the prepositions that are incorrectly omitted. 

Examples. — I. "The officers of the bank have just elected 
a secretary and treasurer" may mean that one man has 
been elected to fill the two positions. But, if we say "a 
secretary and a treasurer," two men are certainly meant. 

2. "She received congratulations from Mr. Hodge, the 
president and her old friend." We wish to designate three 



74 



persons. This may be done by saying "from Mr. Hodge, 
from the president and from her old friend." Otherwise, Mr. 
Hodge might be the president and her old friend, when he is 
neither. 

3. "Those who love their enemies, pray for their perse- 
cutors, bless those that curse them, obey the divine com- 
mand." This should be "Those who love their enemies, 
who pray for their jjersecutors, who bless those that curse 
them, obey the divine command." 

Exercise. 

Supply the necessary -words : 

1. The papers showed that the secretary and treasurer of 
the organization had been guilty of embezzlement. 

2. They arrested the forger and thief. 

3. She extorted a promise from Mrs. Gray, her sister and 
me. 

4. He that hath not much, but does not covet, desires 
nothing, and is content, is never poor. 

5. To be humble to superiors is a duty ; equals, a courtesy ; 
inferiors, nobleness. 

6. Faults often lie not in the object, but the mind. 



LESSON XXVII. 
83. FORCE. 

Force consists in constructing sentences so as to make 
the most vivid and the most lasting impression. It is 
giving the strongest meaning to the sentence. 

RULES FOR FORCE. 
Redundancy and Tautology. 

Rule 1. — Avoid redundancy and tautology. 

1. Redundancy is the use of unnecessary words in expressing 
an idea. 

Example. — "I will surely recompense him back again for all 
the trouble which hehas taken for me" should be "I will recom- 
pense him for all his trouble for me." 

One of the most common sources of redundancy is the use 
of intensive adjectives and adverbs, such as wonderfully, 
indescribably, very, terribly, magnificent. 



75 



"His extremely interesting address was heard with the most 
undivided attention by a magnificently large audience" should 
be "His interesting address was heard w T ith undivided atten- 
tion by a large audience." 

2. Tautology is the repetition of an idea in different words. 

Examples. — "There appeared a royal messenger sent by {he 
king'' 1 should be "There appeared a royal messenger" or 
" There appeared a messenger sent by the king." " In the park 
was an equestrian statue of Washington on a horse" should be 
"an equestrian statue of Washington" or "a statue of 
Washington on a horse." 

' Exercise. 

Correct the following and give reasons : 

1. Raise your head up. 

2. You have asked the question once, but I would like to 
have it repeated over again. 

3. His descent from the sublime down to the ridiculous 
was much enjoyed. 

4. As I previously remarked before, you are wrong. 

5. He did the work correctly, just as it should have been 
done. 

6. The large hall w T as entirely filled with a vast audience. 

7. Do not sit down, but stand up. 

8. His contemporaries, who lived at the same time with 
him, were envious of his advancement. 

9. In my walks I was often met by another pedestrian 
foot-traveler. 

10. He retrogrades backward in his morals. 

11. Self defence is the universal instinct of all men. 

12. Let us strive to advance forward toward perfection. 

13. He wanders over the plains of history, and from thence 
soars above with an upward flight on the wings of oratory. 

14. He is a new beginner in this department. 

15. Let us follow after the good example of our friend. 

Ending a Sentence Weakly. 

The mind naturally dwells on the last part of a sentence, 
and retains the impression given by it. It is, therefore, 
highly necessary that sentences should end with important 
words. 

Rule 2. — Avoid ending a sentence with any weak-sound- 
ing expression. 

Examples. — " I try to do what is right generally " should 
be " I generally try to do what is right." " I give my secret 
thoughts to others very seldom " should be " I very seldom 
give" &c. 



TO 

Exercise. 
Correct : 

1 . Whose house are you going to ? 

2. I expect to visit many wonderful places with him. 

3. Why is it that you exercise your highest powers so 
seldom ? 

4. This is a crime I am not guilty of. 

5. They attained a higher growth formerly. 

6. Whom did you travel with ? 

7. We laid him down slowly and sadly. 

8. He is very entertaining usually. 

Climax. 

Rule j. — A sentence is strengthened by arranging the 

parts in the order of climax, that is, increasing the 

strength of the sentence toward the close. 

Examples. — " I would suffer, die and bleed for my country " 
would be stronger arranged "I would suffer, bleed and die" 
&c. " A word, a sigh, a tear, will win him to you " would be 
stronger arranged "A tear, a word, a sigh, will win him " &c. 

Exercise. 

Arrange in order of climax : 

1. We should pray for those who persecute us, love our 
enemies, do good to those who despitefully use us. 

2. You command my talents, my life, my fortune, my 
services. 

3. Misfortune may come, death itself may hover near, 
tempests may lower, storms may break around me, but my 
trust in God shall be unshaken. 

4. Security, peace, joy, happiness, contentment, come from 
a humble mind. 

5. If you would raise others from misery to happiness, if 
you would save them from destruction, if you would do 
good to them, show them the importance of feeding the soul- 
life. 

Splitting Particles. 

Rule 4. — Do not separate a preposition from its object 

in a sentence. This is called " splitting particles." 

Examples. — "I cannot understand your aversion to and 
my strong friendship for him " should be "I cannot under- 
stand your aversion to him and my strong friendship for 
him." "He is either employed by, or is a partner with Mr. 
Brown" should be "He is either employed by Mr. Brown, or 
is his partner." 



77 

Exercise. 
Correct : 

1. I can say nothing for or against the proposition. 

2. He departed from and never returned to the place of 
his nativity. 

3. If you would be free from, you must never allow your- 
self to be tempted by these vices. 

4. You cannot say that you are neither for nor against 
the right. 

Inversion. 

Rule 5. — A sentence is usually made stronger by inver- 
sion, or changing the position of the parts of the sentence. 

The usual place for the subject of a sentence is at the 
beginning, and for the predicate, at the end of a sentence. 

The strength of the sentence is often increased by having 
the subject and the predicate exchange places, putting the 
subject near the end of the sentence and the predicate near 
the beginning. 

Examples.— "The power of speaking to the eye and heart 
is great" is more forcible arranged " Great is the power of 
speaking to the eye and heart." "Long days of pain suc- 
ceed to pleasure's hour" is stronger arranged "To pleas- 
ure's hour succeed long days of pain." 

Exercise. 

Strengthen by inversion : 

1. The silence that followed was deep. 2. The village 
smithy stands under a spreading chestnut tree. 3. Skeletons 
in chains, half buried in the sands, lie in Ocean's wide 
domains. 4. The beautiful, wild chimes rang low at times 
and loud at times in the quaint old Flemish city. 5. The 
still procession noAv moved to the altar. 6. The live 
thunder leaps far along from peak to peak, among the rat- 
tling crags. 7. The sailor's song and cheery smile were gone. 
8. The gates of Hercules lay behind him. 9. Thou drankest 
to the dregs the bitterest cup of men's stupidity. 10. The 
great Azores lay behind him. 11. The plain stretched far 
below them, dazzling with the winter snow. 12. John of 
Brent upstarted at length from his rude couch. 13. The 
noble Douglas sprung forth then, and his daughter hung on 
his neck. 14. The menials drew back in a heap. 15. The 
Abbot stood on the threshold, the holy rood in his hand. 
16. A bugle-call rang far and wide, upward from the dark 
ocean. 17. The father passed through that wild throng, 
and reached the royal Bruce at last. 18. The monarch sped 



78 



one pitying glance. 19. But the terrors of the charging host 
were lost on the British heart. 20. The Dane seems to seek 
vainly for words to speak his new-born love. 

Periodic and Loose Sentences. 

Rule 6. — Periodic sentences are usually more forcible 
than loose sentences. 

A Periodic Sentence is one in which the main thought is 
kept until the close, the dependent parts coming first. 

The Loose Sentence is one in which the main thought is 
put first, the dependent parts following. 

Variety of Structure Necessary .—The loose sen- 
tence is not necessarily faulty. It is not a good plan to deal 
too largely in either the loose or the periodic sentence. As 
a rule, the use of the periodic sentence tends to strengthen the 
discourse and to keep up the attention of the reader; but, 
in extended discourse, if carried too far, it is apt to pro- 
duce weariness of the mind. The loose sentence, used occa- 
sionally, rests the mind and promotes variety, which is 
always pleasing to the ear and eye. 

Examples of Periodic Sentences. 
Change to loose sentences, and notice the loss of strength. 

1. If the clock of the tongue be not set by the dial of the 
heart, it will not go right. 

2. By remembering that in all disputes men should give 
soft words and hard arguments, thereby striving not so 
much to vex as to convince an enemy, we carry out the best and 
only rule of true argument. 

3. When a man makes himself the common jester of a com- 
pany, he has just wit enough to be a fool. 

4. Because Sertorius was slow in counsel, grave in his 
understanding and quick in execution, he was highly com- 
mended by Plutarch. 

5. Unless a man has a well-grounded hope of being happy 
hereafter, he cannot be truly happy here. 

Examples of Loose Sentences. 

Change to periodic sentences, and notice the increase of 
energy. 

1. The fever of passion leaves us weaker than it found us, 
when it has once taken possession and spent itself in the 
mind. 



79 



2. Zeno made silence his choice of all virtues, because by 
means of it, he saw the imperfections of others and concealed 
his own. 

3. We relieve ourselves of our own misfortunes by sympa- 
thizing with others and by relieving them in their distress. 

4. Mark Antony declared he had lost all except what he 
had given away, when he was at the lowest ebb of his 
fortune. 

5. A law ought to be retained and held fast, when it has 
been enacted and has been proved to be good. 

6. Try to borrow some money, if you would know its 
value. 

7. Then is the time for the laborer and the artisan to pre- 
pare for losses and for adversity, in bright days, when the 
sun of prosperity is full and clear, and when they find full 
employment at good wages. 

8. I will never be troubled, nor will I set a beacon on fire, 
when I have an injury done me, or when I am greatly 
wounded. I consider who did it. He did it ignorantly, if 
it be my kinsman ; he did it against his will, if my friend ; 
it is no more than I expected, if my enemy. I will put a fair 
construction on it, no matter what happens to me. 

Exercise. 

Correct and give reasons : 

1. The weather is terribly warm to-day. 2. We must rest 
up awhile before working again. 3. When I first began the 
work, I found it mighty hard. 4. Do your duty to and you 
will be rewarded by God. 5. He ain't wise who pins his 
faith to another's sleeve. 6. Virtue will not leave us, with- 
out we tear ourselves from her hold. 7. I reckon you are 
too smart to be so easily caught. 8. How strange that 
such a short thing as human life should be so precious! 9. 
Directly you are ready, let me know. 10. Prepare for sick- 
ness in health, and old age in youth. 11. The petty annoy- 
ances of life keep him in a continual state of aggravation. 
12. If you do not behave well, I must undertake to learn you 
better manners. 13. I calculated to do a great deal of work 
this year. 14. Would you not like to lay down for a while? 
15. He is continually sitting an example to others by his 
upright conduct. 16. You must treat everybody respectively, 
if you wish to gain the respect of others. 17. If you do like 
I tell you, you will succeed. 18. You must try and do the 
work to-morrow. 19. Mr. Brown has just been informed 
by his pastor that he is expected to deliver an address to 
his congregation the next Sabbath. 20. To make life pleas- 
ant, to soothe the distress of the afflicted, to comfort in the 
hour of death, to point the way to heaven — these are the 
privileges of a Christian. 21. He is sufficiently great enough, 



80 



who hath shown that mastery over self can be attained. 22. 
A man in a measure may command those he comes in con- 
tact with. 23. He looks like he is ready to do valiant bat- 
tle. 24. He has three sons, named respectfully, John, George 
and Henry. 25. Lie me down where I may see the softened 
light. 26. The antiquity of old age is not always a mark of 
verity. 27. Apothecaries would not put pills in sugar with- 
out they were unpleasant. 28. Methinks in the end things 
will mend. 29. Men fear death like children go to bed in the 
dark. 30. You cannot live your life over again a second 
time. 31. If he sees a man idle, the devil will put him to 
work. 32. Vows are forgotten in storms, made in calms. 
33. He that blows dust in his neighbor's eyes need not be 
surprised if his eyes are filled. 34. If friends should fail you, 
if you should lose every thing, if misfortune should come, you 
have a firm anchor in my love. 

MISCELLANEOUS EXERCISE. 

Correct and give reasons : 

1. One of you are not speaking the truth. 2. I feel mighty 
sick. 3. Either he or his friend have made the mistake. 4. 
I will try and please you in this. 5. Those kind of discus- 
sions cause trouble. 6. We had an awfully good time. 7. 
No less than ten persons were killed. 8. I have heard how 
that a train has been wrecked. 9. Neither money or labor 
were spared. 10. Them are not my mistakes. 11. Unrea- 
sonable people aggravate me. 12. He learned me all I know 
about this. 13. Can I go with you ? 14. I expect you were 
very sick yesterday. 15. No person can boast themselves of 
to-morrow's luck. 16. You know that life is short ; prepare 
thyself, then, for death. 17. lam not the same person which 
I was. 18. This is regarded as the most holiest of places. 
19. One feels strangely in a far country. 20. Was you guilty 
of that act? 21. The crowd were a very orderly one. 22. 
Every one of your opinions are worthless. 23. I came here 
for to see you. 24. She said as how I had injured her. 25. 
I don't know whether I admire her or no. 26. He divided 
the money among Mary and I. 27. Don't never speak of 
that again. 28. Candor and truth compels me to say this. 
29. He is one of those people who makes great pretences. 30. 
If I were him, I would change my course. 31. It is not me 
who is to blame. 32. This is my brother's-in-law's house. 
33. I tried to prevent him going. 34. His fault was greater 
than your's. 35. The boy which you punished was not to 
blame. 36. Who did you ask for? 37. Where are you living 
at now? 38. If anyone wishes the position, let them apply 
to me. 39. Many people they are unfortunate. 40. Neither 



81 

pride nor wealth bring happiness. 41. A kind word or a 
loving smile light up a lonely heart sometimes. 42. There 
was many things I wished to speak of. 43. Politics are his 
chief employment. 44. Neglect or unkindness drive many to 
ruin. 45. I intended to have written sooner. 46. He is con- 
sidered honest generally. 47. He done his work splendid. 
48. He will neither read or study. 49. He has not confessed 
nor denied his crime. 50. From whence come these 
unpleasant feelings ? 51. I have a quantity of things to dis- 
cuss with you. 52. I shall go first to New York, and from 
thence to Chicago. 53. There will be no less than ten con- 
testants to-night. 54. He looked miserably. 55. The 
heavenly bodies are in motion perpetually. 56. They 
ascended up the mountain. 57. He must be kind to others, 
who would himself be treated kindly. 58. Mr. Hanson 
requested his agent to purchase his goods without delay, 
as he was afraid that waiting would be to his disadvantage. 
59. I wish to get this position, and I would like a recom- 
mend from you. 60. They returned back again to the city 
from whence they started. 61. You have done that which 
thou hast denied. 62. How I wish I was in your place! 63. 
Now I lie me down to sleep. 64. The awfulest of all crimes 
has been committed. 65. He was near dead when we found 
him. 66. To you and I belong all the credit. 67. She is 
much the gentlest of the two girls. 68. Before he come, 
everything was pleasant. 69. He rose up in his seat to state 
his position, but, before he could open up his mouth to say 
anything, he was ordered to retire back to his place. 70. I 
knowed all about you before I seen you. 71. I had hoped 
to have heard better things of you. 72. The evil entereth 
thy heart, that cometh out of my mouth. 73. There would 
be no need of arsenals and forts, were half the power that 
fills the world with terror, were half the wealth bestowed 
on camps and courts given to redeem the human mind from 
error. (Arrange in periodic form). 74. Discreet persons 
Jiave neither eyes or ears sometimes. 75. England expects 
every man to do their duty. 76. Not one of you have asked 
after me since I have came home. 77. The sweetest girl to 
me is her who have been most careful of others. 78. I have 
done wrote my lesson. 79. We shall never see him no more. 
80. One of those men are certainly wrong. 81 . I would give 
all I have, all I hope to be, all I am, to be rid of this terror. 
82. He could tell me how to black his boots in several lan- 
guages. 83. She sets alone, drinking in the beauty that lays 
before her eyes. 84. These kind of people arouse no interest 
in me. 85. One or the other of you have spoken false. 86. 
In matters of taste, let every one decide for themselves. 87. 
He rode to the city, driving a flock of sheep on horseback. 
88. No other man has been so generous nor so sympathetic 
as him. 89. The youngest of those two boys is the most 



82 

intelligent. 90. Bring me them there books. 91. Willing or 
no, you must come with me. 92. We entered into the room. 
93. I feel sorter tired. 94. No one can be nobler than her. 
95. I had rather be with the right minority than with the 
wrong majority. 96. I find my affairs in good condition, 
after having been brought so near the verge of ruin, thanks 
to your generous assistance. 97. The seaport town of 
Norfolk, which is on the coast, does a great deal of ship- 
ping. 98. "Paul and Virginia" are an interesting story. 
99. Neither olive oil nor alcohol are as heavy as distilled 
water, but milk and sea- water is heavier. 100. Science has 
proved that the earth was round. 101. He came from out 
of the house for to escape her presence. 102. Do you agree 
to me taking the position ? 103. I don't believe in a person 
taking advantage of others' misfortunes. 104. There is no 
hope of such a man reforming. 105. I am tolerable well, 
thank you. 106. I could not get to go. 107. He is a man of 
great, large mind. 108. I and you and she are good friends. 

109. She sang sweeter than I have ever before heard her. 

110. He says as how I am to blame for his trouble. 

REVIEW QUESTIONS. 

1. What does English grammar teach? 2. What is etymol- 
ogy? 3. What is syntax? 4. What is analysis? 5. Name 
the parts of speech. 6. Define each. 7. Give three examples of 
each. 8. What is a sentence ? 9. How are sentences divided 
according to use? 10. Define each class. 11. Give an exam- 
ple of each. 12. Tell what punctuation mark follows each 
class. 13. What is the subject of a sentence? the predicate? 
14. Give examples. 15. Where does a part of the predicate 
usually come in an interrogative sentence? Give example. 

16. What is said of the subject of an imperative sentence? 

17. What is the object? 18. What questions does it answ r er? 
Give examples. 19. What is said of nouns coming after thje 
different forms of the verb to be? 20. What is meant by the 
enlarged subject and predicate? Give examples. 21. What 
are the principal elements of every sentence? 22. What are 
the subordinate elements ? 23. Define each of the subordi- 
nate elements. 24. Give an example of each. 25. Name and 
define the two general classes of nouns. 26. Give five exam- 
ples of each. 27. How should proper nouns and words 
derived from them be written? Give examples. 28. Name 
the classes of common nouns. 29. Define and give examples 
of each. 30. What properties belong to nouns? 31. Define 
gender. 32. Name and define the genders. 33. Give four 
examples of each. 34. Give the corresponding feminine forms 
of sir, giant, heir, liero, duke, actor, executor, host, son, Jesse. 35. 
What is person ? 36. Name and define theclasses of person. 



83 

37. Give the person of I, he, thou, it, you, them, we, her, my, they. 38. 
Name and define the two classes of number. 39. Give four 
examples of each. 40. Give the corresponding plural forms 
of grouse, sheep, deer, tongs, scissors, mouse, q, m, dub-foot, brother-in- 
law, woman-singer, Mr. Boyd, phenomenon, radius, brother, head. 
41. What is case? 42. Name and define the four cases. 43. 
In what case is a noun used as the predicate of a sentence? 
44. Give the cases of the nouns in the following sentences : 
(1). Practice economy. (2). She is my sister. (3). John's 
work is finished. (4). Listen, my child. 45. How is the 
possessive case of singular nouns formed? of plural nouns? 
of the names of firms? of two nouns in apposition? 46. In 
what four ways may a noun be in the absolute case ? 47. 
Give an example of each. 48. What is meant by nouns in 
apposition? 49. What case do they have? 50. Give an 
example of a noun in apposition with another noun. 51. 
What is the use of a pronoun? 52. What pronouns are 
used in speaking of males ? of females ? of things ? of more 
than one person? 53. What properties have pronouns? 54. 
What is the antecedent of a pronoun? 55. Give an example. 
56. Name and define the three classes of pronouns. 57. Name 
the personal pronouns. 58. Name the relative pronouns. 
59. Name the interrogative pronouns. 60. What are the 
two classes of personal pronouns? 61. Give three exam- 
ples of each. 62. Decline /. 63. Decline him. 64. Decline ye. 
65. Decline you. 66. Decline myself. 67. In what does a pro- 
noun agree with its antecedent? 68. In what case are pro- 
nouns used as subjects or predicates? 69. When pronouns 
of different persons are used, tell in what order they come. 

70. Name the simple and the compound relative pronouns. 

71. To what does who refer? which? that? 72. Give example 
of each. 73. Decline who and which. 74. What is the subse- 
quent of an interrogative pronoun? 75. What is the gender, 
person and number of whom in "Whom may I call upon for 
aid? My friends." 76. Name the four classes of adjectives. 
77. Define each. 78. Give three examples of each. 79. Give 
two examples of nouns used as adjectives. 80. What is 
comparison? 81. Give the degrees of comparison. 82. Define 
each degree and tell how it is formed. 83. Give three exam- 
ples of each. 84. Compare simple by descending comparison 
and by ascending comparison. 85. Give two examples of 
adjectives used as nouns. 86. What is a verb? 87. Define 
transitive, intransitive and neuter verbs. 88. Give two 
examples of each. 89. What is the most prominent neuter 
verb ? 90. As what three parts of speech may a participle 
be used? 91. Give an example of each. 92. Name the three 
classes of participles. 93. Give three examples of each. 94. 
In what does the present participle always end ? 95. What 
are auxiliaries? 96. Give other forms of the auxiliaries, 
may, can, do, be, have, shall, will. 97. Give the auxiliary and the 



84 

principal verb in sliould go, can be seen, am sitting, will have been 
gone. 98. How may the auxiliaries do, be, ham, will, sometimes 
be used? Ans. As principal verbs, when no other verb is 
used with them ; as, "I do my work." "I«m a child." "I 
have money." "I will my money to you." 99. What are 
regular and irregular verbs? 100. Give three examples of 
each. 101. What are the principal parts of verbs? 102. 
Give the principal parts of am, begin, bite, blow, break, catch, 
choose, cost, draw, do, fly, give, hurt, grow, lay, lie, eat, lose, make, run, 
teach, icrite, strive, slay, put, think. 103. Define active and pas- 
sive voice. 104. Give two examples of each. 105. How is 
the passive voice formed? 106. How may a verb in the 
active voice be changed to the passive? Give an example. 
107. What is mode? 108. Name the five modes. 109. What 
does the indicative mode do? 110. How is the subjunctive 
mode used? 111. What words usually introduce the clause? 
112. What words are the signs of the potential mode? 113. 
What does this mode express ? 114. What does the impera- 
tive mode express? 115. What is said of the subject in the 
imperative mode? 116. What is the sign of the infinitive 
mode? 117. Does it assert action? 118. Give the mode of 
can go ; to see ; If this be true, &c. ; go home; I see you ; should 
tell. 119. Where is the sign of the infinitive mode usually 
omitted? 120. Name the six tenses. 121. Give the signs of 
the tenses. 122. What is meant by the person and number of 
verbs? 122. What change is made in verbs used with thou, 
and in those used in the ancient form, third person, singu- 
lar? 124. Why do infinitives have no person and number? 
125. How do we usually form the singular number of verbs? 
the plural number? 126. What does an adverb express? 
127. Give examples. 128. Compare well, ill, much. 129. Com- 
pare slowly by descending and by ascending comparison. 130. 
What is a negative word? Name the principal ones. 131. 
Which negative word is usually dropped when two are 
used? 132. Give three words that often have a negative 
use. 133. Tell what prepositions follow angry, prejudice, 
entertain, difference, disappointed, different, need, free, correspond. 
134. What is said about ending a sentence with a preposi- 
tion? 135. What do conjunctions join? 136. Name the two 
classes of conjunctions. 137. Give four coordinate and four 
subordinate conjunctions. 138. What should always follow 
neither? either? not? rather? else? other? 139. Name the 
principal interjections. 140. Can a word be more than one 
part of speech ? 141. Use as nouns and verbs blessing, hand, 
dart, beat. 142. Use as nouns and adjectives window, hail, 
picture, corn. 143. Use as prepositions and adverbs without, 
within, along, between. 144. What is a simple sentence? 145. 
How many words and phrases may it contain ? 146. How 
many clauses? 147. May any of the elements of a simple 
sentence be compound ? Example. 148. What is a phrase? 



85 

149. What kinds of modifiers may words and phrases be? 

150. Define each and give example. 151. What is a complex 
sentence? Example. 152. What is a principal proposition? 
a subordinate clause? 153. Examples of each. 154. By 
what are subordinate clauses introduced ? Examples. 155. 
What kinds of modifiers may clauses be? 156. Example of 
each. 157. Tell what are the substantive clauses and why they 
are so called. 158. Give examples of subject and predicate 
clauses. 159. Tell what is a compound sentence. 160. Name 
the conjunctions that usually connect the members. 161. 
Can any member of a compound sentence be itself a complex 
sentence? 162. Tell what is necessary in order that a 
speaker or writer maybe successful. 163. Tell how one may 
improve his power of expression. 164. Give the first ele- 
ments of a good vocabulary. 165. Give two rules for 
improving one's diction. 166. Give sentences using like and 
as correctly. 167. Give sentences using respectfully and respect- 
ively correctly. 168. Give sentences using learn and teach cor- 
rectly. 169. Give sentences using set and sit, lay and lie, cor- 
rectly. 170. Give sentences using such and so correctly. 171. 
Give a sentence using aggravate correctly. 172. Give a sentence 
using expect correctly. 173. Correct "He is illy prepared for 
the position." 174. Give sentences using correctly between 
and among, less and fewer, quantity and number. 175. Give 
sentences using correctly likewise and also, badly and earnestly, 
graduate and are graduated, party and person, got. 176. Give 
one of the first requisites of good expression. 177. Tell when 
sentences are ambiguous. 178. Define obscurity. 179. Give 
the rule for the position of the parts of a sentence. 180. 
Tell what is indirect discourse. Example. 181. Tell what is 
direct discourse. Example. 182. Tell how the antecedents of 
personal pronouns may be shown clearly. 183. Tell what 
are the necessary words that are usually omitted in sen- 
tences. 184. Define force. 185. Define redundancy and tautol- 
ogy. Give examples. 186. Tell why a sentence should be 
ended with' a strong expression. 187. Define climax. 188. 
Define splitting particles. 189. Define inversion. 190. Tell how 
inversion strengthens a sentence. 191. Define loose and 
periodic sentences. Examples. 192. Tell why variety of 
structure in sentences is necessary. 



86 
LESSON XXVIII. 

CAPITALS. 

RULES FOR CAPITALIZATION. 

Capital letters should be used in the following cases: 

Rule l.—The first word of every sentence. 

Example. — Many things have happened. 

Rule 2 —The first word of each line of poetry. 

Example.— "The night has a thousand eyes, 
The day, but one; 
Yet the light of a whole world dies 
With the setting sun." 

Rule 3.— The first word after an introductory 

word, phrase or clause. 

Examples.— 1. Resoh^ed, That, in the death of our brother, 
this organization has suffered a severe loss. 2. Be it enacted 
by the Legislature, That these things &c. 

Rule 4.— Common nouns that are strongly per- 
sonified. 

Example. — Hope for a season bade the world farewell, 
And Freedom shrieked when Kosciusko fell. 

Rule 5 —The pronoun land the interjection O. 

Example. — happiness! /cannot call thee mine. 
Rule 6.— All names Of God; as, the Creator, the 
Supreme One, the Father, the Son, the Holy Ghost, &c. 

Note. — It is n °t necessary to capitalize the pronouns referring to God 
(thou, he, him, his, &c), if it is perfectly clear that Deity is referred to. 

Rule 7— All names of persons and places. 

Examples. — Mr. Raynor ; Philadelphia; Inez Smith; United 
States ; Samuel Johnson ; France ; Genoa ; Britain ; Venice. 

Rule 8.— All words derived from proper names. 

Examples. — British ; Johnsonian ; Venetian; Christian; Genoese; 
French ; American. 



87 

Rule 9.— Titles of distinction, respect or honor, 

especially when used with the name. 

Examples. — Prince John ; Governor Gray ; Superintendent 
Knowles; Sir William Johns; Frederick the Great; Pope 
Leo ; President Monroe ; Lord Protector of England ; Richard 
the Bold. 

Rule 10.— The names of all sects and Classes. 

Examples.- — Republicans; Methodists; Freethinkers; Chris- 
tians; Jesuits; Democrats; Populists; Prohibitionists* 

Rule 11.— Names of the days of the week and the 

months of the year. Names of the seasons are not 

capitalized. 

Example. — This is Monday, the first day of January, which 
is one of the winter months. 

Rule 12.— Names of important events and ages of 

history. 

Examples. — The Elizabethan Age ; the Civil War; the Dark 
Ages; the Columbian Exposition; the Golden Age; the Revolu- 
tionary War. 

Rule 13.— The words JVorth, South, East and 

West, when denoting sections of the country, are capital- 
ized. When they are used to denote direction, use small 
letters. 

Examples. — The South is rapidly progressing-. Virginia is 
south of Maryland. 

Rule 14.— In the titles ofbooks, essays, &c, capitalize 
the nouns, verbs, adjectives and adverbs. 

Example. — Have you read the Essay on Human Understand- 
ing t 

Rule 15.— A series of numbered phrases or clauses 

must each begin with a capital. 

Example. — I shall endeavor to prove to my audience the 
falsity of his claims by showing 1, That his researches were 
conducted on an illegal plan ; 2, That his discoveries have 
been distorted to suit his pleasure; 3, That his theories have 
been rejected by all men of learning. 



88 

Rule 16.— The first word of every direct quota- 
tion. 

Example. — Some one has said, "Every man has his price." 

Rule 17.— All organized assemblies and bills 

enacted by them. 

Examples. — Parliament; Magna Char ta ; Treaty of Westphalia; 
Hanseatic League; the National Assembly ; the House of Repre- 
sentatives ; the Congress of the United States ; the Bill of Rights. 

Exercise on Capitals. 

Direction— Correct the capitalization in the following 
sentences, and give reasons : 

1. He lives in london, on the thames river. 2. to gerniany, 
the thirty years war was most ruinous. 3. General morgan, 
the intrepid commander of riflemen in the american revolu- 
tion, was a native of new jersey. 4. 'tis Winter in the heart 
to-day, although 'tis only may. 5. By a decree of the gen- 
eral assembly, an order of arrest was issued against him. 6. 
The Jesuit priest, making a cross upon my breast, said, my 
son, You have sinned deeply, but, by the grace of our lady of 
loretto, you shall be Pardoned. 7. When the Venetians saw 
the banner of Saint mark on shore, they rapidly made 
for land. 8. Be it enacted by the congress of the united 
states, that these laws be repealed, &c. 9. I have been 
reading locke's essay on christian revelation the sure stand- 
ard of morality. 10. I wish, in my talk on london, to dis- 
cuss 1, the mildness of the climate; 2, the natural strength 
of the city ; 3, the honor of its citizens. 11. The constitu- 
tion of sweden is based upon protestantism. 12. Bede, dis- 
tinguished by the name of the venerable, was one of the 
most prominent churchmen of the middle ages. 13. We 
christians are worshipers of the supreme one, the eternal 
king of heaven. 14. Silence and darkness! twins from 
ancient night ! thou didst put to flight thy enemy sun. 15. 
The reformation, which was begun by luther, soon spread 
throughout all Christendom. 16. He lives at 912 grayson 
avenue. 17. We were invited to dine with governor gray 
and senator field. 18. Be merry now, for Christmas comes 
but once a year. 19. The lord protector of england caused 
a council to be held on friday, the fifth day of June. 20. 
Hannibal crossed the alps mountains, with his army of 
Carthaginians, and marched against the romans. 21. The 
period between the fifth and the eleventh centuries of european 
history is called the dark ages. 22. By the bill of confedera- 
tion, all the german princes promised free constitutions to 



89 



their people. 23. The french revolution was one great scene 
of Bloodshed. 24. Peter the hermit preached the first cru- 
sade. 25. The first complete book printed was a copy of the 
bible, called the mazarin bible, found in the collection of 
cardinal mazarin. 26. The league of lombardy was formed 
in 1167 by twenty-three italian cities. 27. After the congress 
of Vienna, austria hung like a millstone about the neck of 
italy. 28. The french revolution of 1830 ended the reign of 
charles X., of the bourbon family, who was succeeded by 
the duke of Orleans. 29. Milton, reduced in circumstances 
after the restoration, devoted himself to the completion of 
his paradise lost, for which he received only fifteen pounds. 
30. In the house of lords, he vindicated the honor of his 
country. 31. Crown the saviour king of kings and lord of 
lords. 32. The twenty-seven provinces of early italy may 
be grouped under three heads : 1, The western, or european ; 
2, the eastern, or asiatic; 3, the southern, or african. 33. 
In 1757, Benjamin franklin was sent to england, as agent for 
Pennsylvania. While in that country, he was chosen fellow 
of the royal society, and was honored with the degree of 
doctor of laws by the universities of st. andrews, edinburgh 
and oxford. 



PUNCTUATION. 

1. Punctuation is the art of dividing written discourse 
into sections, by means of points. 

2. The principal points are 

The Comma, , The Exclamation, ! 

The Semicolon, ; The Dash, — 

The Colon, : The Quotations, " » 

The Period, . The Parenthesis, ( ) 

The Interrogation, ? The Brackets, [ ] 
The Apostrophe. > 

The Period, the Interrogation and the Excla- 
mation are called the terminal points, because they 
alone are used to mark the end of a sentence. 



90 
THE COMMA. 

The Comma marks the shortest pause, and indicates only 
a slight suspension of the voice. 

Rule 1.— Words of direct address should be set oft' 
by commas. 

The term "set off by commas" means a comma before 
and one after the expression, when possible. 
Punctuate : 

1. You my dear sir can understand my position. 

2. Remember my boy success depends upon yourself. 

3. You are in the wrong- my friend. 

4. I rise Mr. President to explain my position. 

5. Listen my child to the story I have to tell. 

Rule 2.— Words and phrases used in a Series should 
be separated by commas when the connective is omitted. 

1. When the words and phrases are used in pairs, a comma 
should come after each pair. 

Example. — "Sink or swim, live or die, survive or perish, 
I give my hand and my heart to this vote." 

2. When the connective is omitted between all the words in 
the series but the last two, a comma may be allowed with 
that connective. 

Example. — He has been kind, brave, and true to me. 

3. When the words in the series have no connective at all 
between them, a comma follows the last, except when a 
single w r ord follows them. 

Example. — Love, peace, content, joy, make the happiness 
of life. 

4. When a series of adjectives modify the same noun, the last 
one should not be separated from the noun. 

Example. — He is a kind, good, true friend to me. 

Punctuate : 

1. We make to-day a shipment of one hundred barrels of 
flour, fifty kegs of butter, sixty-five pounds of coffee and one 
hundred barrels of meat. 

2. A faithful earnest close attention to business is neces- 
sary to a successful career. 

3. Truth and integrity kindness and modesty gentleness 
and humility were remarked in him. 



91 



4. Our hopes our fears our desires our ambitions keep us 
in constant turmoil. 

5. Sadly tearfully we laid him to rest. 

Rule 3.— Words, phrases and clauses used in apposi- 
tion, (that is, used to identify or to explain other words) 
should be set off by commas. 

Punctuate : 

1 . Mr. Jones our agent in Richmond will make the con- 
tract with you. 

2. We refer by permission to Mr. J. W. Smith one of the 
leading merchants of your city. 

3. Cultivate patience and energy two important elements 
of suecess. 

4. The words "to obey is better than sacrifice" fell from 
the lips of Christ. 

5. We the people of the United States establish these laws. 

Rule 4 — Adjective phrases and clauses should be 
set off by commas when not restrictive. 

Restrictive phrases and clauses are those which cannot be 
left out of a sentence, without altering the meaning of the 
rest of the sentence. They require no commas at all, unless 
they are long, when a comma may be put at the end, for 
clearness. 

Example. — All persons w7w are guilty of criminal acts should 
be severely punished. 

Punctuate : 

1. The man that always complains is never pitied. 

2. Mr. S. who was the first person I consulted advised a 
contrary course. 

3. His actions guided by his pure spirit were irreproach- 
able. 

4. All persons disobeying the rules of the institution will 
be immediately expelled. 

5. The men hemmed in on all sides were forced to sur- 
render. 

6. He that goes a-borrowing goes a-sorrowing. 

7. Our contract which was greatly in your favor has been 
made void by your action. 

8. Charity which begins and ends at home is poor indeed. 

Rule 5 .—Adverbial clauses should usually be set off 
by commas, and always when transposed. 

Note. — An adverbial clause is transposed when it does not follow the 
clause on which it depends. 



92 



Punctuate : 



1. Good deeds though they maybe forgotten are not lost. 

2. If we can make these arrangements I shall consider the 
matter settled. 

3. The reader should as he proceeds make notes of new 
ideas. 

4. When you can make it convenient to come I shall be 
prepared to receive you. 

5. I will when I next visit your city call and settle the 
matter. 

6. If you have no enemies it is a sign that Fortune has 
forgotten you. 

Rule 6— Transposed phrases should be set off by 

commas. 

Note. — A phrase is transposed when it does not follow the word on 
which it depends. 

Punctuate : 

1. I can not in the natural order of events expect a change 
for the better. 

2. To speak plainly I think you inefficient. 

3. A man in order to succeed must have patience industry 
and intelligence. 

4. To the man of patience all things must come in time. 

5. With this end in view I lay the proposition before you. 

Rule 7. —When a common verb is used in one 
part of a sentence and omitted in another, the 

omission is marked by a comma. 

Punctuate : 

1. Industry brings happiness ; indolence misery. 

2. Youth is the flower upon the tree ; age the ripe fruit of 
maturity. ' . 

3. John studies arithmetic; Mary algebra; Jennie geom- 

etry. 

4. Your words I find disagreeable ; your manner intoler- 
able. , „ 

5. Butter is worth thirty-five cents per pound ; flour five 
dollars per barrel ; eggs twenty cents per dozen. 

R u l e g _ Absolute expressions should be set off by 

commas. 

Punctuate : 

1. We looked our eyes aflame with wonder and saw the 
cloud envelop him. 



93 



2. The matter once started we had no difficulty in push- 
ing it. 

3. We must your terms being so unsatisfactory decline to 
negotiate with you. 

4. Knaves falling out honest men get what belongs to 
them. 

Rule 9.— Words meaning the same thing, con- 

nected by "ov 9 " take a comma after each. 

Punctuate : 

1. Your habit of procrastinating or putting off will unfit 
you for business. 

2. This is a dependent or subordinate proposition. 

3. The mocking bird imitates or mocks all other birds. 

4. The cranium or skull protects the brain. 

Rule 10.— Members of a compound sentence, when 
elosely Connected in meaning, should be separated by 
commas. 

Note^ — When the connective is not used, the sentence is broken up into 
short members, which are usually separated by semicolons. 

Example. — The ungrateful man cannot prize thy favors ; the talkative 
man cannot keep thy counsel; the coward cannot vindicate thy honor. 

Punctuate : 

1. Virtues all agree but vices are always at war. 

2. Be always on the side of caution but do not allow 
extreme caution to override progress. 

3. You have worked well and your diligence merits a 
reward. 

4. I make application for the position and I promise 
unceasing regard for your interests. 

5. Proud looks lose hearts but courteous words win them. 

Rule 11.— A comma should precede a direct quota- 
tion, when it is short or very closely connected with what 
precedes it. 

Note. — Long and formal quotations should be preceded by a colon. 
See rules for colons. 

Punctuate : 

1. I say unto you "Be of good cheer." 

2. His motto was "Speak evil of none." 

3. Said Mr. Channing speaking of a sermon by Dr. Chal- 
mers " We have no preaching like that in England." 

Rule 12.— Expressions that are contrasted should be 
separated by commas. 



94 



Punctuate : 

1. He is poor in earthly possessions but rich in heavenly 
belongings. 

2. We should cultivate purity of heart not superficial good- 
ness. 

3. He was a careful thinker but a poor talker. 

4. We will yield to right not might. 

5. He is small in stature but a giant in intellect. 

Rule 13.— Words repeated for emphasis should 
be separated by commas. 
Punctuate : 

1. Truly truly this is a wonder. 

2. Verily verily I say unto you. 

3. He has gone to a far far country. 

Rule 14.— Introductory adverbs should be set off by 
commas. 

Punctuate : 

1. Why what is the matter? 

2. Well you see I had no choice in the matter. 

3. Again there are many things to be considered. 

4. Besides that is contrary to all my plans. 

5. Now in those days murder was common. 

Rule IS.— Parenthetical expressions should be set 
off by commas. 

Note. — Parenthetical expressions are those which are not essential to 
the meaning of a sentence, and are thrown in for emphasis or for expla- 
nation. 

The principal parenthetical expressions are — 

Indeed, too (meaning also), then, hence, consequently, namely, 
finally, perhaps, therefore, moreover, in truth, in short, in fact, in the 
meantime, of course, as it were, without doubt, as it seems, in the first 
place, after all. 

Punctuate : 

1. No nation in short is free from danger. 

2. You must however consider the matter well. 

3. The meeting was after all a success. 

4. He is indeed a good man. 

5. He seems as it were always ready for conflict. 
(>. You too have erred in the matter. 

7. My plans are of course known to you. 

8. This is in the first place a wrong time to begin opera- 
tions. 



95 



9. Conversation with him is in fact a mental tonic to me 
10. Now then why do you hesitate? 



THE SEMICOLON. 

The Semicolon marks a division of a sentence somewhat 
longer than that marked bj r a comma. 

Rule l.—The main divisions of a sentence should 
be separated by a semicolon, when they themselves have 
been subdivided by commas. 

Punctuate : 

1. The path of life which to many is thorny is to a good 
woman strewn with flowers but they rise behind her steps 
not before them being but the springing into life of her own 
good deeds. 

2. In winter when snow falls the temperature of the ground 
is seldom below freezing-point for where the snow lies the 
ground is kept warm by it. 

3. Keep off the first emotion of passion for if you cannot 
resist the first you are in danger of being overcome by it in 
the end. 

Rule 2.— When the members of a sentence are complete 

and entirely independent in meaning, they 

should be separated by semicolons, especially if the con- 
nective be omitted. 

Punctuate : 

1. The most beautiful pictures were never painted the 
most enchanting songs were never sung they have existed 
only in the mind of the artist. 

2. Our midnight is Thy smile withdrawn our noontide is 
Thy gracious dawn our rainbow is Thy mercy's sign all 
but the clouds of sin are Thine. 

3. A wise man is a great monarch he has an empire in 
himself his reason controls both throne and sceptre. 

4. She presses her child to her heart she drowns it in her 
tears her fancy catches the sweetest music. 

Rule 3. — A semicolon should be placed before as, 
namely, vi%., to Wit, when u&ed to introduce an 
illustration or example. 



96 



In cases of this kind, a comma should follow "as," 
"namely," &c. 

Punctuate : 

1. Some writers divide the history of the world into four 
ages namely the golden age the silver age the bronze age 
and the iron age. 

2. A noun is the name of something as birds flowers trees. 

3. There are three necessary elements to success to wit 
industry honesty sobriety. 

Rule 4.— When several grammatical expressions of the same 
construction follow each other in a series, all depending on 
the same clause, they should be separated from each other 
by semicolons, and from the clause on which they all depend, 
by a comma. 

Punctuate : 

1. That Nature is a bountiful mother that she is always 
ready to bestow good gifts upon her children that those 
who know her best will love her most our every day life 
teaches. 

2. The Holy Spirit is the embodiment of wisdom against 
folly of quickness of apprehension against dullness faithful- 
ness of memory against forgetfulness fortitude against fear 
knowledge against ignorance piety against profaneness 
humility against pride. 

THE COLON. 

The Colon marks the use of a pause more nearly complete 
than that marked by the semicolon. 

Rule 1.— A colon should be used before a direct quo- 
tation, which is (1) long, or (2) which is preceded by 
such words as "thus," "as follows," or any word which 
seems to be in apposition with the whole quotation. 

Punctuate : 

1. He spoke as follows Listen to me I am not guilty and I 
will suffer no imputation of guilt. 

2. In one of Plato's lectures he made this remark True 
philosophy consists more in fidelity constancy justice sin- 
cerity and the love of duty than in a great capacity. 



97 

3. The last words of Jackson were these Let us pass over 
the river and rest under the shade of the trees. 

4. He spoke thus I do not fear death and your tortures 
shall only precipitate me into the enjoyments of heaven. 

5. At the close of the meeting the President arose and said 
Ladies and gentlemen in making the closing remarks of the 
evening I wish to express to you, &c. 

6. Be this my answer to you Remember this day remem- 
ber no blood can wash out its injuries. 

Rule 2.— The main divisions of a long sentence 

should be separated by a colon, if they themselves are sub- 
divided by a semicolon. 

Punctuate : 

Both parties deprecated war but one of them would make 
war rather than let the nation survive and the other would 
accept war rather than let it perish and the war came. 



THE PERIOD. 

The Period marks the end of the sentence. 
Rule 1.— A period should be used at the end of declar- 
ative and imperative sentences. 

Note. — An imperative sentence that expresses very strong emotion 
may be followed by an exclamation point. 

Punctuate : 

1. Be ready when I call 

2. Your words have confirmed my worst fears 

3. This man is incapable 

4. Let no one consider himself happy until death 

Rule 2.— A period is used after abbreviations and 
Homan numbers. 

Examples.— U. S., Mr., Col., Rev. Jas. Myer, D. D., Chas. 
IX., Rom., Chap, vi., v. 8. 

Rule 3.— A period should be placed before decimal num- 
bers, and between the denominations of United States 
money. 

Examples.— $25.60 ; .657 ; The fraction % is indicated deci- 
mally by .25. 



98 
THE EXCLAMATION. 

The Exclamation Point is used to indicate strong emo- 
tion. 

Examples. — Shame upon you! Mercy! mercy! "Arm! 
arm ! it is — it is the cannon's opening roar!" 

Rule 1. — The exclamation should not be used immediately 
after interjections that are closely connected with other 
words, but should come at the end of the whole expression. 

Note. — The single letter O never takes anything but a comma after it, 
the exclamation coming at the end of the whole expression. When used 
with a noun of address, it takes no mark immediately after it. 

Punctuate : 

1. Alas poor Yorick 

2. All hail sovereign of our hearts 

3. O popular applause what emptiness art thou 

4. Oh that 1 could crush him 

THE INTERROGATION. 

The Interrogation Point is used to denote a question. 
Rule 1— Every direct question should be followed by 
the interrogation point. 

Punctuate : 

1. Where is now thy heritage 

2. Can a man lay a better foundation than a noble life 

3. Why is not this sufficient 

4. Who has clone the dastardly deed 

Rule 2.— The interrogation point should be used after 
each part of a sentence or each expression that indicates a 
separate question. 

Punctuate : 

1. Shall the end be gained by deception by force by theft 
by murder 

2. Has God forgotten us is his ear deaf to our cries and is 
his mercy clean gone forever 

THE DASH. 

Rule 1— The dash is used to mark a sudden OV 
abrupt tum in the meaning, or where the sentence is 
broken off before its close. 



99 

Punctuate : 

1. She never followed wicked ways except when she was 
sinning. 

2. If thon art my child but oh how changed ! 

3. "I know how to make bread" cried Alice "you take 
some flour" "Where do you pick the flower" the Queen 
interrupted. 

4. Ward has a heart and gets his speeches by it. 

Rule 2.—JPartH Of a dialogue should be separated by 

dashes, if not on different lines. 

Example. — "Was the prisoner known to you before the 
murder? " — " He was." — " Favorably ? "— " Yes, very." 

Rule 3.— The dash denotes the Omission of letters 

and figures. 

Example. — In the year 18 — , I spent much of my time in the 
little town of H . 

Rule 4.— When a title or heading is put on the same 

line as the beginning of the narrative,- it is separated from 

it by a dash. 

If the author's name appears at the end of the paragraph, 
and on the same line, it is separated by a dash. 

Example. — Fidelity to God. — Whatever station or rank 
Thou shaft assign me, I will die ten thousand deaths sooner 
than abandon it.— Socrates. 

Rule 5.— The dash is used to denote a Summing up of 

particulars. 

Example.— He is handsome, courageous, vivacious, mag- 
netic—everything that could be desired. 

MARKS OF PARENTHESIS. 

The Parenthesis is used to enclose words thrown into 
a sentence for emphasis or explanation, but 

having little or no connection with the rest of the sentence. 

Punctuate : 

1. His words ho w true they were sank deep into our hearts. 

2. This day of fate oh how I tremble decides for weal or 
woe my future destiny. 



100 



3. Meter Greek metron is the arrangement into verse of 
definitely accented syllables. 

4. Know then this truth enough for man to know that 
virtue alone is happiness below. 

5. He came yes I know it appears strange to you seeking 
for some remnant some memorial of the past. 

HYPHEN. 

Rule 1. — The hyphen is used to connect the parts of com- 
pound words. 

Examples.— Scissors-grinder, never-to-be-forgotten day, 
window-glass. 

Rule 2.— The hyphen is used to divide words into sylla- 
bles, and at the end of a line, to carry over to the next line 
an unfinished word. 

Note. — Be sure never to divide a syllable. 

Examples. — Con-sti-tu-tion. I live in the city of Rich- 
mond, on the James. 

THE APOSTROPHE. 

Rule 1.— The apostrophe is used ts> denote the possessive 
case of nouns and the omission of a letter or letters from a 
word. 

' Note 1. — Singular nouns and plural nouns not ending in s form their 
possessives by adding the apostrophe and s. When the plural ends in g 
the apostrophe alone is used. 

Examples.— Boy's, men's, child's, boys', ladies'. 

Note 2* — Letters, figures, marks and signs form their plurals by add- 
ing 's. 

Examples.— T's ; 2's; f's. 

Punctuate : 

1. Tis midnight hour. 

2. He ne er returned. 

3. The childs hat. 

4. Thechildrens hats. 

5. The boys games. 
G. The ladies dresses. 

7. The mens opinions. 

8. Be on your p s and q s. 

9. Everything is at 6 s and 7 s. 

10. Dot your i s and cross your t s. 



101 

QUOTATION MARKS. 

Rule 1.— Quotation marks are used in direct dis- 
course; that is, when the exact words of a person are 
given. 

Example. — He said, "I admire your bravery." 

Note. — When the exact words of the speaker are not used, no quota- 
tion marks should be used. This is called Indirect Discourse. 

Examples. — Direct Discourse. He said, "Why do you weep? 
Can I not help you? " Indirect Discourse. He asked me why 
I wept, and wanted to know if he could not help me. 

Rule 2— A quotation ivithin a quotation is indi- 
cated by single quotation marks. 

Example. — Turning, he cried, " Let us follow the man who 
has said, ' I yield to no foe.' " 

Rule 3.— When a quotation is broken by words 
thrown in parenthetically, each part of the quota- 
tion should be enclosed in quotation marks. 

Examples. — 1. "You are my truest friend," he cried; "and 
death alone shall separate us!" 2. "This man whose memoirs 
I have written," says Xenophon, "was so pious that he 
would undertake nothing without asking the counsels of 
the gods." 

OTHER MARKS. 

Other marks used in printing are— 

1. The Brackets, used to correct an error or to enclose 
words that are explanatory of what precedes them. 

Examples. — I seen [saw] the force of his remark. 

2. The Brace, used to connect several items under a 
common head. 



f R. ] 
[ W. 



Langley, 
Committee. { R. Smith, 
Green. 

3. Harks of reference ; as, the Obelisk, or Dagger 
(f), the Double Dagger ($), the Section (§),the Par- 



102 



allels(\\), the Paragraph (11), the Asterisk (*), refer 
to notes in the margin or at the bottom of the page. 

4. Several asterisks (****) or a long dash ( ) denote 

the intentional omission of letters, words or sentences. 

Examples.-— 1. Mr. h**** is now living in the town of 

B . 2. Said Confucius : " The doctrines I teach are those 

transmitted to us by our ancestors. ****** They 
are unchangeable. Heaven itself is their author." 

5. The Index (8^) directs special attention to a pas- 
sage. 

Example, -g^ 3 Terms cash. 

6. The DieresiS ["] places in separate syllables letters 
that otherwise would form a diphthong; as, aeriform. 

7. Ditto Marks ( ") indicate a repetition of the words 

above. 

Example.- 8 bbls. flour at $5 $40. 

2 " " " " $10. 

8. Leaders are dots used to carry the eye from words 

at the beginning of a line to words at the end of a line. 

Example.— Analysis page 12. 

Synthesis page 20. 

Examples for Practice. 

Punctuate the following sentences, and give the rules that 
apply: 

1. The sword said Mohammed is the key of heaven and 
hell. 

2. Horatio Nelson the most celebrated of British naval 
commanders was rather diminutive in person. 

3. I see in your industry young man an augury of future 
success. 

4. His language always fluent beautiful and figurative 
was delivered with the greatest force and animation. 

5. His motto I will try has helped him to many a suc- 
cess. 

6. Says Seneca To the man who says I can and 1 will all 
things are possible. 

7. Man in order that he may become wise must first 
acknowledge himself a fool. 

8. You have not crossed your t s and dotted your i s. 



103 



9. It is best to be courteous to all but intimate with few. 

10. The country at large responded with one voice to this 
sentiment Millions for defence but not one cent for tribute. 

11. He hath showed thee O man what is good and what 
doth the Lord require of thee but to do justly to love mercy 
to walk humbly with thy God 

12. Nature bids me hate all things that hurt me reason 
bids me hate those that envy me religion bids me love all 
hate none and overcome evil with good. 

13. It is in fact he who thinks least who talks most. 

14. When men will not be reasoned out of a vanity they 
must be ridiculed out of it. 

15. Alas those evening bells 

16. The Dutch have a good proverb Thefts never enrich 
alms never impoverish prayers never hinder work. 

17. Peace nourishes where justice governs true joy where 
unselfishness directs. 

18. Is this my portion of glory my merited greatness my 
richness of power 

19. There are four good mothers of whom are often born 
four unhappy daughters truth begets hatred prosperity 
pride security danger familiarity contempt. 

20. J D Langdon LL D has served a term in the U S Con- 



21. Tis now childrens hour when ladies and gentlemens 
pleasure must yield to the boys and girls sports. 

22. One man is proud of his wealth another of his family 
another of his intellect. 

23. Where shall happiness be found in wealth in pleasure 
in business in vanity 

24. The senator from Virginia Mr. Daniel then rose to 
speak. 

25. Allow me to introduce to you the bearer of this Mr. 
Jos. Allen who is one of our largest lumber dealers. 

26. Receive my thanks dear friend for your kindness. 

27. Milton wholly blind and Beethoven wholly deaf enjoyed 
visions and music more glorious than most men are capa- 
ble of. 

28. Yet come it will the day decreed by Fates 

How my heart trembles while my tongue relates 
The day when thou imperial Troy must bend 
And see thy glories fall thy wonders end. 

29. These were his closing words Gentlemen I have already 
detained you too long and I will not further trespass cries 
of go on go on upon your patience No gentlemen I cannot 
go on now and I close by bidding you goodnight prolonged 
cheers during which the speaker retired. 

30. A friend cannot be known in prosperity and an enemy 
cannot be hidden in adversity. 



104 



31. Most vices choose to remain in the dark pride alone 
loves to be seen in the light. 

32. In the debate which followed Patrick Henry exclaimed 
in tones of thunder Caesar had his Brutus Charles the First 
his Cromwell and George the Third Treason cried the 
Speaker Treason treason echoed from every part of the 
house Henry faltered not a moment Taking a loftier atti- 
tude and fixing on the Speaker an eye of fire he finished his 
sentence may profit by their example If this be treason 
make the most of it. 

33. The minister who was with Gen Morgan of Revolu- 
tionary fame during his last moments relates this Gen 
Morgans last days were passed in Winchester While sink- 
ing to the grave he exclaimed People thought that Daniel 
Morgan never prayed people said old Morgan was never 
afraid people did not know. 



SMfiUM. 



106 



DEFINITIONS. 

Alphabet.— The letters of a language. 

Consonant. — A sound of the human voice, modified by the 
lips, teeth or tongue. 

Vowel. — An uninterrupted sound of the human voice. 

Suffix. —A syllable added at the end of a word ; as, clean ly, 
love ly. 

Prefix.— A syllable added at the beginning of a word ; as, 
un fit, dis own. 

Word. — The sign of an idea. 

Primitive.— Not derived from any other word; as, see, 
sliow. 

Derivative.— Derived from another word ; as, sweetly, from 
sweet. 

Monosyllable. — A word of one syllable; as, man, book. 

Dissyllable. — A word of two syllables ; as, di vest, un bar. 

Trisyllable. — A word of three syllables ; as, dis re spect, 
unfore seen. 

Polysyllable. — A word of more than three syllables ; as, 
cir cum nav % ga tion. 

Accent. — Stress of the voice on certain syllables ; as, 
man'sige. 

Diphthong.— Union of two vowel sounds in one syllable ; 
as, now, hoist. 

Vowels. 

The vowels are a, e, i, o, u, and y, when y has the sounds 
ofi. 

Consonants. 

The consonants embrace all the letters of the alphabet 
except the vowels. 

Key to Pronunciation. 

a as in mate. i' as in machine, 

a as in mat. o as in no. 

a as in far. 6 as in n6t. 

a as in care. 6 as in for. 

e as in me. u as in use. 

e" as in met. u as in but. 

I as in tie. a as in tarn. 

I as in sit. c as in cease. 



107 

SPELLING, 
DBFUUTIOHS 

AND 

IMPORTANT RULES. 



RULE 1,— Dropping Silent e. 

Silent e at the end of a word should be dropped when a 
suffix beginning with a vowel sound is added. 
Examples. Love — able, lovable. Come — ing, coming. 

Exceptions. — The following words do not drop the e: Dye, dye' ing; hoe, 
hoe' ing ; shoe, shoe' ing ; toe, toe' ing ; singe, singe' ing ; tinge, tinge' ing ; 
mile, mile' age ; mort' gage, mort' gage or. 



Words ending in ee do not drop the e on taking 
as, see, seeing. 

LESSON l.-Dropping Silent e. 

Add ing to the following words : 



a suffix 



fire 


hope 


gore 


mope 


pine 


wire 


save 


make 


bite 


dote 


rise 


judge 


prove 


come 


poke 


vaF ue 


bide 


bribe 


take 


cope 


love 


pur sue' 


time 


strike 


wage 


dive 


hate 


shape 


piece 


prize 


singe 


tinge 


slope 


tune 


toe 


hoe 


dine 


muse 


dye 


shoe 


slice 


guide 


write 


rage 


fuse 


smite 


spite 


fringe 


pace 


wave 


strive 


fume 


cane 


rate 


pipe 


have 


race 


date 


piile 


tone 


see 


spree 


care 


rove 


fore see' 


ra zee' 



108 



Rule 2.- Retaining Silent e after soft c and 

soft g. 

Words ending in ce and ge, with the soft sounds of c and 
g, retain the silent e before the suffixes able, ably and 
oris. 

LESSON 2.-Retaining Silent e, 



al lege' a ble 
ad van ta' geous 
change' a ble 
charge" a ble 
char lenge a ble 
pro nounce' a ble 



cou ra' geous 
di vorce' a ble 
dam' age a ble 
ex change' a ble 
en force 7 a ble 
ser' vice a ble 



man' age a ble 
mar' riage a ble 
no' tice a ble 
out ra' geous 
pierce' a ble. 
peace' a ble 



Rule 3.— Retaining Final e before a Consonant. 

Silent e at the end of a word is not usually dropped when 
a suffix beginning with a Consonant is added. 

Exceptions. — The following words drop the e: Awe, aw' ful 
true, tru' ly ; due, du' ly ; ar' gue, ar' gu ment ; lodge, lodg' ment ; nurse 
nurs' ling; judge, judg' ment; ac knowl' edg ment; pre judg' ment 
ad judg' ment ; a bridg' ment. 

LESSON 3.— Retaining Final e. 

Add the suffixes to the primitive words, and spell the 
derivative words. 



loose — ness 
a base'— ment 
a bridge'— ment 
hate — ful 
taste — less 
home — less 
spite — ful 
love — ly 
ripe — ness 
prone — ness 
care— ful 
true — ly 
shame — ful 
loose — ness 



hope — less 

safe— ly 

pur' pose— ly 

grace — ful 

post pone'— ment 

wake— ful 

rare— ness 

judge— ment 

blame — less 

ad ver tise' — ment 

awe — ful 

re venge' — ful 

gen' tie — ness 

voice— less 



use— less 
loose — ly 
dole— ful 
some — what 
ar' gue — ment 
shame — less 
a cute' 



coarse — ness 
use— ful 

trou' ble— some 
nurse — ling 
grace — less 
sim' pie — ton 



Rule 4— Doubling the Final Consonant. 

Monosyllables and words accented on the last syllable, 



109 



ending in a single consonant preceded by a single vowel, 
double this final consonant when a suffix beginning with 
a vowel is added. 

Exceptions. — The following words do not follow the rule, on account 
of the accent being thrown back on another syllable : De fer', def er ence ; 
in fer', in' fer ence ; con fer', con' fer ence ; re fer', ref er ence ; ca bal', 
cab' a list, cab' a lism. 

LESSON 4.-Doubling the Final Consonant. 

Add ing and ed to each of the following words, except those 
in italics, which do not add ed : 



trip 


step 


pen 


hop 


per mit' 


con trol' 


slit 


war 


map 


wag 


for get' 


sub mit' 


flit 


pin 


drop 


bat 


un bar' 


un pin' 


brag 


dip 


cut 


bar 


ex eel' 


de bar' 


scan 


let 


sap 


scar 


befit' 


al lot' 


chat 


drip 


bid 


pat 


re mit' 


ad mit' 


lug 


wag 


run 


tip 


oc cur' 


pre fer' 


job 


sip 


put 


ship 


com pel' 


de fer' 


cram 


sob 


throb 


mar 


un ship' 


pro pel' 


sham 


shop 


rob 


tag 


pa trot' 


con cur' 






LESSON 5. 







1. Add ing to the following words. 

2. Notice carefully the endings and the accents. 



sate 


de sire' 


sup 


in trust' 


pro tect' 


gos' sip 


stun 


shut 


soak 


de fer' 


be get' 


wor' ship 


lose 


climb 


m5p 


push 


im pel' 


trans fer' 


in cur' 


con ceal' 


share 


give 


ex tend' 


mas' ter 


re peal' 


con fer' 


seat 


re cur' 


cor reef 


wan' der. 



Rule 5,— Changing y to i. 

Rule 1. When y is preceded by a consonant, it is 
changed into i 9 when adding a suffix not beginning with i. 

If the suffix begins with i, y is unchanged, to prevent the 
doubling of the i. 

2. When y is preceded by a vowel, it is not changed. 

Exceptions. — The following words are exceptions to the rule : Shv, 
shy' ly, shy' ness, shy' er, shy' est ; dry, dry' ly, dry' ness ; sly, sly' ly, 
sly' ness, sly' er, sly' est; spry, spry' er, spry' est ; wry, wry' ness. 



110 



LESSON 6.— Y Changed and Unchanged, 



Spell the plurals. 


Add ing and ed. 


git' y 


bod' y 


hur' ry 


try 


par' ty 


prod' i gy pit' y 


buoy 


dai' sy 


chirn' ney de ny' 


an noy' 


val' ley 


pig' my 


al loy' 


defy' 


mon' key 


drap' er 


y fan' cy 


pal' sy 


bul'ly 


row' dy 


car' ry 


de stroy' 


tro' phy 


pul' ley 


quar' ry 


de cay' 


boo' by 


fol' ly 


es say' 


jus' ti fy 


or' gy 


kid' ney 


de coy' 


de fray' 


quar' ry 


al' ley 


de' i fy 


de scry' 


lack' ey 


mer' cy 


fer' ry 


stir vey' 


fai' ry 


al'ly 


con vey' 


sul' ly 


don' key 


gal' ley 


jour' ney 


as say' 


ab' bey 


char' i ty enjoy' 


lev'y 


tur' key 


nifid' ley 


que' ry 


tar' ry 


at tor' ney 


jour' ney wor' ry 


ar ray' 


pop' py 


dai' ry 


va' ry 


com ply' 


gip' sy 


cov' ey 


cop' y 


em ploy'. 


LESSON 7.— Common Words Often Misspelled. 


an'y 


been 


un til' whole 


wheth' er 


ver' y 


bus' y 


nei' ther through cor reef 


whose 


al most' 


heard fifth 


sal' a ry 


much 


please 


al read' y ninth 


sep' a rate 


touch 


tru' ly 


dai' ly o blige 


' c51' lege 


man' y 


a cross' 


al though' to' tal 


priv' i lege 


which 


al' ways 


a gainst' cer' tain spec' i men 


a gain' 


where 


ex pense' eighth 


wher ev' er 


here by' 


ei' ther 


commence' speech 


be neath' 


LESSON 8.— Masculine and Feminine Forms. 


Mas. 


Fern. 


Mas. 


Fern. 


mas' ter 


mis' tress 


li' on 


li' on ess 


prince 


prin' cess 


Fran' cis 


Fran' ces 


trai' tor 


trai' tress 


bar' on 


bar' on ess 


heir 


heir' ess 


land' lord 


land' la dy 


ne' gr< > 


ne' gress 


priest 


priest' ess 


he' ro 


hfi' ro Ine 


pre cep' tor 


pre cep' tress 


neph' ew 


niece 


Jo' seph 


Jo' seph ine 


ti' ger 


ti' gress 


ad ministra' tor 


ad min is tra' tr 


host 


host' ess 


ex ec' u tor 


ex ec' u trix, 



Ill 



LESSON 9.— Months, Days and Seasons. 

1. Names of months and days should be written with cap- 
itals. 

2. Names of seasons should be written with small letters. 



Jan / u a 


ry, 


Jan. 


Sep tern' ber, 


Sept. 


Thurs' day, 


Thurs, 


Feb / ru a 


rj> 


', Feb. 


Oc to' ber, 


Oct. 


Fri' day, 


Fri. 


March, 




Mar. 


No vera' ber, 


Nov. 


Sat' ur day, 


Sat. 


A' pril, 




Apr. 


De cem' ber, 


Dec. 


spring, 




May, 




May. 


Sun' day, 


Sun. 


sum' mer, 




June, 




June. 


Mon' day, 


Mon. 


Jau' tumn, 




July', 




Jul. 


Tues' day, 


Tues. 


\fall, 




Au' gust, 




Aug. 


Wed' nes day 


, Wed. 


win' ter. 






LESSON lO.-Names I 


)escri 


bin? Men, 





breth' ren, members of the same 
society or church. 

boor, a rude and ignorant person. 

brig' and, a highway robber. 

beau, a lady's attendant. 

bach' e lor, a man who has never 
been married. 

Ben' e diet, a man newly married. 

chap' lain, a minister in the army. 

cod' ger, a covetous or mean per- 
son. 

dan' dy, a fop. 

ef fern' i nate, soft or delicate to 
an unmanly degree. 

fo' gy, a person behind the times. 

game' ster, a gambler. 

knave, a rascal. 

knight, a military attendant. 



lex i cog' ra pher, author or com- 
piler of a dictionary. 

man' nish, masculine ; like a man. 

man' ly, noble ; brave ; dignified. 

Mes' sieurs, Sirs ; French plural of 
Mister. 

pol troon', a coward. 

pi' rate, a robber on the high seas. 

pu' gil ist, one who fights with his 
fists. 

pas' tor, a minister of the gospel. 

Pope, the head of the Roman Cath- 
olic church. 

swain, a country lover. 

wid' ow er, a man who has lost 
his wife. 

vag' a bond, one who has no set- 
tled dwelling place ; a vagrant. 





LESSON 11. 


—Household } 


Words 


sieve 


cur' tain 


kef tie 


skim' mer 


ba' sin 


scut' tie 


car' pet 


ma chine' 


sau' cer 


mir' ror 


grat' er 


<5t a gere' 


so' fa 


la' die 


bu' reau 


conn' ter pane 


di van' 


or' gan 


tu reen' 


lam'bre quin 


pi' a' no 


tow' el 


bed' stead 


re frig' er a tor 


shov' el 


clos' et 


pict' ure 


cus' pa dore 


man' tel 


cush' ion 


pil' low 


grid' i run, 



112 



LESSON 12.— Names Describing Women. 



belle, a much-admired lady. 

CO quette' (co kef), a woman who 

is vain and trifling in love affairs. 
dam' sel, a young girl. 
dour' a ger, title of a widow of 

rank in England. 
flame, a settled lady. 
duch' ess, wife of a duke. 
en chant' ress, a woman who 

enchants. 
god' dess, a female god. 
gov' ern ess, a female teacher in a 

family. 



in fan' ta, a princess of the royal 
blood in Spain or Portugal. 

ma' tron, an elderlv woman. 

ma ter' nal, motherly. 

mad' am, a form of address to a 
married or an elderly woman. 

si' ren, a fascinating woman. 

ter' ma gant, a scolding woman. 

vi ra' go, a quarrelsome woman. 

wid' ow, a woman whose husband 
is dead. 

Xan tip' pe, (Zan), wife of Soc- 
rates ; a scolding woman. 



LESSON 13.-Names of Trees. 



elm 


birch 


larch 


hem 7 lock 


oak 


cy 7 press 


par 7 a dise 


wil 7 low 


spruce 


hick 7 o ry 


ce 7 dar 


lau 7 rel 


pine 


ban 7 ian 


lo 7 cust 


chest 7 nut 


al 7 der 


lin 7 den 


as 7 pen 


a ca 7 ci a 


ma 7 pie 


pop 7 lar 


mag no 7 lia 


per sim 7 mon 


myr / tie 


yew 


ju 7 ni per 


syc 7 a more 


beech 


u 7 pas 


wal 7 nut 


mul 7 ber ry. 



LESSON 14— Names Given to Persons. 



an' ces tor, a forefather. 

ad' ver sa ry, one who is hostile. 

ap' pli cant, one who applies. 

bra nette', a person of dark com- 
plexion. 

blonde, a person of very light 
complexion. 

c i vil' ian, one whose pursuits are 
those of civil life. 

con tern' po ra ry, one who lives 
at the same time with another. 

cyn' ic, a morose, snarling person. 

com' rade, a companion. 

de scend' ant, one who is de- 
scended from another. 

e ques' tri an, a horseman. 

fa nat' ic, one who is extremely 
enthusiastic in a cause. 

fu' gi tive, one who is fleeing ; a 
runaway. 



in cum' bent, one who is in pos- 
session of an office. 

klep to ma' ni ac, a person 
afflicted with a desire to steal 
small things. 

mi' nor, one who is not of age. 

men' tor, a wise and faithful coun- 
selor. 

nov' ice, a beginner. 

ne' o phyte, a new convert. 

mar' tyr, one who suffers in a 
cause. 

mon o ma' ni ao, a person de- 
ranged on one idea. 

or' phan, a child bereaved of 
father and mother. 

op po' nent, one who opposes. 

oc' CU pant, one who is occupying. 

prog' e ny, offspring ; descendants. 

pe des' tri an, a foot-traveler. 



113 



guard' ian, one who has charge 

of the property or person of a 

minor. 
her' mit, one who lives in solitude 

from religions motives. 
hy po chon dri ao, a person 

afflicted with melancholy. 
in di vid' u al, a person. 
in haV i tant, one who dwells in 

a place. 



re cluse', one who lives retired 

from the world. 
ri' val, one competing for the same 

object as another. 
re' gent, one who rules for the 

sovereign. 
som nam bu list, one who walks 

in his sleep. 
zeal' ot* one who engages warmly 

in any cause. 



LESSON 15.— Relating to Beauty and Ugliness, 



beau 7 ti ful 
come' li ness 
love 7 li ness 
dec o ra 7 tion 

ornamental 



el 7 e gance 
fin 7 er y 
hid 7 e ous 
nor 7 rid 
home 7 li ness 



fright 7 ful 
mon 7 strous 
plain 7 ness 
gh&st 7 ly 
pret 7 ti ness 



de form 7 i ty 
re pul 7 sive 
ug 7 li ness 
re pel 7 lent 
gris 7 ly. 



LESSON 16.— Relating to Pain and Pleasure. 



ag' o ny 
an 7 guish 
an noy 7 ance 
sor 7 row ful 
mis 7 er y 



dejec 7 tion 
dis tress 7 
vex a 7 tion 
tor 7 ment 
tor' ture 



trib u la 7 tion 
com 7 fort 
de light 7 
hap 7 pi ness 
enjoy 7 ment 



grat i fi ca 7 tion 
rapt 7 ure 
ec 7 sta sy 
sat is fac 7 tion 
fe lie 7 i ty. 



LESSON 17.— Relating to Fun and Gayety. 



blithe' some, gay ; merry. 
pom.' ic, relating to merriment. 
droll' er y, queer, funny merriment. 
fa ce' tious, given to wit and good 

humor. 
firol' ic some, full of frolic. 
hn' mor ons, exciting laughter. 
hi lar' i ty, a high state of mirth. 
joe' n lar, given to jesting. 
joFli ty, noisy mirth. 
jest' er, one who is given to jesting. 



jok' er, one who jokes. 
jo' vial ty, state of being jolly. 
laugh' a ble, exciting laughter. 
ludi crous, causing laughter. 
mer' ri ment, state of being merry. 
ri die 7 u Ions, exciting laughter 

mingled with some contempt. 
sport' ive, gay ; frolicsome. 
spright' ly, lively. 
vi va' cious, active; gay; merry. 
wit' ti cism, an attempt at wit. 



LESSON 18.— Articles of Commerce. 



p6r 7 ce lain 
c6ch 7 i neal 



pe tro 7 le um plat 7 i na 
gum &r 7 a bic In 7 di go 
cot 7 ton 6b 7 o ny 



rose 7 wood o 7 pi um 
ma hog 7 a ny sul 7 phur 



feath 7 ers 



cam 7 phor 



leath 7 er 
cop 7 per 
sas 7 sa fras 
in dia rub 7 ber 



sar sa pa ril 7 la 
guttapercha 
fur 7 ni ture 
sta 7 tion er y 
lo co mo 7 tives 
ma chin 7 er y. 



114 



LESSON 19-Relating to Flowers and Plants. 



am' a ranth, a never-fading flower. 

bou quet', a bunch of flowers. 

ca' lyx, the outer covering of a 
flower. 

chap' let, a wreath of flowers. 

de cid' u ous, having but a tem- 
porary existence. 

ed' i ble, capable of being eaten. 

fo' li age, the leaves of plants. 

fra' grant, sweet-smelling. 

Flo' ra, the goddess of flowers. 



hy' brid, a mixture of two species 
of plants. 

nose' gay, a bouquet of flowers. 

o' do rous, having a sweet odor. 

pet' al, the leaf of a flower. 

par terre', an ornamental arrange- 
ment of flower beds in a garden. 

scent, odor. 

sta' men, the part of a flower 
which contains the pollen. 

wreath, a garland of flowers. 



LESSON 20.— Derivatives. 

1. Ize and en mean to make. 

2. Give the definition of each derivative formed. 



Add ize. 



Add en. 



civ 7 il 


Chris' tian 


rough 


short 


mag' net 


scan" dal 


loose 


soft 


sat 7 ire 


mod' ern 


ripe 


straight 


vi' tal 


i'dol 


bright 


stiff 


neu' tral 


bru' tal 


cheap 


strait 


vo' cal 


spir' i tu al 


dark 


weak 


au' thor 


im mor' tal 


fast 


tight 


sym' bol 


fos' sil 


light 


hard. 




LESSON 21 .-L: 


ight and Darkness. 



brill' iant, sparkling ; shining. 

bur' nisbed, brightened ; polished. 

dark' some, gloom3' ; dark. 

dusk' y, tending to darkness. 

fog' gy, rendered dim by fog. 

glim' mer, to shine faintlj'. 

glar' ing, very bright. 

gair' isb. gaudy ; showy. 

baz' y, thick with haze. 

lu' mi nous, clear and shining. 

light' ning, a discharge of atmos- 
pheric electricity, accompanied 
by a flash of light. 



lus' trous, bright ; shining. 
lu' rid, ghastly pale ; gloomy. 
murk' y, dark ; obscure ; gloomy. 
neb' u lous, pertaining to a nebula. 

a faint, misty appearance among 

the stars. 
ob scare', darkened. 
ra' di ance, brilliancy. 
som' ber, dull ; gloomy ; dusky. 
Styg' i an, pertaining to Styx, a 

fabled river of hell, over which 

the dead passed ; infernally dark. 
tur' bid, thick and dark. 



LESSON 22.— Relating to Groceries. 



tea 

sug' ar 



co' coa 
starch 



mac a ro' 
va nil' la 



in 



horn' i ny 
sal er a' tus 



115 



cof fee 
cheese 
ba' con 
but' ter 
flour 
fir' kin 



syr up 
her' ring- 
mack' er el 
cay enne' 
mo las' ses 
all' spice 



pep' per 
choc' o late 
oat' meal 
yeast' cake 
vin' e gar 
pick' les 



rai' sins 
nius' tard 
buck' wheat 
spi' ces 
cin' na mon 
gel' a tine. 



LESSON 23.— Names of Fruits and Vegetables. 



pears 
peach' es 
ap' pies 
cur' rants 
or' an ges 
lem' ons 
plums 
quin' ces 
mel' ons 



grapes 
ap' ri cots 
ba na' nas 
rasp' ber ries 
tarn' a rinds 
dam' sons 
cit' rons 
kale 
eel' er y 



rhu' barb 
spin' age 
cab' bage 
tur' nips 
po ta' toes 
thyme 
to ma' toes 
cu' cum bers 
let' tuce 



cym' lings 
as par' a gus 
par' snips 
rad' ish es 
gher' kins 
beets 
on' ions 
car' rots 
pars' ley. 



LESSON 24.— Relating to Celebrations. 



an ni ver' sa ry, a day celebrated 
yearly. 

ban' quet , a rich entertainment. 

bar' be one, an entertainment in 
the open air, at which animals are 
roasted whole. 

cor o na' tion, act or ceremony of 
crowning a sovereign. 

cen ten' ni al, the hundredth anni- 
versary. 

car' ni val, a festival celebrated in 
Roman Catholic countries for a 
number of days before Lent. 

ea rous' al, a jovial feast. 

eel e bra' tion, act of honoring by 
ceremonies. 

oer f e mo ny, eternal forms. 

ex po si' tion, a public exhibition. 

fete (fate), a festival. 



fes' ti val, a time of feasting. 

feast, a rich repast. 

in aug u ra' tion, beginning of a 

movement. 
in stal la' tion, putting into office 

with ceremony. 
jol li fi ca' tion, noisy festivity 

and merriment. 
ju' bi lee, a season of great joy. 
mas' qner ade, an assembly of 

persons wearing masks. 
out' ing, a short pleasure trip. 
pa' geant, a spectacle of pompous 

exhibition. 
pic' nic, an excursion of pleasure 

into the country. 
pa rade',a display, usually military. 
pomp, a show of magnificence. 
rev' el ry, noisy festivity. 





LESSON 25.-: 


Nouns and V< 


erbs. 


Nouns. 


Verbs. 


Nouns. 


Verbs. 


cloth 

half 

food 

glass 

shelf 


clothe 
halve 
feed 
glaze 

shelve 


sub'ject 
rec' ord 
ex' tract 
prog' ress 
pres' ent 


sub ject' 
re cord' 
ex tract' 
pro gress' 
pre sent' 



116 



bath 


bathe 


con' filet 


con flict' 


grass 


graze 


di' gest 


di gest' 


gold 


gild 


trans' fer 


trans fer' 


blood 


bleed 


es' cort 


es corf 


con / trast 


con trast' 


reb' el 


re bel' 


im' port 


im port' 


in' cense 


in cense' 


rSf use 


re fuse' ■" 


in' suit 


in suit'. 



LESSON 26.-Relating to Time. 



an' nu al, occitrring every year. 
bi-month' ly, occurring every two 

months. 
"bi en' ni al, occurring- once in two 

years. 
chro nom' e ter, a time-keeper. 
cen' tu ry, a hundred years. 
di ur' nal, daily. 
di reef ly, immediately. 
dec' ade, ten years. 
di' al, face of a time piece. 
ev a nes' cent, fleeting; passing 

away quickly. 
• ter' nal, everlasting. 
e phem e ral, lasting for only a 



short time. 
im me' di ate ly, at once. 
in stan ta' ne ons, done in an in- 
stant. 
pres' ent ly, before long. 
per' ma nent, continuing withottt 

change. 
per en' ni al, lasting more than 

two years. 
semi-month' ly, twice every 

month. 
tern' po ral, pertaining to the 

present life or to this world. 
tern' po ra ry, lasting but a short 

time. 



LESSON 27.— Names of Birds. 



snipe 
plov' er 
con' dor 
cuck' oo 
ei' der 
fal' con 
I' bis 
rob' in 
6' ri ole 



hSif er 
sa' ble 
bi' son 
ze' bra 
of ter 
co' ney 
cou' gar 
er' mine 
f£r' ret 



ra' ven 
swal' low 
gross' beak 
grouse 
nal' cy on 
fla min' go 
vul' ture 
jack' daw 
spar' row 



mag' pie 
war' bier 
cas' so wa ry 
os' prey 
pel' i can 
pen' guin 
phSas' ant 
al' ba tross 
cor' mo rant 



LESSON 28.— Quadrupeds. 

badg' er pu r ma 

span' iel rein' deer 

ga zelle' 6 pos' sum 

gi raffe' roe' buck 

go' pher leop' ard 

go ril' la squir' rel 

hy e' na ter' ri er 

jag' u ar wea' sel 

chani' ols bab oon' 



bob' o link 
king' fish er 
tit' mouse 
top' knot 
trum' pet er 
night' in gale, 
whip' poor will 
chick' a dee 
ptar' mi gan. 



mas' tiff 
cat' a mount 
chin chil' la 
drom' e da ry 
el' e phant 
grey' hound 
kan ga roo' 
o rang' ou tang 
rhi noc' e ros. 



117 



LESSON 29.— Relating to Food and Taste, 



aT i ment, food. 

ac' id, sour. 

bit' ter ness, state of being bitter. 

bread' stuffs, meal; flour, &c 

COIl' di ment, seasoning ; a relish. 

co mes' ti bles, eatables 

en' li na ry, relating to the kitchen 

or to cooking. 
ce' re als, edible grains. 
de li' cious, delightful to the taste. 
des serf, pastry, fruit, &c, served 

at the close of a meal. 
ed' i ble, fit to be eaten. 
fla' vor, peculiar taste or odor. 
far i na' ceons, consisting of flour. 
glut' ton y, excessive eating. 
jui' cy, containing juice. 



lunch.' eon, food taken at irregular 

times. 
lus' cious, delicious. 
mas' ti cate, to chew, 
nan' se ous, causing sick stomach. 
nu' tri ment, nourishment ; food. 
nu tri' tious, causing nourishment. 
nour' isb. ment, food ; sustenance. 
pun' gent, biting ; piercing. 
pal' a ta ble, agreeable to the 

taste. 
pro vis' ions, stock of food, 
rav' en ous, hungry even to rage. 
spic' y, tasting of spice ; pungent. 
sa' vor y, pleasing to taste and 

smell. 
vict' uals, articles of food. 



LESSON 30.— Reptiles and Insects. 



Reptiles. 



Insects. 



an a con / da 


liz / ard 


bee' tie 


glow' worm 


al' li ga tor 


ser' pent 


but' ter fly 


grass' hop per 


cha me' le on 


tor' toise 


crick' et 


hon' ey bee 


croc 7 o dile 


tur' tie 


ear' wig 


ka' ty did 


sal' a man der 


vi' per 


nor' net 


mos qui'' to 


ter' ra pin 


co' bra 


lo' cust 


cat' er pil lar. 



LESSON 31. -Relating to Oratory. 



ar' gu ment, a process of reasoning. 

de bate', a contention to prove a 
point. 

dis tinct' ness, state of being dis- 
tinct. 

de clam a' tion, a set speech. 

e nun ci a' Hon, mode of pronun- 
ciation. 

el' o quence, expression of strong 
emotion so as to excite the^ same 
feeling in others. 

el O cu' tion ist, one who is versed 
in elocution. 

em phat' ic, with force. 

ex tern po ra' ne ous, offhand; 
delivered on the impulse of the 
moment. 



flu' ent, abundant and smooth. 

flor' id, flowery ; ornamental. 

ges' tures, motions of the body to 
express feeling. 

ges tic' u late, to make gestures. 

ha rangue' (rang), a noisy speech. 

im promp' tu, offhand ; without 
previous study. 

lee' ture, a discourse on any sub- 
ject. 

mag net' ic, extremely attractive. 

o ra' tion, an elaborate discourse 
delivered in public. 

or' a to ry, the art of effective pub- 
lic speaking. 

rhe tor' i cal, pertaining to ele- 
gant composition. 



118 



LESSON 32.— The Suffix ion. 



The suffix ion means the act of. 

1. Make nouns of the following words by adding ion. 

2. Give the definition of each noun formed. 

3. Give the rule for the change that occurs in the words 
ending in silent e. 



re late / 
nar rate' 
grad 7 u ate 
die tate 7 
a verse 7 
con 7 sti tute 



spec 7 u late con struct 7 pros 7 e cute 



pro gress 7 
vi brate 7 
ded 7 i cate 
at tract 7 
re pulse 7 



con vict 7 
dis tinct 7 
dis tort 7 
re vise 7 
suf fuse 7 



cor rupt 7 
ed 7 u cate 
in fiict 7 
dis perse 7 
ag 7 i tate. 



LESSON 33— Relating to Intemperance. 



al' co hoi, pure spirits, but usually 
applied to ardent spirits in gen- 
eral. 

al co hoi' ic, relating to alcohol. 

bac cha na' li an, reveling in 
drunkenness. 

brew' er y, a place where brewing 
is carried on. 

bib' ber, a drinker. 

bev' or age, liquor for drinking. 

dar' et, a light French wine. 

drunk' ard, one who drinks habit- 
ually. 

drunk' en ness, state of being 
drunk. 

dis til' ler y, place where liquor is 
distilled. 

fer men ta' tion, that change of 
organic substances, by which their 
starch, sugar, &c, are decom- 
posed and new compounds formed. 



in tern' per ance, indulgence in 

strong liquors. 
in tox' i cate, to make drunk. 
in tox' i cant, that which makes 

drunk. 
in e' bri ate, a sot ; a drunkard. 
in e bri' e ty, drunkenness. 
li' quor, alconolic fluid. 
maud' lin, drunken ; foolish. 
reel' ing, staggering. 
sot' tish, stupid with drunkenness. 
spir' i tu OUs, having the quality 

of ardent spirits. 
tee to' tal er, one who abstains 

entirely from the use of liquor. 
tip' pier, one who drinks to ex- 



tip' sy, intoxicated ; 
to' per, a drunkard 
whis' ky, a spirit 
grain. 



staggering, 
a sot. 
distilled from 



LESSON 34.-Fishes, 



ale 7 wife 
an cho 7 vy 
dol 7 phin 
noun 7 der 
gud 7 geon 



had' dock 
hal 7 i but 
her 7 ring 
lam 7 prey 
mack 7 or el 



mul 7 let 
perch 
pick 7 er el 
sftlm 7 on 
s&r dine 7 



scul 7 pin 
stur 7 geon 
tan tog 7 
tor pe 7 do 
tur 7 bot 



119 



LESSON 35 —Common Words Often Misspelled. 



a fraid 7 
an tique 7 
be seech 7 
bur 7 glar 
caught 
clean 7 ly 
cleanse 
con ceit 7 
dis solve 7 
de cis 7 ion 



doub 7 ly 
drow 7 sy 
en deav 7 or 
ful fil 7 
fau 7 cet 
fought 
hand 7 ful 
hon 7 or 
im ag 7 ine 
im mense 7 



in qui 7 ry 
/laugh 7 ter 
mead 7 ow 
pleas 7 ant 
pur suit 7 
pre pared 7 
pit 7 e ous 
sen 7 si ble 
spec ta 7 tor 
force 



er 



sleek 
to geth 7 
us 7 age 
un veil 7 
wrought 
wield 
wel 7 come 
wel 7 fare 
won 7 drous 
whith 7 er. 



LESSON 36.— Relating to Crime 

one's self to 



ab scond', to secrete 
avoid the law. 

as sault', to attack violently. 

ar' son, malicious burning of build- 
ings or ships. 

crim' i nal, one guilty of a crime. 

dun' geon, a dark, underground 
prison. 

em bez' zle ment, act of appro- 
priating to one's own use what is 
entrusted to one's care. 

fel' O ny, a crime punishable by 
death or imprisonment. 

for' ger y, counterfeiting one's 
writing. 



fraud' u lent, dishonest. 

gal' lows, instrument for hanging 
criminals. 

knave, a rascal ; a villain. 

lar' ce ny, theft. 

pen i ten' ti a ry, a house of cor- 
rection. 

ruf ' fi an, a brutal fellow. 

rob' ber y, act of plundering. 

rogue, a dishonest person. 

smug' gler, one who secretly ex- 
ports or imports articles contrary 
to law. 

thief, one who steals. 

trai' tor, one guilty of treason. 



LESSON 37.— Derivatives. 

Spell the adjective, and then name and spell the noun and 
adverb formed from it. 



Adjectives. 

true 

long 

sane 

wide 

slow 

odd 

broad 

deep 

poor 

dear 

can 7 did 

false 

free 



Nouns. 
truth 
length 
san 7 i ty 
width 
sloth 
odd 7 i ty 
breadth 
depth 
pov' er ty 
dearth 
can 7 dor 
false 7 hood 
free 7 dom 



Adverbs. 
tru 7 ly 
loug 
sane 7 ly 
wide 7 ly 
slow 7 ly 
odd 7 ly 
broad 7 ly 
deep 7 ly 
poor 7 ly 
dear 7 ly 
can 7 did ly 
false 7 ly 
free 7 ly 



120 



prop' er 
tim 7 id 
so" ber 
ex treme' 
wise 



pro pri 7 e ty 
tim id' i ty 
so bri 7 e ty 
ex trem 7 i ty 
wis 7 doin 



prop' er ly 
tim 7 id ly 
so 7 ber ly 
ex treme 7 ly 
wise 7 ly. 



LESSON 38-Words Used in Traveling. 



an' chor, an iron instrument for 

holding a vessel at rest. 
ac' ci dent, a chance event. 
a board', on board. 
bag' gage, trunks ; luggage. 
brake' man, one who manages 

the brakes on cars. 
ca nal',an artificial water course. 
col li' sion, a striking together of 

two bodies. 
com' pass, an instrument used to 

determine the north, south, east 

and west. 
cir en' i tons, roundabout. 
cab' in, an apartment in a ship. 
ca' ble, a strong rope or chain. 
ca' ble gram, a message sent by 

cable. 
des ti na' tion, stopping point. 
de ten' tion, delay ; act of detain- 
ing. 
de' pot, a railway station. 
em' i grate, to leave one country 

to reside in another. 
ex cur' sion, a trip usually for 

pleasure or health. 
freight, cargo. 
fare, P" c e of passage. 
fer' ry, to carry over a river in a 

boat. 
gang' "way, a passage-way from 

the vessel to the shore. 



June' tion, union place of two or 

more lines of railway. 
jour' ney, a voyage ; a tour. 
port man' teau, a bag carried 

in traveling. 
purs' er, one who has charge of 

the public money on a vessel. 
pi' lot, one who directs or steers. 
pas' sen ger, a traveler. 
rud' der, that which steers a ship. 
rail' road, a road on which iron 

rails are laid for wheels to run on. 
steam' er, a vessel propelled by 

steam. 
steer' age, the inferior apartments 

of a ship. 
stew' ard, a man who attends to 

the provisions on board ship. 
state' room, a sleeping-room on a 

ship. 
seen' er y, a view of nature. 
satch el, a hand bag. 
tel' e gram, message by telegraph. 
taff' rail, a railing around the 

stern of the ship. 
tour' ist, one who makes a tour. 
ter' mi nus, the end of a railroad. 
trans por ta' tion, act of carrying 

from place to place. 
voy' age, an extended trip by 

water, 
wreck, destruction of a vessel. 



LESSON 39. -Dry Goods Terms. 



hose 
lin 7 en 
mus' lin 
vel 7 vet 
rib 7 bon 
ging 7 ham 
sat 7 in 



skein 


me ri' 7 no 


scarf 


flan 7 nel 


mit 7 ten 


veil 7 ing 


tin 7 sel 


wors 7 ted 


edg 7 ing 


por ti ere 7 


braid 


cur 7 tains 


plaid 


tas 7 sels 



cash 7 mere 
cor 7 du roy 
ban dan 7 na 
cam 7 brie 
tap 7 es try 
hand 7 ker chief 
era vat 7 



121 



serge 
cot 7 ton 
al pac 7 a 
car i co 



par 7 a sol dra 7 per y fi chu 7 

em broid 7 er y un bleached 7 

wad 7 ding blank 7 et 

cas 7 si mere chintz. 



um brel 7 la 
man 7 tie 
wrap 7 per 

LESSON 40.— Geographical Terms. 



ax' is, the line on which a body re- 
volves. 

a byss', a bottomless gulf. 

at' mos phere, the air. 

base, the bottom on which any- 
thing rests. 

bay' ou a branch of the main 
channel of a body of water near 
where it empties. 

chasm (kasm),a deep opening. 

chan' nel, the bed of a stream. 

cas cade', a water-fall. 

cur' rent, a stream. 

cat' a ract, a large water-fall. 

cy' clone, a rotary storm or 
whirlwind. 

con' ti nent, the largest body of 
land. 

can on' (can yon), a broad, ex- 
tended gorge. 

del'ta,a tract of land between two 

mouths of a river. 

e ro' sion, act of wearing away 
gradually. 

e qua' tor, imaginary line equally 
distant from the two poles. 

el e va' tion, height. 

firth, an arm of the sea. 

ela' cier, an immense field of ice 
and snow moving down moun- 
tain sides. 

hur' ri cane, a violent wind storm. 

hem' is phere, half of the earth's 
sphere. 

is' land, a body of land surrounded 
by water. 

isth' mus, a small body of land 
connecting two larger bodies of 
land. 

i so ther' mal, showing the dis- 
tribution of heat by means of 
lines. 

lat' i tude, distance north and 
south of the equator. 



Ion' gi tude, distance east and 
■west of a given line. 

loch (lok), Scottish word for lake. 

mi rage', an illusion causing dis- 
tant objects to appear in the air . 

mon soon', a periodical wind 
blowing in the tropics. 

me rid' i an, a great circle running 
through the north and the south 
poles. 

ma rine', pertaining to the sea. 

moun' tain ous, containing moun- 
tains. 

o a' sis, a fertile spot in a desert. 

prec' i pice, a high, steep declivity. 

pen in' su la, a body of land 
almost surrounded by water. 

prom' on to ry, a high point of land 
projecting into the sea. 

plan' et, a heavenly body revolving 
around the sun. 

peak, a point. 

pla teau' (to), broad, high area 
of land. 

rep' tile, a creeping animal. 

ro ta' tion, act of turning, as a 
wheel does. 

sub ma rine', under the water. 

si moon', a hot, dry wind. 

source, the point from which any- 
thing springs. 

strait, a small body of water con- 
necting two larger bodies of water. 

trop' i cal, relating to the tropics. 

trio' u ta ry, contributing to 
another. 

ty phoon', a violent, whirling wind 
in the Chinese seas. 

tern' per a ture, degree of heat 
and cold. 

u' ni verse, the world and all 
created things. 

veg' e ta ble, relating to plants. 

veg e ta' tion, vegetable life. 



122 



LESSON 41.— Articles in a Drugstore. 



o' pi urn 
pow' ders 
vi' als 
tubes 

chlo' ro form 
med' i cine 
pre scrip 7 tion 
poi' son 
al' co hoi 
tine' ture 
mer' cu ry 
am mo 7 ni a 
va le' ri an 
qui 7 nine 



per mm' er y 
bo 7 rax 
cal' o mel 
strych' nine 
glyc' er ine 
bot' ties 
lau' da num 
cam 7 phor 
sul' phur 
e lix' ir 
lie" o rice 
or 7 ris-root 
par e gor' ic 
ker' o sene 



co logne' 

ben zi'ne' 

cop' per as 

cre / o sote 

ar' se nic 

ac'id 

al' ka li 

drugs 

cap 7 sules 

at' om iz er 

sar sa pa ril' la 

mor phine' 

tur / pen tine 

hy po phos' phites. 



LESSON 42,-Relating to Fire and Heat. 



an' thra cite, a hard coal. 

an ileal', to temper by heating 

and then cooling slowly. 
bea' con, a signal light. 
con fla gra' tion, a large fire. 
ca lor' ic, the principle of heat. 
crn' ci ble, a vessel for melting 

metals. 
com "bus' ti ble, capable of taking 

fire. 
com bus' tion, fire and burning. 
can' nel coal, a coal that burns 

readily with a clear flame. 
fur' nace, a place where a large 

fire is kept. 
hoi' o caust, a sacrifice, the whole 

of which is consumed by fire. 



in can des' cent, white or glow- 
ing with heat. 

in' gle side, the fireside. 

in flam' ma ble, capable of being 
set on fire. 

ig' ne ous, pertaining to fire. 

ig ni' tion, act of setting on fire. 

in cen' di a ry, a person who sets 
fire to another's property. 

or' de al, an ancient form of trial 
by fire to determine innocence or 
guilt. 

pyre, a funeral pile. 

ther' mal, relating to heat, 

ther mom' e ter, an instrument 
for measuring heat. 

tep' id* lukewarm. 



LESSON 43.— Names of Flowers. 



li' lac 

car na' tion 
dan' de li on 
pe tu' ni a 
ver be' na 
dahl' ia 
fuch' si a 
mlgn on ette' 
ja pon' I ca 



he' li o trope 
mar' i gold 
nastur'tium 
col' urn bine 
hon'ey suck le 
be gon' ia 
am' a ranth 
vi' o let 
pop' py 



zin' nia 

cro' cus 

cac' tus 

chrys an' them um 

hy dran' ge a 

nar yis' sus 

can' dy tuft 

syr in' ga" 

lark' spur 



123 



am a ryl' lis 


phlox 


wis ta' ri a 


ge ran' ium 


lil' v 


jes' sa mine 


hy' a cinth 


tuMip 


hoi' ly hock 


daf fo dil 


pan" sy 


pe' o ny. 



LKSSON 44— Relating to Manners and Society. 



af fee ta' tion, pretending what is 
not natural or real. 

as sem' "blage, a company of per- 
sons. 

boor' ish, rude and ignorant. 

ci vil' i ty, courtesy ; politeness. 

con ver sa' tion al, relating to 
conversation. 

e lite' (a leet), a choice or select 
body. 

e clat' (e kla), brilliancy of suc- 
cess. 

et' i quette (ket), the proprieties. 

in tro due' tion, act of making 
acquainted. 

in' ti ma cy, close familiarity. 

in vi ta' tion, act of inviting. 

matinee' (na), an entertainment 
in the early part of the day. 



mil' sic ale, a musical entertain- 
ment. 

man' ner ism, adherence to a 
peculiar style or manner. 

Os' tra cize,to banish from society. 

po lite' ness, courtesy of man- 
ners. 

pol' ish, elegance of manners. 

par' ven u, one who has recently 
come into notice ; an upstart. 

re cep' tion, act of receiving. 

re fine' ment, high culture or ele- 
gance. 

rude' ness, coarseness ; incivility. 

sim plic' i ty, state of being sim- 
ple and unaffected. 

soi ree' (swara), an evening party. 

un couth', awkward and unpleas- 
ing in manners. 



LESSON 45.-Derivatives. 



Form adjectives and spell them, 



Nouns. Adj. 
cream — y 
flax — en 
film— y 
queen — ly 
oak — en 
bulb— ous 
star — ry 
clay— ey 
ghost — ly 
fiend — ish 
glass— y 
girl — ish 
self— ish 
sloth— ful 
sot — tish 
fleece— y 



Nouns. Adj. 
flesh— y 
snap — pish 
prince — ly 
knot — ty 
pain — ful 
pain — less 
spite — ful 
pet — tish 
guilt— y 
guilt — less 
fog— gy 
qualm — ish 
pith— y 
craft— y 
weight— y 
sylph — like 



Nouns. Adj. 
wretch — ed 
joy— ful 
joy— ous 
wish — ful 
taste — ful 
taste— y 
taste — less 
plaint — ive 
use — less 
use — ful 
sleep — y 
sleep — less 
mist — y 
heart — y 
heart — less 
pearl — y. 



124 



LESSON 46.— Relating to Praise and Blame. 



ac' me, the highest point. 

ap plause', praise. 

cen' sure, blame. 

cen so' ri ous, blaming; fault- 
finding. 

com pli ment, an expression of 
admiration. 

com men da' tion, act of praising 
or approving. 

ce leb' ri ty, a person of distinc- 
tion. 

eu' lo gy, a speech of high praise. 

en co' mi um, high praise. 

flat' ter y, false praise. 

fa' in ous, celebrated. 

in fal' li ble, never making a mis- 
take. 

in com' par a ble, matchless. 



distinguished ; 
, disgraceful ; 



il lus tri o 

glorious. 
ig no min' i 

shameful. 

mer i to' ri ons, worth}' of honor. 

pan e gyr' ic, an oration in praise 
of some one. 

prow 'ess, military bravery. 

par' a gon, a model of excellence. 

prod' i gy, something wonderful. 

quin tes' sence, pure or concen- 
trated essence. 

re nown', fame. 

re proof, an expression of blame. 

stig' ma tize, to brand with a 
mark of disgrace. 

su perb', magnificent. 

um' brage, offence ; resentment. 



LESSON 47.-Test Exercise. 

Same sounds spelled different ways. 



cloud 


rouse 


bluff 


full 


crowd 


browse 


tough 


wool 


knob 


hide 


sponge 


mourn 


swab 


guide 


plunge 


torn 


dunce 


float 


clothe 


loud 


once 


quote 


loathe 


bowed 


pith 


live 


quoth 


dote 


myth 


sieve 


growth 


coat 


bough 


source 


g-ourd 


nerve 


scow 


hoarse 


hoard 


curve 


flies 


loath 


smote 


much 


guise 


both 


throat 


touch 


notch 


lithe 


fought 


f ron t 


watch 


scythe 


taught 


brunt 


wand 


mope 


shred 


spouse 


pond 


soap 


thread 


drowse, 



LESSON 48.-Relating to Expenditure. 

al low' ance, that which is allowed, im prov' i dent, not prudent in 
boun' ti ful, free in giving. managing. 

dis burse' ment, act of paying lav' ish, wasteful, 

out. mi' aer ly, very stingy. 



125 



dis' si pate, to destroy by extrav- 
agance. 

e CO nom i cal, saving in expenses. 

ex or' bi tant, excessive; enor- 
mous. 

ex trav' a gant, going beyond 
bounds 

ex pen' sive, costly. 

fru' gal, sparing ; saving. 

gen' er ous, open-handed ; abun- 
dant. 

lib' er al, giving freely. 



mu nif ' i cent, very liberal in 
giving. 

nig' gard ly, meanly covetous. 

par si mo' ni ons, saving to ex- 
cess. 

pen' u ry, poverty. 

pen u' ri ous, excessively saving. 

prod' i gal, extravagant. 

stin' gi ness, state of being stingy. 

spend' thrift, one who spends 
money profusely. 

squan' der, to spend wastefully. 



LESSON 49.— Relating to Farming, 



dai 7 ry 
ag ri cul 
scythe 
sick' le 
gu a' no 
mead' ow 
fer 7 tile 



ture 



st£r 7 ile 
fer 7 ti liz er 
marl 

phos 7 phate 
pas 7 tur age 
bar 7 ren 
hoe 7 ing 



reap' ing 
plough 
drain 7 age 
haul 7 ing 
maul 7 ing 
til' lage 
thresh 7 ing 



ar 7 a ble 
a 7 ere 

cul 7 ti vate 
gran 7 a ry 
or 7 chard 
loam 7 y 
till 7 a ble. 



LESSON 50.— Pertaining to a City. 



al' der man, a member of the 
council of a city. 

cit' i zen, inhabitant of a city. 

cap' i tal, a city where government 
affairs are transacted. 

cap' i tol, a government house. 

cit' a del, a fortress in a fortified 
city. 

conn' oil, an assembly for con- 
sultation. 

cor po ra' tien, a body author- 
ized by law to act as one person. 

char' ter, a writing bestowing 
certain rights. 

cos mo pol' i tan, a person who 
has no particular home. 

in cor' po rate, to form into a 
legal body. 



lim' its, boundaries. 

man u fac' tnr ing, relating to 
manufactures. 

me trop' O lis, the chief city. 

met ro pol' i tan, belonging to a 
metropolis. 

may' or, chief magistrate of a city. 

mu nio' i pal, pertaining to a city. 

po lice', body of officers to pre- 
serve order. 

res' er voir, place where water is 
kept for use. 

sew' er, a drain to carry off water 
under ground. 

sub ur' ban, relating to the limits 
of a city. 

sea' port, a town or city on the 

sea shore. 



LESSON 51.— Phrases Equivalent to Possessive Nouns. 

1. Change the italicized phrases to possessive nouns. 

2. Be careful in the use of the apostrophe. 



126 



Examples.— The house of my father. My father's house. 
The games of tlie boys. The boys' games. 



1. The bloom of the roses. 

2. The message of the Presi- 

dent. 

3. The rights of women. 

4. The destruction of the city. 

5. The songs of the birds. 

6. The bank for merchants. 

7. The book of my sister Mary. 

8. The speech of the orator. 

9. The duties of man. 

10. The bank of Melton and 

Minor. 

11. The anxiety of the mother. 



12. The sports of the children. 

13. The piano belonging to Grace 

and Mary. 

14. The business of Jones & Co. 

15. The wages of ten servants. 

16. A school for girls and boys. 

17. A meeting of the society. 

18. The debts of Mr. Smith, 

my brotlier. 

19. The clothes of the gentle- 

men. 

20. The machine shops of Hay 

& Turner. 



LESSON 52— Adjectives Describing Persons. 



Many of these adjectives may, also, 
things. 



be made to describe 



ag' ile, nimble ; active. 

a lert', watchful. 

a' mi a "ble, lovable. 

ac qui es' cent, agreeing. 

ar' hi tra ry, tyrannical. 

ar' ro gant, overbearing. 

a droit', skilful. 

ath let' ic, vigorous ; strong. 

av a ri' cious, greedy after wealth. 

brawn' y, having strong muscles. 

be nign', kind. 

bombas' tic, pompous. 

bur' ly, rough ; coarse. 

cour te' ous, polite. 

cal' lous, hardened. 

come' ly, handsome. 

can' did, frank. 

cor' di al, hearty ; sincere. 

con ge' ni al, suited in nature. 

clum' sy, awkward. 

cor' pu lent, fleshy. 

civ' il, polite. 

cir' cum spect, prudent. 

cul' pa ble, blamable. 

ca pri' cious, whimsical. 

dis creet', prudent. 

de vout', pious ; earnest. 

dough' ty, brave. 



de mure', grave; modest. 

dis loy' al, untrue. 

er rat' ic, unsteady ; moving. 

er' rant, wandering. 

el' i gi ble, worthy to be chosen. 

ex pert', skilful. 

ec cen' trie, odd. 

em' i nent, distinguished. 

fick' le, changeable. 

fa' cile, easily persuaded. 

frail, easily broken. 

fran' tic, raving; wild. 

friv' O lous, trifling. 

ge' ni al, cheerful and sympathetic. 

gawk' y, foolish and awkward. 

hale, healthy. 

in trep' id, fearless ; bold. 

in gen' ious, skilful. 

in gen' u ous, open ; frank. 

in firm', feeble. 

in ert', inactive ; dull. 

im pet' u ous, rash ; violent. 

im mor' tal, everlasting. 

ju' ve nile, youthful. 

Ian' guid, weak ; faint. 

mor' tal, subject to death. 

mo rose', sullen ; gloomy. 

ma li' cious, spiteful. 



127 



mer' ce na ry, moved by gain. 
neg' li gent, careless. 
ob' du rate, hardened in feeling'. 
o bese', very fat. 

per sis' tent, determined ; urgent. 
pre pos sess' ing, winning. 
plac' id, tranquil ; contented. 
pre snmpt' u ons, over-confident. 
prof li gate, shamelessly im- 
moral. 
pen' sive, thoughtful. 
peer' less, matchless. 
re luc' tant, unwilling. 
res' o lute, determined. 
re li' a ble, trustworthy. 
ruth' less, cruel. 
rash, hasty. 

re miss', n °t prompt or careful. 
ro bust', strong; sturdy. 
ser' vile, slavish ; fawning. 



stal' wart, strong; bold. 
sin' ew y, strong; vigorous. 
se rene', undisturbed ; calm. 
stur' dy, strong. 
sul' ky, sullen. 
shrewd, sharp ; wise. 
sus cept' i ble, easy to receive im- 
pressions. 
treach' er ous, like a traitor. 
tract' a ble, teachable. 
tim' o rous, timid. 
ur bane' refined ; polite. 
ve ra' cious, truthful. 
vo ra' cious, ravenous. 
val' iant, brave. 
vig' i lant, watchful. 
wa' ry, prudent ; watchful. 
wil' y, sly ; cunning. 
■way' ward, perverse. 
zeal' ous, eager ; earnest. 



LESSON 53.— Occupations. 



ac count' ant 
ar 7 ti san 
act' or 
ar 7 chi tect 
auc tion eer 7 
a" er o naut 
ap pren 7 tice 
bak 7 er 
brew' er 
bank 7 er 
bar 7 ber 
butch 7 er 
book 7 keep er 
car 7 pen ter 
ca 7 ter er 
com pos 7 i tor 
doc 7 tor 



drug 7 gist 
drov 7 er 
drum 7 mer 
dai 7 ry man 
en gin eer 7 
e lee tri 7 cian 
flo 7 rist 
gro 7 cer 
gar 7 den er 
law 7 yer 
mer 7 chant 
me chan 7 ic 
mil 7 li ner 
mes 7 sen ger 
min 7 is ter 
o ver seer 7 
op ti 7 cian 



oc 7 u list 
plumb 7 er 
print 7 er 

pho tog 7 ra pher 
phy si 7 cian 
ped 7 ler 
plas 7 ter er 
shep 7 herd 
seam 7 stress 
sur 7 geon 
sten og 7 ra pher 
tai 7 lor 
teach 7 er 
tel 7 e graph er 
type 7 writ ist 
ty pog 7 ra pher 
up hoi 7 ster er. 



LESSON 54.-Titles. 



Titles used with proper names should be written with 
capitals. 



Ad 7 mi ral 
Arch 7 bish op 
Bar 7 on 



Col 7 o nel 
Cap 7 tain 
Car 7 di na! 



Es quire 7 
Em 7 per or 
Gen 7 er a! 



May 7 or 
Pre 7 mi er 
Pro fess 7 or 



128 



Con 7 sul 
Count" ess 
Com 7 mo dore 



Czar 

Cor" po ral 

Duch 7 ess 



Gov" ern or 
Khe 7 dive 
Mas 7 is trate 



Sen 7 a tor 
Ser 7 geant 
Vis 7 count. 



LESSON 55.-Synonyms. 



Synonyms are words that mean the same or nearly the 
same as other words. 
Use synonyms of the words italicized in the sentences. 



1. You are sure to succeed. 

2. All honest work is respect- 

able. 

3. Clumsy people are always 

in the way. 

4. He is much changed in ap- 

pearance. 

5. Avoid bad company. 

6. I was surprised at his 

answer. 

7. He carries a heavy load. 

8. Let me warn you against 

him. 

9. He is the head of the de- 

partment. 



10. His conduct was very bad. 

11. Do not divulge my secret. 

12. He masters difficulties 
with great ease. 

Go back to your home. 

14. I confess my mistake. 

15. This belief is general. 

16. Let me give you an instance 
of bravery. 

It is my intention to do 

right. 
I can deny you nothing. 
Do not punishtoo severely. 
He has great strength of 

character. 



13. 



cer 7 tain 
pros 7 per 
la 7 bor 
awk 7 ward 
al 7 tered 
shun 



as ton 7 ished 

bears 

bur 7 den 

cau 7 tion 

chief 

be hav 7 ior 



tell ex am 7 pie 

fa cil 7 i ty cour 7 age 

re turn 7 pur 7 pose 

ac knowl 7 edge re fuse 7 
er 7 ror chas tise 7 

u ni vers 7 al force. 



LESSON 56.— Derivatives. 



Verbs. 
ail 

ac quit 7 
ac quaint 7 
at tach 7 
ar rive 7 
as sure 7 
ap pear' 
be have 7 
be gin 7 
coin 
clothe 
d(i part 7 
de mean 7 



Nouns. 
ail 7 ment 
ac quit 7 tal 
ac quaint 7 ance 
at tach 7 ment 
ar riv 7 al 
as sur 7 ance 
ap pear 7 ance 
be hav 7 ior 
be gin 7 ner 
coin 7 age 
cloth 7 ier 
de part 7 ure 
de mean 7 or 



Verbs. 
en treat 7 
fore close 7 
for 7 feit 
fail 

in close 7 
lug 

oc cur 7 
oint 
pave 
quote 
re port 7 
re new 7 
re fuse 7 



Nouns. 
en treat 7 y 
fore clos 7 ure 
for 7 feit ure 
fail 7 ure 
in clos 7 ure 
lug 7 gage 
oc cur 7 rence 
oint 7 ment 
pave" ment 
quo ta 7 tion 
re port 7 er 
re new 7 al 
re fus 7 al 



129 



dis use' 


dis us / age 


rejoin 7 


re join 7 der 


en close / 


en clos' ure 


shrink' 


shrink 7 age 


en dure 


en dur' ance 


store 


stor 7 age. 



LESSON 57.-Words Describing Things. 



ap par' ent, plain ; clear. 

am' pie, abundant. 

bo' vine, of the ox family. 

brief, short. 

co los' sal, very large. 

Co' pi ous, abundant. 

CO' gent, forcible ; weighty. 

crude, raw ; unformed. 

con ta' gi ous, catching. 

conn ter feit, false ; forged. 

con spic' u ous, prominent. 

clan d.es' tine, secret. 

cur' so ry, hasty ; careless. 

cbron' ic, continuing a long time. 

dul' cet, soft and sweet. 

dur' a ble, lasting. 

des' ul to ry, disconnected. 

de fi' cient, wanting. 

de rog' a to ry, injurious. 

ex tinct', ended. 

ex te' ri or, outside. 

fa' tal, causing death. 

fu' tile, useless. 

frag' ile, easily broken. 

fe' line, of the cat family. 

fer' vent, warm ; ardent. 

i den' ti cal, the same. 

in fe' ri or, of lower quality. 

in te' ri or, inside. 

in sip' id, tasteless. 

in trin' sic, real ; genuine. 

in cred' i ble, impossible to be 

believed. 
lu' cid, easily understood. 
la con' ic, short. 
la' tent, undeveloped. 
man' u al, done by the hand. 
men' tal, belonging to the mind. 
mod' ern, new. 
mas' sive, heavy. 
mam' moth, very large. 
me' di o ere, of middle quality. 
nov' el, new. 



prac' ti ca ble, capable of being 
done. 

pa thet' ic, touching. 

prin' ci pal, chief. 

plaus' i ble, apparently right. 

pre' vi ous, going before. 

quaint, odd. 

re cip' ro cal, done by each to the 
other. 

rare, unusual. 

ru' ral, belonging to the country. 

rus' tic, unpolished ; natural. 

re pug' nant, distasteful. 

re' cent, new ; late. 

sole, only. 

san' i ta ry, pertaining to health. 

sig nif ' i cant, important. 

sec' u lar, pertaining to the world. 

sec' tion al, belongingtoa section. 

su pe' ri or, surpassing others. 

ster' ling, genuine. 

spa' cious, large ; roomy. 

slea' zy, flimsy. 

su per fi' cial, on the surface. 

sup' pie, easily bent. 

stealth' y, secret ; sly. 

sys tern at' ic, arranged in regu- 
lar order. 

sed' en ta ry, inactive. 

sa lu' bri ous, healthful. 

trag' ic, mournful. 

trite, wornout; stale. 

te' di ous, tiresome. 

triv' i al, unimportant. 

tan' gi ble, perceptible to the 
touch. 

tor' pid, inactive. 

terse, elegantly concise. 

ter res' tri al, earthly. 

tac' it, silent. 

ur' gent, pressing. 

ul' ti mate, final. 

vi' tal, necessary to life. 



130 



oV vi ous, easily seen. 

op' tion al, depending on choice. 

os ten' si ble, apparent. 

o' ral, spoken. 

ob' so lete, out of use . 

po' rous, full of holes. 

pro fuse', very liberal. 

pun' gent, biting to the taste. 

per' fo rat ed, pierced with holes. 

pre ma ture', ripe too soon. 

prac' ti cal, can be turned to use. 



viv' id, strikingly bright. 

vol' un ta ry, of one's own will. 

vir' u lent, extremely poisonous. 

ver' bal, spoken. 

vap' id, without life or spirit. 

vague, unsettled. 

ven' om ouz, poisonous. 

ver' i ta ble, real ; true. 

vis' i ble, can be seen. 

weird, unearthly. 

whole' some, promoting health. 



LESSON 58.— Conveyances. 



am' bu lance 
ba rouche / 
bi 7 cy cle 
bier 

char 7 i ot 
con vey 7 ance 
chaise 



cou pe 7 
car 7 riage 
cab 7 ri o let 
car 7 ry all 
cur 7 ri cle 
car 7 i ole 
han 7 som 



her 7 die 
hearse 
om 7 ni bus 
phae 7 ton 
rock 7 a way 
se dan 7 
sul 7 ky 



sleigh 
sledge 
tri 7 cy cle 
to bog 7 gan 
turn 7 bril 
vie to 7 ri a 
wag 7 on. 



LESSON 59. -Latin Words, 



aborig' ines, the original inhab- 
itants. 

a 7 lias, otherwise. 

al' ibi, elsewhere. 

con' tra, against. 

equilib' rium, an equality of 
weight. 

er' go, therefore. 

ex' it, departure. 

face' tiae y witty sayings. 

fi' nis, end. 

gra f tis, free. 

hia' tus, an opening. 

im f petus, tendency to motion. 



impri' mis, in the first place. 

in' terim, in tne meantime. 

instan' ter, instantly. 

max' imum, greatest. 

miri imum, smallest. 

om f nes, all. 

quo' ta, share. 

sta' tus, standing. 

seria' Urn, in regular order. 

vac' uum, empty space. 

verba' tim, word for word. 

ver' sus, against. 

ve' to, I forbid it. 

vi' a, by the way of. 



LESSON 60.— French Expressions, 



exposure. 
personnel', personal charac- 
teristics. 
ennui', weariness. 
debut', first appearance. 
bon mot, a witty saying. 
on dit, rumor. 
petit', small. 



protege', one protected. 
hauteur', haughtiness. 
regime', regular order of things. 
debris', rubbish. 
surveillance', supervision. 
embonpoint' , corpulence. 
nom de plume, assumed name 
of a writer. 



131 



corps, a body. 

entre nous, between us. 

a la mode, fashionably. 

nonchalance', carelessness. 

ren' dez vous, place of meeting. 

trousseau', wedding outfit. 

connoisseur', an art critic. 

blase', worn out. 

outre', foreign ; strange. 

entree/ entrance. 



bizarre', fantastic ; odd. 

faux pas, false step. 

qui vive, look-out. 

carte blanche, full permission. 

de trop, too many. 

recherche', select. 

par excellence', pre-eminently. 

nous verrons', we shall see. 

en rapport', in harmony with. 

bouquet', a bunch of flowers. 



LESSON 61.— Test Exercise. 



Same sounds spelled different w^ays. 



chaise 


glue 


fret 


trot 


phrase 


stew 


sweat 


squat 


craze 


view 


debt 


yacht 


scourge^ 


verse 


a lone 7 


ea 7 gle 


verge 


purse 


un known 7 


peo 7 pie 


purge 


worse 


be moan 7 


stee 7 pie 


freak 


phan 7 torn 


chas tise 7 


dai 7 ry 


pique 


ban 7 tarn 


bap tize 7 


wa 7 ry 


man 7 y 


sin 7 ner 


ta 7 per 


heav 7 y 


pen 7 ny 


cyn 7 ic 


va 7 por 


lev 7 y 


pleas 7 ant 


leop 7 ard 


lau 7 rel 


a byss 7 


pres 7 ent 


shep 7 herd 


sor 7 rel 


re miss 7 


tas 7 sel 


Aim 7 sy 


turn 


weath 7 er 


vas 7 sal 


whim 7 sey 


yearn 


teth 7 er 


germ 


stung 


blends 


bane 


worm 


tongue 


cleanse 


stain 


firm 


young 


friends 


skein 


pray 7 ing 


sil 7 ly 


a las 7 


fu see 7 


prai 7 rie 


syl 7 van 


sur pass 7 


ra zee 7 . 



LESSON 62.-Words Spelled Two Ways. 



cen 7 tre or cen 7 ter, 

sa 7 bre or sa 7 ber, 

fi 7 bre or fi 7 ber, 

me 7 tre or me 7 ter, 

mi 7 tre or mi 7 ter, 

ni 7 tre or ni 7 ter, 

som 7 bre or som 7 ber, 

the 7 a tre or the 7 a ter, 

sep 7 ul chre or sep 7 ul cher. 

seep 7 tre or seep 7 ter, 

mea 7 gre or mea 7 ger, 



pyg 7 my or pig 7 my, 
spin 7 age or spin 7 ach, 
bau 7 ble or baw 7 ble, 
skep 7 tic or seep 7 tic, 
boul 7 der or bowl 7 der, 
ba zar 7 or ba zaar 7 , 
ped 7 dler or ped 7 ler, 
gai 7 e ty or gay 7 e ty, 
trav 7 el ing or trav 7 el ling, 
bev 7 el ing or bev 7 el ling, 
shov 7 el ing or shov 7 el ling, 



132 



lus 7 tre or lus 7 ter, 
spec/ tre or spec' ter, 
gyp' sy or gip 7 sy, 
bal 7 dric or bal 7 drick, 



rav > el ing or rav 7 el ling, 
grav 7 el ing or gra 7 vel ling, 
sniv 7 el ing or sniv 7 el ling, 
quar 7 rei ing or quar 7 rel ling. 



LESSON 63.— Common Words Often Misspelled. 



bar 7 gain 
con fi den" tial 
com mit 7 tee 
com' pan y 
com 7 pe tent 
cal 7 en dar 



dis crS 7 tion 
dam 7 age 
ex change 7 
ex pense 7 
es' ti mate 
fair ure 



fac 7 to ry 
for 7 eign 
pre ferred 7 
prof 7 it 
rec om mend 7 
re spon 7 si ble 



un prof 7 it a ble 
un luck 7 y 
val 7 u a ble 
va 7 can cy 
man 7 age ment 
prop o si 7 tion. 



LESSON 64.-Prefixes That Mean "Not." 



Spell and define each word. 



nn known' 
it a seen 7 
nn til*' ing* 
un clean 7 
vii kind 7 
un coin 7 in on 
un hap 7 py 
un cer 7 tain 
un a 7 ble 
im pos 7 si ble 
im prob 7 a ble 



im mature 7 
im mod 7 er ate 
im mor 7 al 
im, mor 7 tal 
im par 7 tial 
im pen 7 i tent 
im' pi ous 
in act 7 ive 
in at ten 7 tive 
in aud 7 i ble 
in an 7 i mate 



in con sis 7 tent 
in cred 7 u lous 
in dis creet 7 
il leg 7 i ble 
il lib 7 er al 
il lie 7 it 
il lit 7 er ate 
il log 7 i cal 
ir ra 7 tion al 
ir reg 7 u lar 
ir rel 7 e vant 



ir re li 7 gious 
ir res 7 o lute 
ir re spec 7 tive 
ir rev 7 er ent 
non-Sic' id 
non' age 
ram-con duct 7 or 
non-de liv 7 er y 
non-res' i dent 
non-ex ist 7 ence 
raw-pay 7 ment. 



LESSON 65.— Test Exercise. 

Same sounds spelled different ways. 



mus 7 cle 
tus 7 sle 


fri 7 ar 
bri 7 er 


in veigh 7 
sur vey 7 


bal 7 lad 
sal 7 ad 


isth 7 mus 
Christ 7 mas 


le 7 ver 
cleav 7 er 


plum 7 met 
sum 7 mit 


in ane 7 
or dain 7 


neu 7 ter 
pew 7 ter 


Brit 7 ish 
skit 7 tish 


pal 7 lid 
val 7 id 


chalk 7 y 
gawk 7 y 


neigh 7 bor 
na 7 tion 


doz 7 er 
pos 7 er 


neth 7 er 
weath 7 er 


clois 7 ter 
oys 7 ter 


bis 7 cuit 
bus 7 y 


bob 7 bin 
rob 7 in 


e nough 7 
re buff 7 


lee' ward 
lei 7 sure 


nick 7 el 
tick 7 le 


ef 7 fort 
eph 7 od 


rou tine 7 
un seen 7 


bul 7 ly 
pul 7 ley 


ra vine 7 
tu reen 7 


gram 7 mar 
stam 7 mer 


feu 7 dal 
pew 7 ter 


in cur 7 
in fer 7 



133 



LESSON 66.-Words Relating to Business, 



a' gent, ° ne acting for another. 

ac cept' ance, agreement to pay 
a bill of exchange. 

ac erne', to increase. 

ap prais' al, setting a price on. 

ad ver tise', to make known to 
the public. 

as sign ee', one to whom some- 
thing is given up. 

as sign 7 ment, act of assigning. 

a man n en' sis, one who writes 
what another dictates. 

a mass', to lay up. 

ad ven' ture, an enterprise of 
chance. 

ad vis' a ble, prudent. 

as' sets, what a man owns. 

at tach' ment, seizure by law. 

ap prox' i mate, to come near to. 

ar rears', behind in payment. 

bank' rupt cy, state of not being 
able to pay one's debts. 

bar' ter, to exchange. 

bul' le tin, public announcement. 

bus' i ness, trade ; employment. 

bond, a legal writing, binding a 
person to do certain things. ^^ 

bull' ion, silver or gold in a mass. 

com mis' sion, money allowed an 
agent. 

com' pen sate, to reward. 

chat tel, property. 

cop' y right, exclusive right to 
publish books. 

col lat' er al, security given with 
promise. 

cer til" i cate, a written testi- 
mony. 



cap' i tal ist, a man of property. 

cler' i cal, pertaining to a clerk or 
a copyist. 

com pe ti' tion, rivalry for the 
same object. 

col lect' i ble, capable of being col- 
lected. 

com' pro mise, settlement of dif- 
ficulties by mutual concessions. 

com pu ta' tion, calculation. 

con sign ee', a person to whom 
goods are delivered in trust. 

con sign' er, one who delivers 
goods in trust. 

con sign' ment, goods delivered 
in trust. 

cou' pon, an interest certificate 
attached to a bond. 

ere den' tial, that which estab- 
lishes confidence. 

cur' ren cy, that which is in circu- 
lation. 

cor po ra' tion, a body author- 
ized by law to act as a single per- 
son. 

cred' it or, one who gives credit. 

co op' er ate, to work for the same 
end. 

cus' tom-house, a place where 
duties are paid. 

d© pos' it, to lay away for safe 
keeping. 

de fray', to pay the expense of. 

debt' or, one who owes another. 

de fault' er, one who fails to ac- 
count for public money in his care. 

de fi' cien cy, failure. 

def ' i cit, deficiency. 



LESSON 67.— Words Relating to Business. 



de pre' ci ate, to lessen in value. 

dis burse', to pay out. 

dis crep' an cy, disagreement of 

accounts. 
dis so lu' tion, act of breaking up. 



in dent' ure, a written agreement. 
in dem' ni fy, to secure against 

future loss. 
in com' pe tent, incapable. 
im me' di ate, done at once. 



134 



draw ee', one to whom an order 
or a bill of exchange is addressed. 

draw' er, one who draws an order 
or a bill of exchang,. 

de fal ca' tion, abstraction of 
mone}^. 

ex' ports, things sent out of a 
country. 

en' ter prise, something under- 
taken. 

em ploy e', a person emploj'ed. 

em ploy' er, one who employs. 

em po' ri um,a commercial center. 

fi nan' ces, money ; income. 

fi nan' cial, relating to money mat- 
ters 

fi nan cier', a person skilled in 
money matters. 

flue' tn ate, to be unsteady. 

freight, cargo. 

frand' u lent, dishonest. 

for' feit, to lose the right to. 

fore clos' lire, depriving of the 
right to redeem mortgaged prop- 
erty. 

guar an tee', to make sure. 

gaug' ing, estimating the capacity 
of. 

in dem' ni ty, compensation for 
loss. 

in' voice, a bill of particulars sent 
with merchandise. 



in debt' ed, under obligations. 
in sol' vent, unable to pay one's 

debts. 
in dorse' ment, writing one's 

name on the back of. 
in' ven to ry, a list of goods. 
in vest' ment, act of laying out 

money. 
in fringe' ment, act of breaking. 
job' ber, one who buys from im- 
porters and sells to retailers. 
lease, to rent, or let. 
lien, a claim. 
les see', one to whom a lease is 

given. 
la' ding, cargo ; freight. 
li a bil' i ty, what one owes. 
li' qui date, to settle ; to pay. 
li' cense, permission. 
mer' can tile, relating to business. 
mer' cban dise, goods. 
mo nop' o ly, sole power to deal 

in certain articles. 
mem o ran' dum, a record. 
mort' gage , a pledge for debt. 
ma tur' i ty, time when a note is 

due. , 
ne go' ti a ble, capable of being 

transferred by endorsement to 

another person. 
part' ner ship, association in 

business. 



LESSON 68.-Words Relating to Business. 



pat' ent, an exclusive right. 

pa' tron, one who supports or pro- 
tects. 

pe cu' ni a ry, relating to money. 

pay ee', one to whom money is 
paid. 

pay' er, one who pays. 

pay' a ble, justly due. 

prom' is so ry, containing a prom- 
ise. 

pro por' tion, a certain share. 

pro pri' e tor, an owner. 

pur' chas er, one who buys. 

prin' ci pal, chief; important. 



per cent' age, a certain rate on a 
hundred. 

rat' i fy, to approve and make 
binding. 

re ceipt', a written acknowledg- 
ment of payment. 

re ceiv' a ble, capable of being re- 
ceived. 

re ceiv' er, one who receives. 

re mu' ner ate, to pay for services. 

re mit' tance, act of sending money . 

re sourc' es, funds ; means. 

re spect' ive ly, relating to each 
one separate!}'. 



135 



rec' ti ry, to make right. 

re bate' to deduct. 

re deem' a ble, capable of being 
purchased back. 

ref ' er enc es, persons of whom in- 
quiries can be made. 

rec' om pense, to re-ward. 

sure' ty, security against loss. 

sal' a ble, in good demand. 

snip' ment, goods shipped. 

so He' it, to ask for. 

solv' ent, able to pay one's debts. 

seiz' a ble, can be taken. 

sur' plus, more than is needed. 

se cur'i ty, a surety for another. 

syn' di catena body of persons or- 
ganized to promote some object. 

sec' re ta ry, one employed to 
write for another. 



scheme, a plan ; a design. 

stip' u late, to bargain ; to agree. 

sti' pend, settled pay. 

swin' die, to cheat. 

trans ac' tion, that -which is done. 

tar' iff, duty on goods. 

traf ' fie, trade. 

tes ti mo' nial, a favorable account 

of a person. 
u' su ry, illegal interest. 
u su' ri ous, practicing usury. 
us' u rer, one practicing usury. 
val' id, founded in truth. 
wares, goods. 
■war' rant, authority by which an 

officer arrests an offender. 
■whole' sale, by the large quantity. 
wharf age, money paid for the 

use of a wharf. 



. LESSON 69.— Derivatives, 



1. The suffixes ment, ion and ation mean the act of. 

2. The suffixes ity and ness mean the state of being. 

3. Define each word. 



Add ment. 
ad journ 7 
a. chieve 7 
in vei 7 gle 
de vel 7 op 
a bol 7 ish 
as cer tain" 
em bar 7 rass 
en vel 7 op 
in ter 7 
be guile 7 
en eroach 7 
pro cure" 
in dorse 7 
ar raign 7 
in vest 7 
en chant 7 
con ceal 7 
Add ion. 
ded 7 i cate 
ex 7 pi ate 
pros 7 trate 
ex cul 7 pate 
de pre 7 ci ate 



cog 7 i tate 
e nun 7 ci ate 
ac cu 7 mu late 
re sus 7 ci tate 
an tic 7 i pate 
e lira 7 i nate 
ex ten 7 u ate 
il lus 7 trate 
demon's trate 
dis cuss 7 
re fleet 7 
as serf 
con struct 7 
re press 7 
Add ation. 
con sid 7 er 
in still 7 
re f ute 7 
ex hort 7 
per turb 7 
con demn 7 
trans pire 7 
ex pire 7 
ac cuse/ 



com pure 7 
im port 7 
ex port 7 
in spire 7 
con suit 7 
trans form' 
at test 7 
an nex 7 
affect 7 
ce ment 7 
conjure 7 
de cant 7 
Add ity. 
stu 7 pid 
ran 7 cid 
rap 7 id 
squal 7 id 
joe 7 und 
flac 7 cid 
vap 7 id 
hos 7 tile 
bru 7 tal 
ma 7 jor 
hu 7 mid 



plac' id 
na 7 tive 
due 7 tile 
pri 7 or 
ve 7 nal 
fu 7 tile 
Add ness. 
sup 7 pie 
dis tinct 7 
ten 7 der 
com 7 bat ive 
au 7 di ble 
nar 7 row 
o 7 pen 
ex 7 quis ite 
hid 7 e ous 
sed 7 u lous 
e gre 7 gious 
so no' rous 
un us 7 u al 
bois 7 ter ous 
se 7 ri ous 
gen 7 u ine 
ti 7 dy. 



136 



LESSON 70.— Relating to Law, 



ac en sa' tion, charging with an 
offense. 

ad min is tra' tor, one to whom 
the right of management has been 
given. 

a"b' ro gate, to annul; to repeal. 

ac ces' so ry, one who unites in a 
crime. 

af fi da' vit, a statement in writing, 
signed and made upon oath before 
a magistrate. 

al' i bi, state of being in another 
place when a crime was com- 
mitted. 

al' ien, a foreigner. 

al' i mo ny, an allowance to a wife 
out of her husband's estate, for 
her support. 

al lege', to assert. 

a me' na ble, answerable. 

an nn' i ty, a sum of money pay- 
able yearly for a term of years. 

an mil', to make of no effect. 

ap peal', to remove a cause from 
an inferior to a superior court. 

ap praise', to estimate the worth 
of. 

ar' "bi tra ry, depending on mere 
will. 

ar raign', to call to answer in 
court. 

at tor' ney, one legally appointed 
by another to transact any busi- 
ness for him. 

bar' ris ter, a lawyer admitted to 
plead at the bar. 

bar, the legal profession. 

bail' iff, a sheriff's deputy. 

brief, an abridgment of a client's 



bail' a ble, capable of being set 
free on giving security to appear 
on a certain day and place. 

be quest', something left in a will. 

claim' ant, one who claims some- 
thing. 

clem' en cy, indulgence ; mildness. 



e' diet, a special proclamation of 
command. 

ex ec' u tor, the person appointed 
by a testator to execute his will 
after death. 

ex ec' u trix, a female executor. 

ex' pi ate, to atone for. 

fi' at, a decree. 

gal' lows, an instrument for hang- 
ing criminals. 

guard' i an, one -who has charge of 
the person and property of a 
minor. 

guilt' y, criminal. 

ha' be as cor' pus, a writ to in- 
quire into the cause of a person's 
imprisonment or detention. 

ber' i tage, that which is gotten 
by inheritance. 

il le' gal, not lawful. 

in her' i tance, an estate which a 
man receives by descent, as heir. 

in tes' tate, dving without a will. 

ju di' cial, pertaining to a court of 
justice. 

ju ris die' tion, legal authority. 

ju' rist, one versed in law. 

leg' is late, to make laws. 

le git' i mate, in accordance with 
law. 

lit' i gant, one engaged in a law- 
suit. 

lit i ga' tion, a suit at law. 

mort' gage, conveyance of prop- 
erty as security for debt. 

no' ta ry, a public officer who at- 
tests legal writings. 

non' suit, a failure to follow up a 
suit. 

nul' li fy, to make void. 

out' law, one deprived of the pro- 
tection of the law. 

plain' tiff, one who commences a 
suit. 

pet' ti fog ger,a lawyer who deals 
in small cases. 

pen' al ty, punishment. 



137 



cor' O ner, an officer whose duty it 
is to inquire into the cause of any- 
sudden death. 

coxin sel, one who gives advice in 
legal matters. 

code, a collection of laws. 

chi can' er y, unfair trickery to 
perplex a cause. 

cli' ent, one who applies to a law- 
yer for advice. 

cod' i cil, something added to a 
will. 

de fend' ant, the party that op- 
poses a complaint in court. 

dep o si' tion, testimony in writing, 
under oath. 

de po' nent, one who gives a depo- 
sition. 

ex ec' u tive, carrying into effect. 



pet' it (pet' ty) , small. 

slier' iff, chief officer of a county. 

sub pee' na, an order for a witness 

to attend court. 
tech ni cal' i ty, that which is 

specially appropriate to any art, 

science, &c. 
tes' ta ment, a will. 
tes' ti mo ny, affirmation ; proof. 
tri bu' nal, a court of justice. 
val' id, legally strong. 
ven' ue, the place where an action 

is laid. 
ve' to, to prohibit. 
ver' i fy, to prove to be true. 
void, having no force. 
ver' diet, a decision. 
vouch' er, a person or a paper to 

establish facts of any kind. 



LESSON 71.— Latin Phrases. 



ad lib' Hum, at pleasure. 

ad infin' itum, to an unlimited 

extent. 
ad valo' rem, according to the 

value. 
bo' nafi' de, in good faith. 
defac' to, in fact. 
deju' re, by right. 
De' o wlen' te, God willing. 
ex offi / cio, by virtue of the 

office. 
fae sim' He, an exact copy. 
in stat' ua quo, in its former 

state. 
in to' to, entirely. 
ip / se dix' it, mere assertion. 
mo' dus operan' di, manner of 

operating. 
muV turn in par' vo, much in a 

small space. 



ne plus uV tra, nothing beyond. 

no' lens vo' lens, willing or not. 

per se, by itself. 

per an' num, by the year. 

pro bono pub' lico, for the pub- 
lic good. 

per cen' turn, by the hundred. 

pro et con, for and against. 

per di' em, by the day. 

pro ra / ta, in proportion. 

post mor' tern, after death. 

quid pro quo, an equivalent. 

sub ro' sa, under cover ; se- 
cretly. 

si' ne di' e, without naming 
the day. 

sum / mum bo' num, the chief 
good. 

tern' pusfu' git, time flies. 

m' ce ver' sa., the order reversed. 



LESSON 72.-Relating to Navigation. 



anch' or 
a board' 
bow 7 sprit 
barge 
ca noe' 
frig' ate 



flo til' la 
fore' cas tie 
gal' ley 
gon' do la 
gon do lier' 
lee' side 



lar' board 
mar' i time 
ma ri'ne' 
na' val 
nav' i ga tor 
nau' ti cal 



pin 7 nace 
star' board 
shal' lop 
sloop 
stern 
yacht. 



138 



LESSON 73.— Terms Used in ffanking, 



bonds 7 man 
cap 7 i tal 
cash ier 7 
com 7 pound 
cer 7 ti fied 



dol 7 lars 
draft 
dis 7 count 
de pos 7 i tor 
div 7 i dend 



gen 7 u ine 
im 7 i tate 
i den 7 ti fy 
pro 7 test 
pay 7 ment 



re deem 7 
stock' hold er 
stan 7 dard 
trans 7 fer 
treas 7 ur er 



cir cu la 7 tion green 7 backs pres 7 i dent tell 7 er 



LESSON 74.— Derivatives, 



Adj. 


Nouns. 


Adj. 


Nouns. 


ag 7 ile 


a gil 7 i ty 


su preme 7 


su prem 7 a cy 


sim 7 pie 


sim plic 7 i ty 


apt 


apt 7 i tude 


o paque 7 


o pac 7 i ty 


wide 


width 


anx 7 ious 


anx i 7 e ty 


high 


height 


pro found 7 


profun 7 dity 


crude 


crud' i ty 


strong 


strength 


scarce 


scar 7 ci ty 


pi 7 ous 


pi 7 e ty 


fer 7 vid 


fer 7 vor 


splen 7 did 


splen 7 dor 


cal 7 lous 


cal los 7 i ty 


fra 7 grant 


fra 7 grance 


gen teel 7 


gen til 7 i ty 


warm 


warmth 


sub lime 7 


sub lim 7 i ty 


moist 


moist 7 ure 


tep 7 id 


te pid 7 i ty 


false 


fals 7 i ty 


ob scene 7 


ob seen 7 i ty 


broad 


breadth 


doc 7 ile 


do cil 7 i ty 


vain 


van 7 i ty 


chaste 


chas 7 ti ty 


brief 


brev 7 i ty 


sane 


san 7 i ty 


dense 


den 7 si ty 


in ert 7 


in er 7 ti a 


sin cere 7 


sin cer 7 i ty. 


de 7 cent 


de 7 cen cy 


LESSON 75.-Relati 


ng to Letter- 1 


Writing. 



ad dress', the name and title of 

the person written to. 
cor re spon' dent, one who writes 

to another. 
cor re spon' dence, the letters 

passed between persons. 
con clu' sion, the end. 
en' vel ope, the wrapper of a letter. 
e ras' nre, rubbing out. 
form' al, done in regular form. 
in for' mal, without ceremony. 
in ter line', to write between 

written lines. 
leg i toil' i ty, state of being easily 

read. 



post' script, something written 

after the letter is supposed to have 

been finished. 
pe rus' al, reading with some care. 
par' a graph, a division of written 

discourse. 
res' i dence, place where one lives. 
so' cial, relating to society. 
seal, to fasten ; to stick. 
su per scrip' tion, the address on 

the envelope. 
sal u ta' tion, the term of affection 

or respect with which a person is 

addressed. 
sig' na ture, the name signed. 



139 

LESSON 76 —Terms Used in Express, Post-Office, Tele 
graph and Insurance Affairs. 



Express. 
ex press / man 
par 7 eel 
per' ish a ble 
weight 
dam 7 aged 
dis 7 tance 
de layed 7 
pack 7 age 
tam 7 pered 
tran 7 sit 
re ceipt 7 ed 
offi 7 cial 
wax-seal 
se cure 7 ly 



Post-Office. 
cir 7 cu lar 
car 7 ri er 
de liv 7 er y 
e va 7 sion 
for 7 ward 
mail 

mag a zine 7 
mon 7 ey-or der 
post 7 age 
post 7 mas ter 
reg 7 is tered 
reg 7 is try 
spe 7 cial 
wrap 7 per 



Telegraph. 
tel 7 e gram 
mes 7 sage 
op 7 er a tor 
ex 7 tra 
ad di 7 tion al 
con dense 7 
im por 7 tant 
spec 7 i fled 
au 7 thor ized 
mes 7 sen ger 
te leg 7 ra phy 
cen 7 tral 
bat 7 ter y 
wired 



Insurance. 
pre 7 mi um 
pol 7 i cy 
ac 7 ci dent 
rec 7 ord 
prop 7 er ty 
sta tis 7 tics 
vi cin 7 i ty 
mu 7 tu ai 
mor tal 7 i ty 
de ceased 7 
ben e fi 7 ci a ry 
ben 7 e fit ed 
per 7 son al 
re serve 7 . 



LESSON 77.— Relating to Disposition. 



af ' fa "ble, pleasant ; courteous. 

"be nig' nant, kind ; gracious. 

be nev' o lent, having a disposi- 
tion to do good. 

cap' tious, apt to find fault. 

chol' er ic, easily irritated ; angry. 

cyn' i cal, captious ; snarling. 

doc' ile, teachable. 

ex as' per at ing, provoking. 

frac' tious, peevish ; snappish. 

mis an' thro pist, a hater of man- 
kind. 

mer cu' ri al, full of vigor. 

op' ti mist, one who holds that 
everything happens for the best. 



phi Ian' thro pist, a lover of man- 
kind. 

phleg mat' ic, dull ; heavy. 

pes' si mist, one who is inclined 
to take the most unfavorable view 
of things. 

pee' vish, fretful ; cross.* 

per verse', disposed to cross and 
vex others. 

pet' u lant, inclined to complain. 

san' guine, full of hope. 

splen e' tic, inclined to anger or 
melancholy. 

tes' ty, peevish ; fretful. 

vin die' tive, revengeful. 



LESSON 78.— Relating to Music. 



ac com' pa ni ment, that which 
accompanies. 

ac com' pa uist, one who accom- 
panies. 

hal' lad, a simple song. 

car' ol, a song of mirth or joy. 

choir, an organized company of 
singers. 

chor' is ter, a leader of a choir. 



in to na' tion, act of sounding the 
tones of the musical scale. 

min' strel, a singer and a harper. 

mu si' cian, one skilled in music. 

of fer to ry, a piece sung while 
offerings are being taken up. 

op' er a, a musical drama. 

or a to' ri o, a sacred drama set to 
music. 



140 



chan' try, a chapel where masses 
are celebrated for the souls of the 
donors of the chapel. 

clio' rus, a company of singers. 

can ta' ta, a poem set to music. 

con tral' to, part sung by the 
lowest female voice. 

cym' bal, a musical instrument. 

cho' ral, belonging to a choir. 

dn ef, a composition for two per- 
formers. 

fan ta' si a, a musical composition 
not governed by the ordinary 
rules of music. 

fi na' le (fe nah la), end of a piece of 
music. 

gui tar', a stringed instrument. 

harp' er, one who performs on a 
harp. 



or' clies tra a band of instru- 
mental musicians. 

pi a' no, a keyed musical instru- 
ment. 

quar tette', a composition for four 
performers. 

rec i ta tive', a musical recitation. 

ser e nade', music in the open air 
at night. 

so' lo, a strain played by a single 
instrument or sung by a single 
voice. 

tri' O, a composition for three per- 
formers 

sym' pho ny, an elaborate instru- 
mental composition for a full 
orchestra. 

vol' nn ta ry, an anthem sung at 
the opening of religious service. 



LESSON 79.— COlor and Appearance. 



az 7 ure 
brin 7 died 
chest 7 nut 
crim 7 son 
car 7 mine 
dap 7 pled 
eb' on 



freck 7 led 
flor 7 id 
griz 7 zled 
ha 7 zel 
mot 7 tied 
ma roon 7 
ma gen 7 ta 



mauve 
o 7 cher 
o 7 chre 
ol 7 ive 
pie 7 bald 
pied 
rus 7 set 



si en' na 
sor 7 rel 
taw 7 ny 
um 7 ber 
ver 7 dant 
ver mil 7 ion 
va 7 ri e gat ed. 



LESSON 80.— Pertaining to Worship. 



ad o ra' tion, worship. 

al' tar, a place of sacrifice. 

ben e die' tion, blessing. 

clois' ter, a place of seclusion 
from the world. 

ca the' dral, principal church in a 
diocese. 

Chris' tian, a believer in Christ. 

con' vent, a place for nuns or 
monks. 

com mn' ni cant, one who par- 
takes of the Lord's supper. 

con' se crate, to hold sacred. 

chap' el, a small place of worship. 

di' o cese, district of a bishop's 
authority. 



Mos'lem, a believer in Mohammed. 

miii' is ter, the pastor of a church. 

min' ster, a church which has a 
monastery attached. 

mosque, a Mohammedan place of 
worship. 

mis' sion a ry, one sent out espe- 
cially to spread a religion. 

mon' as ter y, a house of retire- 
ment for monks. 

or' tho dox, according to the true 
faith. 

prayer, supplication to God. 

pe ti' tion, a request. 

pas' tor, a minister of the gospel. 

pa go' da, a heathen temple. 



141 



dec' a logne, the ten command- 
ments. 

der' vish, a Turkish or Persian 
monk. 

dev o tee', one who has wholly 
devoted himself. 

dis ci' pie, a follower; a learner. 

dox ol' o gy, a short hymn of 
praise to God. 

gen u flee' tion, act of bending 
the knee in worship. 

e van' gel ist, a preacher having 
charge of no particular church. 

het' er o dox y, doctrine con- 
trary to the true faith. 

horn' age, worship ; respect. 

hy poc' ri sy, a pretense of good- 
ness. 

in vo ca' tion, act of addressing 
in prayer. 

in' fi del, a disbeliever in Christi- 
anity. 

ho' ran, the sacred book of the 
Mohammedans. 



pa' gan, a worshiper of idols. 
prov i den' tial, caused by divine 

providence. 
psalm' ist, a writer of sacred 

songs. 
Prof est ant, one who protests 

against the Roman Catholic 

church. 
re lig' ious, pertaining to religion. 
re pent' ance, sorrow for sin. 
rev' er end, worthy of reverence. 
sup pli ca' tion, humble request 

or prayer. 
sac' ri fice, an offering to God. 
sac ri fi' cial, pertaining to sacri- 
fices. 
Script' tire, the Bible. 
shrine, an altar. 
tem' pie, a place of worship. 
tab' er na cle, a slightly-built 

structure, formerly the Jewish 

temple. 
wor' ship, religious reverence or 



LESSON 81.— Words Derived From Proper Nouns. 

Such words should always be written with capitals. 



A mer 7 i can 



Af ' ri can 

A si at' ic 

Aus trar ian 

An dalu / si an Dan 7 ish 

Aus' tri an Eu ro pe' an 



Bel' gi an 
Cor 7 si can 
Ca na' di an 
Co re' an 



Gen 7 o ese 
I tal' i an 
Jap an ese 7 
Ja va nese 7 
Nor we 7 gi an 
Por 7 tu gese 



Prus 7 sian 
Pe ru 7 vi an 
Rus 7 sian 
Si be' ri an 
Scan di na'vi an 
Scot 7 tish. 



LESSON 82.— Relating to Death. 



as sas' si nate, to kill by secret 
assault. 

corpse, a dead body. 

car' cass, decayed remains of a 
body. 

cent' e ter y, a place where the 
dead are buried. 

cat a falque', a temporary struct- 
ure used in funeral solemnities. 

ca dav' er ous, pallid ; resembling 
a corpse. 

de cay', act of giving way to de- 
struction. 



hearse, a carriage for carrying the 
dead. 

mur' der, to kill a human being. 

mor' tal, subject to death. 

morgue, a place where dead bodies 
are exposed to be identified. 

man so le' urn, a splendid tomb or 
monument. 

mat' ri cide, the murder or mur- 
derer of a mother. 

nee' ro man cy, act of pretending 
to tell the future by communi- 
cating with the dead. 



142 



de cease', death. 

e lee tro cu'tion, putting to death 

by electricity. 
ep' i taph, an inscription on a 

tombstone. ; 
ex e cu' tion, the act of putting- to 

death. 
fu' ner al, ceremonies attending a 

burial. 
fu ne' re al, suitable to a funeral. 
frat' ri cide, the murder or the 

murderer of a brother. 
Ha' des, the abode of the dead. 



o bit' u a ry, a biographical notice 

of the death of a person. 
pat' ri cide, the murder or the 

murderer of a father. 
par' ri cide, the murder or the 

murderer of a father, mother, 

child or near relative. 
re' qui em, a hymn for the dead. 
su' i cide, self-murder. 
sep' ul cher, a tomb. 
shroud, a garment for the dead. 
urn, a vessel formerly used to hold 

the ashes of the dead. 



LESSON 83.— Synonyms. 

Use synonyms of the italicized words. 



1. The storm has abated. 

2. He stands an abased wretch 

3. He is a most skilful work- 

man. 

4. This is an abridged edition 

of the book. 

5. I abominate such low amuse- 

ments. 

6. He was an accomplice in the 

act. 

7. His power is absolute. 

8. Abundant rains water our 

country. 

9. His words were most 

abusive. 



10. He has accumulated a for- 

tune. 

11. He was actuated by pure 

motives. 

12. He is an adept in all me- 

chanical arts. 

13. His adherents deserted him. 

14. Listen well to the admoni- 

tions of the old. 

15. His adversary overcame 

him. 

16. His manners are most 
affable. 

They live in affluence. 
Wrangling alienates friends. 



sub sid / ed, di min 7 ished. 
de grad 7 ed, dis graced 7 , 
in gen 7 i ous, dex 7 ter ous. 
con tract 7 ed, short 7 ened. 
de test 7 , loathe, 
as sist 7 ant, ac ces 7 so ry. 
un lim 7 i ted, des pot 7 ic. 
co 7 pi ous, plen 7 ti ful. 
in suit 7 ing, of fen 7 sive. 



17 

18, 

a massed 7 , col lect 7 ed. 

im pelled 7 , in 7 sti gat ed. 

ex 7 pert. 

fol 7 low ers, par 7 ti sans. 

ad vice 7 , coun 7 sel. 

op po 7 nent, an tag 7 o nist. 

pleas 7 ant, cour 7 te ous. 

wealth, op 7 u lence. 

es trang 7 es, sep 7 a rates. 



LESSON 84,— Relating to Arms and War, 

ar' se nal, place where arms are en' e my, one who hates another. 

stored or manufactured. foe' man, one who is fighting 
ar' mo ry, a place where arms are against another. 

kept. how' itz er, a small, light cannon. 

ar ma' da, a fleet of armed ships. in im' i cal, unfriendly ; warlike. 



143 



ar' mis tice, a temporary peace. 

bay' o net, a long, sharp instru- 
ment fitted to a gun. 

bill' lets, small balls fired from a 
gun. 

can' non, a large instrument for 
throwing balls. 

car'tridge,a charge for a fire-arm. 

cal' u met, the Indian pipe of 
peace. 



mil' i ta ry, pertaining to soldiers 
and war. 

mar' tial, pertaining to -war. 

pa role', word of honor. 

pa rade', military display. 

reg' i ment, a body of men, usually 
consisting of ten companies, com- 
manded by a colonel. 

trnce, temporary peace. 

wea' pon, instrument for fighting. 



LESSON 85.— Test Exercise, 



ac cede' 
pro ceed' 
pre cede 7 
in ter cede 7 
ex ceed' 
su per sede 7 
flax 7 seed 
lin 7 seed 
ret 7 ro cede 
re cede 7 



as perse 7 
co erce 7 
con verse 7 
a raerce 7 
dis burse 7 
in verse 7 
dis perse 7 
ac curse 7 
com 7 merce 
im' merse 



pal 7 ace 
dial 7 ice 
sol 7 ace 
treat 7 ise 
me trop 7 o lis 
pop 7 u lace 
pro bos 7 cis 
av 7 a rice 
ar 7 ti fice 
pin 7 nace 



fu 7 gi tive 
de riv 7 a tive 
in tu 7 i tive 
im per 7 a tive 
con serv 7 a tive 
in quis 7 i tive 
in die 7 a tive 
in tran 7 si tive 
sen 7 si tive 
prim 7 i tive. 



LESSON 86.— Relating to Wealth and Poverty. 



a bun' dance, a great plenty. 

af ' flu ence, wealth. 

beg' gar y, condition of a beggar. 

com' pe tence, a sufficiency. 

des' ti tnte, needy ; in want. 

des ti tu' tion, state of being very 
poor. 

fort' u nate, lucky. 

in' di gent, destitute of neces- 
sities. 

in' di gence, state of being very 
needy. 

l' mon, riches ; god of wealth. 



mon' ey less, without money. 
men' di cant, a beggar. 
men' di can cy, beggary. 
need' i ness, state of being in 

need. 
ne ces' si tons, very needy. 
op' u lence, wealth. 
pen' u ry, extreme poverty. 
plen' ti ful, ample. 
pau' per i 

pauper. 
pov' er ty, state of being poor. 
pri va' tion, want. 



condition of a 



LESSON 87.— Derivatives. 



Nouns. 
ca pac 7 i ty 
de lir 7 i um 
en thu 7 si asm 
pan e gyr 7 ic 
prov 7 ince 
in 7 flu ence 



Adj. Nouns. 

ca pa 7 cious syl 7 la ble 
de lir 7 i ous ath 7 lete 
en thu si as 7 tic cal 7 um ny 
pan e gyr 7 i cal af fir ma 7 tion 
pro vin 7 cial ne ga 7 tion 
in flu en 7 tial maj 7 es ty 



Adj. 
syl lab 7 ic 
ath let 7 ic 
ca lum 7 ni ous 
affirm 7 a tive 
neg 7 a tive . 
ma jes 7 tic 



144 



a ro 7 ma 
ca lam' i ty 
Her 7 cu les 
ter 7 ri to ry 
e ter 7 ni ty 
syn 7 tax 
prov 7 erb 
glu 7 ten 
glut 7 ton 
col 7 lo quy 



ar o mat 7 ic 
ca lam 7 i tous 
Her cu 7 le an 
ter ri to 7 ri al 
e ter 7 nal 
syn tac 7 tic 
pro verb 7 i al 
glu 7 ti nous 
glut 7 ton ous 
col lo 7 qui al 



am 7 pli tude 
pro 7 noun 
cat 7 e go ry 
in dig na 7 tion 
ev a nes 7 cence 
col 7 umn 
cyl 7 in der 
ec 7 sta sy 
cour 7 te sy 
youth 



am 7 pie 
pro nom 7 i nal 
cat e gor 7 i cal 
in dig 7 nant 
ev a nes 7 cent 
colum 7 nar 
cy lin 7 dri cal 
ec stat 7 ic 
cour 7 te ous 
youth 7 ful 



LESSON 88.— Relating to Movement. 



ac eel' er ate, to quicken. 

Co' ma, a .state of drowsy dullness. 

ex' pe dite, to hasten. 

ex pe di' tious, speedy ; quick. 

fa tigue', weariness. 

lias' ten, to be quick. 

in er' ti a, indisposition to move. 

la'zi ness, state of being lazy. 

Ian' gnor, heaviness of feeling. 

las' si tude, languor of body or 

mind. 
lithe, active ; graceful. 
leth' ar gy, dullness. 
pro gres' sion, going forward. 



pre cip' i tate, to throw head- 
long. 

pro ceed', to go on. 

pro ces' sion, a train of persons. 

re cede', to move backward. 

ret' ro grade, to go backward. 

ret ro gres' sion, act of retro- 
grading. 

re tard', to hinder the progress of. 

sta' tion a ry, not movable. 

sup' pie, active. 

tor' por, dullness. 

tor' tu ous, winding in and out. 

wea' ri ness, state of being tired. 



LESSON 89.-Relating to Education, 



a lum' nus, a graduate of a college. 

a cad' e my, a place of education 
of middle rank. 

Al' ma Ma' ter, college where one 
is educated. 

bac ca lau' re ate, degree of Bach- 
elor of Arts. 

col le' gi ate, pertaining to a col- 
lege. 

cur ric' u lum, a prescribed course 
of study. 

dis cip lin a' ri an, one who en- 
forces strict discipline. 

ed u ca' tion, act of educating. 

fac' ul ty, professors in a college. 

grad' u ate, to admit to an aca- 
demical degree. 

in struc' tion, act of instructing. 



pe dan' tic, making a show of 
learning. 

ped' a gogue (gog), a school- 
master. 

ped' ant ry, a boastful display of 
learning. 

ped a gog' ics, science of teaching. 

pre cep' tor, a teacher. 

rec i ta' tion, act of reciting. 

stu' di ous, given to study. 

sci en tif ' ic, relating to science. 

stu' dent, one engaged in study. 

soph' o more, one belonging to the 
second class in an American col- 
lege. 

sem' i na ry, an institution of edu- 
cation. 

schol' ar, a learner. 



145 



knowl' edge, information. 
lit er a' ti, men of learning. 
ly ce' lim, a literary association. 
moil' i tor, one who admonishes. 
Men' tor, a wise counselor. 



sa lu ta' to ry, an opening oration. 

tu i' tion, money paid for instruc- 
tion. 

val e die' to ry, a farewell ad- 
dress. 



LESSON 90.— Irregular Plurals. 



ar. 



ax' is 
a nal 7 y sis 
au to in ' a ton 
ar ca 7 num 
ap pen 7 clix 
ba 7 sis 
ban 7 dit 
cri te 7 ri on 
cri 7 sis 
calx 
cher 7 ub 
da 7 turn 



Plural. 
ax 7 es 
a nal 7 y ses 
au torn 7 a ta 
ar ca, 7 na 
ap pen 7 di ces 
ba 7 ses 
ban dit 7 ti 
cri te 7 ri a 
cri 7 ses 
cal 7 ces 
cher 7 u bim 
da 7 ta 



Singular. 
er ra 7 turn 
el lip 7 sis 
fo 7 cus 
ge 7 nns 
ge 7 ni us 
mi nu 7 ti a 
ma 7 gus 
o a 7 sis 

phenomenon 
ra 7 di us 
ser 7 aph 
stra 7 turn 



Plural. 
er ra 7 ta 
el lip 7 ses 
fo 7 ci 
gen 7 e ra 
ge 7 ni i 
mi nu 7 ti ae 
ma 7 gi 
o a 7 ses 
phe nom 7 e na 
ra 7 di i 
ser 7 a phini 
stra 7 ta. 



LESSON 91 —Relating to Pictures and Sculpture. 



am' "bro type, a photographic 
picture taken on a prepared glass. 

art' ist, one who practises art. 

bust, statue or painting represent- 
ing the upper part of the body. 

con tour', outline. 

car toon', a design on paper. 

car' i ca ture, a figure exaggerat- 
ing the peculiarities of a person. 

Co los' sus, a gigantic statue. 

cos mo ra' ma, an exhibition of a 
number of drawings and paint- 
ings. 

da guerr' o type, a picture on a 
plate of silvered copper. 

daub' er, a coarse painter. 

du' pli cate, to make a copy of. 

em bossed', raised above the sur- 
face in ornamental figures. 

ea' sel, a stand for holding a pict- 
ure. 



lim' ner, one who paints in water 

colors. 
mod' el, something to be copied. 
niche, a recess within the thickness 

of a wall, for a statue. 
pan o ra' ma, a picture unrolled to 

pass continually before the spec- 
tator. 
pic tu resque', forming a pleasing 

picture. 
pal' ette, a tablet on which a 

painter mixes his paints. 
por' trait, an exact likeness of a 

person. 
pic to' ri al, pertaining to pictures. 
re lief , raised above a flat ground. 
stu' di o, the work-room of an 

artist. 
sculp' ture, cutting images from 

stone, wood, &c. 
xy log' ra pby, wood engraving. 



LESSON 92.-Synonyms. 



be gin 7 
bit 7 ter ness 
bod 7 i ly 



com mence 7 
ae 7 ri mo ny 
cor 7 po ral 



north 7 ern 
out 7 side 
o 7 ver flow 



hyper bo 7 re an 
ex te 7 ri or 
in un da 7 tion 



146 



bleed 7 ing 
east 7 ern 
e nough 7 
er 7 rand 
earth 7 ly 
heav 7 en ly 
in 7 ward 
keep 7 ing 
mean 7 ing 



hem 7 or rhage out live 7 



o ri ent 7 al 
suf fi 7 cient 
mes 7 sage 
ter res 7 tri al 
ce les 7 tial 
in ter 7 nal 
cus 7 to dy 



o' pen ing 

sweet 

sharp 

shock 

weak 

wor 7 thy 

will 7 ing ly 



signif ica 7 tion west 7 ern 



sur vive 7 
ap 7 er ture 
sac 7 cha rine 
ac 7 rid 

con cus 7 sion 
de bil 7 i tat ed 
mer i to 7 ri ous 
vol un ta 7 ri ly 
oc ci dent 7 al 



LESSON 93.— Relating to Poetry. 



a cros' tic, a composition in which 
the first letter of every line assists 
in forming a word or sentence. 

blank verse, poetry without 
rhyme. 

coup' let, two lines of verse rhym- 
ing. 

di' a lect, local form of a language. 

dog' ger el, irregular verse. 

ep' ic, a heroic poem. 

el' e gy, a mournful poem ; a fune- 
ral song. 

lyr' ic, appropriate for song. 

ode, a lyric poem. 

pas' to ral, a poem describing the 
life of shepherds. 



po et lau' re ate, a poet employed 
to compose poems for special pub- 
lic occasions. 

pros' o dy, the treatment of sylla- 
bles, accent and versification. 

rhyme, a word answering in sound 
to another. 

rhythm, movement in regularly 
accented syllables. 

scan' ning, dividing verse into 
regularly accented syllables. 

stall' za, a number of lines of poetry. 

trip' let, three lines of poetry 
rhyming. 

ver si fi ca' tion, the art of com- 
posing poetic verse. 



LESSON 94.— Derivatives. 



Nouns. 

o 7 ce an 
dis cour 7 te sy 
syn 7 o nym 
Bi 7 ble 

in 7 dus try j] 

cir 7 cle 
pref 7 ace 
i 7 ron y 
e 7 qui nox 
es 7 sence 
ca price 7 
con 7 science 
vol 7 ume 
cau 7 tion 
mis 7 chief 



Adj. 
o cean 7 ic 
dis cour 7 te ous 
synonymous 
bib 7 li cal 
in dus 7 tri ous 
in dus 7 tri al 
cir 7 cu lar 
pref 7 a to ry 
i ron 7 i cal 
e qui noc 7 tial 
es sen 7 tial 
ca pri 7 cious 
conscien'tious 
vo lu 7 mi nous 
cau 7 tious 
mis 7 chiev ous 



Nouns. 
lux 7 u ry 
mir 7 a cle 
o 7 di um 
crit 7 ic 
frac 7 tion 
bur 7 glar 
cen 7 sor 
chem 7 is try 
vie 7 to ry 
ro mance 7 
pi 7 rate 
sci' ence 
en 7 er gy 
the 7 a ter 
char 7 i ty 
dis as 7 ter 



Adj. 
lux u 7 ri ous 
mi rac 7 u lous 
o 7 di ous 
crit 7 i cal 
frac 7 tion al 
bur gla 7 ri ous 
cen so 7 ri ous 
chem 7 i cal 
vie to 7 ri ous 
ro man 7 tic 
pi rat 7 i cal 
sci en tif 7 ic 
en er get 7 ic 
the at 7 ri cal 
char 7 i ta ble 
dis as 7 trous. 



147 



LESSON 95.— Relating to Diseases. 



aV scess, a collection of matter in 
an accidental cavity of the body. 

as phyx' i a, appai-ent death, or 
suspended animation. 

at' ro phy, a wasting away from 
lack of nourishment. 

bron chi' tis, inflammation of the 
bronchial membrane. 

ca tarrh', inflammation of the air 
passages of the head. 

chol' er a, a disease characterized 
by vomiting and purging and b}>- 
griping and spasms in the arms 
and legs. 

dys pep' si a, difficulty with diges- 
tion. 

diph the' ri a, a disease of the 
throat. 

er y sip' e las, a disease which 
causes inflammation of the skin. 



gan' grene, mortification of living 

flesh. 
hem' or rhage, a discharge of 

blood from the blood vessels. 
hie' cough, (kup), a spasmodic 

dra wing-in of the breath. 
lar yn gi' tis, a disease of the upper 

part of the windpipe. 
neu ral' gi a, a painful disease, 

which seems to be seated in a 

nerve. 
phar yn gi' tis, a disease of the 

cavity into which the nose and 

mouth open. 
pleu' ri sy, an inflammation of the 

throat and lungs. 
rheu' ma tism, an inflammation 

affecting the muscles and joints. 
sci' at i ca, a rheumatic affection 

of the hip joint. 



LESSON 96.— Pertaining to Medicine. 



sou.' O dyne, medicine which soothes 
pain. 

an' ti dote, that which counter- 
acts poison. 

an ti sep' tic, that which resists 
decay. 

al' ter a tive, a medicine which 
gently restores the healthy func- 
tions of the body. 

an aes thet' ic, that which pro- 
duces insensibility. 

as trin' gent, a medicine that 
causes contraction. 

a poth' e ca ry, one who prepares 
drugs. 

ar o mat' ic, a fragrant plant, 
having a warm, pungent taste. 

al lop' a thy, the ordinary practice 
of medicine. • 

ca thar' tic, a purgative medicine. 

de ter' gent, a medicine which 
cleanses the vessels or the skin. 

di ag no' sis, determination of a 



e met' ic, that which causes vomit- 
ing. 

ex pec' to rant, that which causes 
coughing and spitting. 

ep i dem' ic, a disease affecting a 
large number of persons at the 
same time. 

hy drop' a thy, treating disease by 
the use of pure water. 

ho nice op' a thy, practice of 
curing disease by a medicine 
which will cause the disease. 

hec' tic, constant ; habitual. 

lax' a tive, a gentle purgative. 

me die' i nal, pertaining to medi- 
cine. 

ma la' ri ous, pertaining to ma- 
laria. 

nar cot' ic, that which produces 
sleep. 

o' pi ate, that which causes sleep. 

stim' u lant, that which excites to 
action. 



148 

disease from symptoms shown. sed' a tive, that which soothes 

dis in feet' ant, that which irritation. 

cleanses from infection. su do rif ' ic, that which causes 

dis pen' sa ry, a place where med- sweat. 

icines are given free to the poor. ton' ic, that which strengthens. 

LESSON 97 —States, Territories and Capitals, 

State or Territory. Capital. Pop. of Cap. 

Al a ba 7 ma, Ala Mont gom 7 ery 21,883 

Ar 7 kan sas, Ark Lit 7 tie Rock 25,874 

Ar i zo 7 na Ter., Ariz. Ter Pres 7 cott 1,759 

A las 7 ka Ter., Alas' ka Ter Sit 7 ka 1,188 

Cal i for 7 ni a, Cal Sac ra men 7 to 26,386 

Con nect 7 icut, Conn Hart 7 ford 53,230 

Colo ra 7 do, Col Den 7 ver 10(5,713 

Del 7 a ware, Del Do 7 ver 3,061 

Flor 7 i da, Fla Tal la has 7 see 2,1)34 

Geor 7 gi a, Ga At Ian 7 ta 65,533 

I 7 da ho, I' da ho Boi se 7 Cit 7 y (boi za 7 ).... 2,311 

I 7 o wa,/a Des Moines (da) 50,003 

In di an 7 a, Ind In di a nap 7 o lis 105,430 

Illinois 7 , i# Spring' field 24,003 

In 7 di an Ter., Ind. Ter Tah 7 le quah 1,500 

Ken tvuik' y,Ky Frank 7 fort 7,892 

Kan 7 sas, Kan To pc 7 ka 31,007 

Lou is i a 7 na, La Ba 7 ton Rouge (roozh) 10,478 

Mas sa chu 7 setts, Mass Bos 7 ton 448,477 

Ma 7 ry land, Md An nap 7 o lis 6,000 

Maine, Me Au gus 7 ta 10,527 

Mis sou 7 ri, Mo Jef 7 fer son Cit 7 y 0,742 

Mis sis sip 7 pi, Miss Jack 7 son 5,020 

Min ne so 7 ta, Minn St. Paul 133,150 

Mich 7 i gan, Mich Lan 7 sing 13,102 

Mon ta 7 na, Mont Hel e 7 na 13,884 

New Hamp 7 shire, JSf. II. Con 7 cord 17,004 

New Jer 7 sey, N. J. Tren 7 ton 57,458 

Ne bras 7 ka, -Neb Lin 7 coin 55,154 

Ne va 7 da, Nev Car 7 son Cit 7 y 3,050 

North Car o li 7 na, N. C Ral 7 eigh 12,678 

New York, N. T APbany 94,923 

North Da ko 7 ta, N. Dak Bis 7 mark 2,186 

New Mex 7 i co Ter., N. Mex. :2V.. San 7 ta Fe (fa) 0,185 

O hi 7 o, Co lum 7 bus 88,150 

Or'egon, Or Sa 7 lem 2,000 

Ok la ho 7 ma Ter., Ok. Ter Guth 7 rie 8,000 

Penn syl va 7 ni a, Pa Har 7 ris burg 39,385 

RhndP Ts' lnnd 7? T f Prov 7 i dence 132,140 

Rhode Is land,^. 1 \New' port 10,437 

South Car o li 7 na, 8. C Co lum 7 bi a 15,353 



149 



South Da ko' ta, S. Dak Pi erre'(air) 3,200 

Tennessee 7 , Tenn Nash' ville 76,168 

Tex 7 as, Tex Aus' tin 14,476 

U'tahTer., U. Ter Salt Lake Cit 7 y 44,843 

Ver mont/, Vt Mont pe 7 lier 3,617 

Virgin 7 i a, Va Rich 7 m on d 81,388 

Wash 7 ing ton, Wash O lym / pi a 4,698 

West Vir gin 7 i a, W. Va Charles 7 ton 6,742 

Wis con 7 sin, Wis Mad 7 i son 13,426 

Wy 7 o ming, Wyo Chey enne 7 (shi en 7 ) 11,690 

LESSON 98.— Fifty Principal Cities of the United States 
in the Order of Their Rank— Census of 1890, 



Den 7 ver, Col 

Indianap 7 olis, Ind... 

Alleghe 7 ny, Pa 

Al' bany, N. Y 

Colum 7 bus, 

Syr 7 acuse, N. Y. 

Wor 7 cester, Mass 

Tole 7 do, 

Rich 7 mond, Va 

New Ha 7 ven, Conn.. 

Pat 7 erson, N. J. 

Low 7 ell, Mass 

Nash 7 ville, Tenn 

Scran 7 ton, Pa 

Fall River, Mass 

Cam 7 bridge, Mass.... 

Allan 7 ta, Ga 

Mem 7 phis. Tenn 

Wil 7 mington, Pel.... 

Day 7 ton, 

Troy, N. Y. 

Grand Rap 7 ids, Mich. 

Read 7 ing, Pa 

Cam 7 den, N. J. 

Tren 7 ton, N. J. 



LESSON 99.— Names of Sciences. 



New York, N. Y. 


1,515,301 


Chica"go, III 


1,099,850 


Philadel 7 phia, Pa 


1,046,964 


Brook 7 lyn, N. Y 


806,343 


St. Lou 7 is. Mo 


451,770 


Bos 7 ton, Mass 


448,477 


Bal 7 timore, Md 


434,439 


San Francis 7 co, Cal.. 


298,997 


Cincinnat 7 i, 


296,908 


Cleve 7 land, 


261,353 


Buffalo, N. Y 


255,664 


New Or 7 leans, La.... 


242,039 


Pitts 7 burg, Pa 


238,617 


Wash 7 ington, D. C. 


230,392 


Detroit 7 , Mich 


205,876 


Milwau 7 kee, Wis...... 


204,408 


New 7 ark,i^. J. 


181,830 


Mi n neap 7 olis, Minn.. 


164,738 


Jer 7 sey City, N. J.... 


163,003 


Lou 7 isville, Ky 


161,129 


O 7 maha, Neb 


140,452 


Roch 7 ester, N. Y. 


133,896 


St. Paul, Minn 


133,156 


Kan 7 sas City, Mo.... 


132,716 


Prov 7 i dence, R. I.... 


132,146 



106,713 
105,436 
105,287 
94,923 
88,150 
88,143 
84,655 
81,434 
81,388 
81,298 
78,347 
77,696 
76,168 
75,215 
74,398 
70,028 
65,533 
64,495 
61,431 
61,220 
60,956 
60,278 
58,661 
58,313 
57,458 



a cou' sties (a kow 

science of sounds. 



tiks), the phre nol' o gy, the theory that 
the mental faculties are shown on 

as trol' O gy, science of predicting the skull, 

events by the positions of the phi lol' o gy, study of language, 

stars. psy chol' o gy, science of the 

al' che my, an ancient science to powers of the human soul, 

change the baser metals into ph.o nog' ra phy, art of represent- 

gold. ng sounds by characters. 



150 



chro nol' O gy, science of time. 
eth nol' o gy, science of the races 

of man. 
et y mol o gy, science of the origin 

of words. 
en to mol' o gy, science of insects. 
ge ol' O gy, science of the structure 

of the earth. 
ich thy ol' o gy, sciences of fishes. 
my thol' o gy, science of fabulous 

persons and events. 
po mol' o gy, science of fruits. 
phys i ol' o gy, science of the 

organs of the human body. 



sten og' ra phy, art of writing in 
short-hand. 

tech nol' o gy, science of the use- 
ful arts. 

the ol' o gy, science which treats 
of God. 

ty pog' ra phy, art of printing. 

te leg' ra phy, science of commu- 
nicating by means of telegraph. 

to pog' ra phy, exact description 
in minute detail of any place or 
region. 

ZO ol' o gy, that part of natural 
history that treats of animals. 



LESSON lOO.-Chemical Terms. 



a ce 7 tic 


hy' dro gen 


ni 7 trie 


prus 7 sic 


ar 7 sen ic 


i 7 o dine 


ox" y gen 


py ri 7 tes 


car 7 bon 


mag ne 7 si a 


ox' ide 


sul 7 phate 


cam phor 7 ic 


mer 7 cu ry 


o 7 zone 


sul phu 7 ric 


chlo 7 rlne 


mu ri at/ ic 


phos 7 x>hate 


tan 7 nic 


fer 7 rous 


ni' tro gen * 


phos 7 phor ous 


vit 7 ri ol. 



LESSON lOl.-Relating to Stones. 



a' e ro lite, a meteoric stone fall- 
ing from the air. 

am' e thyst, a stone of a bluish- 
violet color. 

al a has' ter, a carbonate of lime. 

honl' der, a huge mass of rock. 

chrys' o lite, a crystallized min- 
eral, often of a golden-vellow 
color. 

di' a mond, a sparkling stone re- 
markable for its hardness. 

free' stone, a stone composed of 
sand, and easily wrought. 

gar' net, a stone of a deep red 
color. 

gem, a precious stone. 

gyp' sum, a mineral consisting of 
lime and water. 



glyp tog' ra phy, the art of en- 
graving upon stone. 

key' stone, the wedge-shaped stone 
on the top of an arch, which binds 
the work. 

lap' i da ry, one who cuts and 
polishes precious stones. 

o' nyx, a variety of quartz, consist- 
ing of parallel layers of different 
shades. 

pum' ice, a light, porous stone. 

o' pal, a milky- white stone. 

quar' ry, a place where stones are 
cut from the earth for use. 

sap' phire, a precious stone of a 
blue color. 

tur' quoise, a precious stone of a 

bluish-green color. 



LESSON 102.-Test Words. 

o ver seer 7 chan' ti cleer pur 7 pose ly sur 7 cin gle 
per se vere 7 au stere" ter 7 mi nate ser 7 vice 

moun tain eer 7 at 7 mos phere tur 7 bu lent cer' ti fy 



151 



in sin cere 7 
gren a dier 7 
vol un teer 7 
in ter fere 7 
brig a dier 7 
hem 7 i sphere 
mu let eer 7 



fur' ni ture 
fer 7 ven ey 
fer 7 til ize 
pur 7 chas er 
per 7 se cute 
tur 7 bid ness 
per 7 me ate 



mer 7 ci ful 
mur 7 der ous 
per 7 ti nent 
cer 7 tain 
cir 7 cus 
ser 7 mon 
sur 7 face 



sur 7 geon 
ser 7 geant 
sir 7 loin 
sur 7 plice 
ser 7 pen tine 
cir 7 cu lar 
sur 7 name. 



LESSON 103.-Relating to the Human Body. 

ar' ter ies, vessels conveying the fore' head, upper part of the face 

blood from the heart. fin' g e rs, the extremities 

au' ri cle, the outer part of the ear. 
chyme, the food reduced to a pulp. 
chyle, the food reduced to a milky 

fluid. 
car' di ac, pertaining to the heart. 
cer' e hrum, superior division of 

the brain. 
cer e hel' lam, lower division of 

the brain. 



der' mal, relating to the skin. 
ep i der' mis, outer layer of skin. 
ep i glot' tis, a covering to the 
wind-pipe, to prevent food from 
going down it. 
ol fac' to ry, relating to the sense 

of smell. 
op' ti cal, relating to the eye. 
pores, small openings in the skin. 
phar' ynx, the cavity into which 

the nose and mouth open. 
pul' mo nary, relating to the 

lungs. 
ret' i na, the tissue covering the 
eye, which receives the impression 
of objects. 
sa li' va, the liquid secreted in the 

mouth. 
shoul' ders, the upper part of the 

back. 
el' bow, place where the arm and 
fore arm join. 



of the 
hand. 

the joint connecting the up- 
per and lower leg. 
lar' ynx, upper part of the wind- 
pipe 
mem' hrane, a thin tissue. 
mus' cles, fleshy organs of motion. 
nerves, thread-like particles, which 
establish communication between 
the brain and the other parts of the 
body. " 

nos' trils, the outer openings of the 

nose. 
skull, the bone of the head. 
sin' ews, cords that connect the 

muscles with the bones. 
tis' sue, a thin covering. 
tongue, the instrument of taste and 

of articulation. 
throat, the portion of the neck just 

in front of the spinal column. 
thigh, upper part of the leg. 
veins, vessels carrying the impure 

blood to the lungs. 
ven' tri cle. one of the cavities of 

the heart. 
vo' cal cords, two cords in the 
larynx, by which all sound is pro- 
duced. 
■wrist, the joint connecting the arm 
and hand. 



LESSON io4.-Test Words. 

her 7 e sy de gen 7 eracy intermis 7 sion com mand 7 er 

del 7 i ca cy hy poc 7 ri sy mu si 7 cian die ta 7 tor 

su prem 7 a cy ac qui si 7 tion phy si 7 cian mus 7 cu lar 

ten 7 den cy ma gi 7 cian ad mo ni 7 tion ar 7 bi ter 

com 7 petency frui 7 tion logician pos sess 7 or 

proph 7 e cy pol i ti 7 cian con 7 su lar an 7 gu lar 

de spond 7 en cy rhet o ri 7 cian met 7 a phor mes' sen ger 



152 
LESSON 105.— Terms Used in Botany, 



an thol' o gy, a collection of 
flowers. 

a mor' phons, having no deter- 
minate form. 

a pet' a Ions having no petals. 

bi fo' li ate, having two leaves. 

bo tan' i cal, pertaining to plants. 

CO rol' la, the inner part of a flower, 
composed of one or more leaves, 
called petals. 

can les' cent, having a perfect 
stem. 

en' si form, having the shape of a 
sword. 

fo li a' ceous, belonging to or con- 
sisting of leaves. 



her ba' ceous, pertaining to herbs. 
her ba' ri urn, a collection of dried 

plants. 
in flo res' cence, the unfolding ot 

blossoms. 
pet' al, one of the colored leaves of 

a flower. 
pyr' i form, shaped like a pear. 
sta' men, the male organ of flowers, 

which furnishes the pollen. 
ser' rat ed, notched on the edge, 

like a saw. 
sag' it tate, shaped like an arrow- 
head. 
trunc' ate, appearing as if cut off 

at the tip. 



LESSON 106.-Test Words. 



Able. 
a dor 7 a ble 
in cur 7 a ble 
as sign' a ble 
con ceiv' a ble 
ap proach 7 a ble 
re triev 7 a ble 
ex cus' a ble 
de plor 7 a ble 
con trol 7 la ble 
ad vis 7 a ble 
dis pen 7 sa ble 
Me. 

ad mis 7 si ble 
in sen 7 si ble 
per cept 7 i ble 



cor rupt 7 i ble 
con vert 7 i ble 
com pre hen 7 si ble 
in vin 7 ci ble 
re due 7 i ble 
di vis 7 i ble 
in tel r li gi ble 
re spon' si ble 
Ant. 

as cend 7 ant 
ju 7 bilant 
tol 7 er ant 
as pir 7 ant 
at tend 7 ant 
dis cord 7 ant 
sup 7 pli ant 



re dun 7 dant 
tri um 7 pliant 
in ces 7 sant 
im por' tant 
Ent. 

em 7 i nent 
con cur 7 rent 
ap par 7 ent 
prev 7 a lent 
re cip' i ent 
in gre' di ent 
con 7 ti nent 
com pla 7 cent 
in clem 7 ent 
in cip' i ent 
re splen 7 dent. 



LESSON I07.-Words Pronounced Alike. 



aught, anything. 
ought, should. 
as sent', consent. 
as cent', a hill ; going up. 
ate, did eat.' 
eight, a number. 
al' ter, to change. 
al' tar, a place of {sacrifice or wor- 
ship. 



affect', to move; to pretend. 

ef feet', result. 

ac cept'r to receive. 

ex cept', leaving out. 

awl, a shoemaker's tool. 

all, the whole. 

core, heart, or inner part. 

corps, an organized body of per- 



153 



air, theatmo sphere. 

heir, one who inherits. 

ere, before. 

an' nal ist, a writer of annals. 

an' al yst, one who analyzes. 

au' gur, to foretell by signs. 

au' ger, a carpenter's tool. 

break, to split asunder. 

brake, a thicket; an appliance to 
make vehicles move slowly. 

bear, to carry 

bare, uncovered ; naked. 

barred, fastened with a bar. 

bard, a poet. 

borne, carried. 

bourne, limit ; boundary. 

ball, a round body. 

bawl, to cry out. 

beech, a kind of tree. 

beach, the sea-shore. 

beet, a vegetable. 

beat, to strike repeatedly. 

breach, a break. 

breech, part of a gun. 

bur' row, to dig a hole under- 
ground. 

bor' ough, an incorporated town. 

Brit' ain, England and its pos- 
sessions. 

Brit' on, a native of Britain. 

buy, to purchase. 

by, near ; past ; by means of. 

bass, a deep tone. 

base, vile ; lower part. 

bread , article of food. 

bred, brought up. 

brooch, a breast-pin. 

broach, to introduce ; to bring up. 

birth, act of being born. 

berth, a sleeping-place on a ship. 

brute, lower order of animal life. 

bruit, to noise abroad. 

can' did, frank ; open. 

can' died, turned to sugar. 

can' vas, a coarse cloth. 

can' vass, to solicit ; to examine. 

cord, a string or a small rope. 

chord, harmonious combination of 
tones. 

clime, climate. 

climb, to ascend. 

coarse, not fine. 

course, line of progress. 

crews, ships' companies. 

cruise, to sail from place to place. 

con' fi dent, trustful ; certain. 

con' fi dant, a close male friend. 

con' fi dante, a close female friend. 



cur' rant, a fruit. 

cur' rent, a stream. 

cast, to throw. 

caste, rank among the Hindoos. 

draught, a current of air; a 

sketch ; a drink. 
draft, an order for money. 
dear, precious ; expensive. 
deer, an animal. 
doe, a female deer. 
dough, uncooked bread. 
dust, fine, dry particles. 
dost, doest. 
die, to depart this life; a small 

cube. 
dye, to color. 
done, finished. 
dun, to press for payment. 
due, owed. 
dew, moisture. 
de mean', to behave. 
de mesne', chief manor-place. 
day, time from sunrise to sunset. 
Dey, governor of Algiers. 
ex tent', size; length. 
ex' tant, in existence. 
eve, a female sheep. 
yew, an evergreen tree. 
you, a pronoun. 

fir, a tree. 

fur, soft, fine hair. 

faint, to lose consciousness. 

feint, a pretended movement. 

fane, a temple. 

fain, gladly ; willingly. 

feign, to pretend. 

fair, not dark. 

fare, food ; price of passage. 

flee, to run away. 

flea, an insect. 

find, to discover. 

fined, punished by a fine. 

flew, did fly. 

flue a passage for carrying away 

smoke. 
forth? forward ; onward. 
fourth, next after third. 
fort, a fortification. 
forte, one's strong point. 
fate, destiny. 
fete, a festival. 
feet, plural of foot. 
feat, a deed. 

gam' ble, to play for stakes. 
gam' bol, to frolic. 

groan, a low moan. 



grown, 



increased. 



154 



gait, manner o f walking. 
gate, a means of entrance. 
grate, a frame of iron bars ; to 

wear away by rubbing. 
great, large in exteut. 
grat'er, an instrument for grating. 
great' er, more great. 
gilt, gold surface. 
guilt, wickedness ; sin. 
gris' ly. frightful ; hideous. 
griz' zly, somewhat gray. 
gourd, a vegetable production. 
gored, pierced with a horn. 
gild' er, one who gilds. 
guild' er, a Dutch coin. 
gage, a pledge. 
gauge, to measure. 
guest, a visitor. 
guessed, did guess. 
hale, healthy; to dray or haul. 
hail, frozen rain. 
hare, a small, timid animal. 
hair, the covering of the head. 
hall, a large room ; a passage-way. 
haul, to drag. 
here, m this place. 
hear, to perceive by the ear. 
heard, did hear. 
herd, a collection of animals. 
him, a male person. 
hymn, a sacred song. 
hoard, to store up secretly. 
horde, a wandering troop or gang. 
hart, a male deer. 
heart, chief organ of the body. 
hole, a hollow place. 
whole, entire. 
hew, to chop, 
hue, a color. 
Hugh, a man's name. 
in dite', to write ; to compose. 
in diet', to accuse in court. 
isle, a small island. 
aisle, passage-way in a hall. 
i' die, inactive ; lazy. 
i' dol, an image worshiped. 
i' dyl, a short pastoral poem. 
jam, a crowd. 
jamb, s ide piece of a door. 
kill to take away life. 
kiln, oven for drying. 
liffht' ning, electrical display. 
light' en ing, making lighter. 
limb, a member. 
limn, to paint in water-colors. 
made, completed. 
maid, a young woman. 



male, masculine. 

mail, postage ; armor. 

mane, long hair on the neck of 

animals. 
main, principal. 

Maine, largest New England state. 
man' ner, mode of action. 
man' or, land belonging to a lord 

or nobleman. 
man' tel, a shelf. 
man' tie, a cloak. 
mean, vile ; low. 
mien, appearance ; bearing. 
mite, anything very small. 
might, power. 
moan, a low groan. 
mourn, cut down with a scythe. 
not, a word of denial or refusal. 
knot, tangled threads or cords. 
no, not any. 
know, to be aware of. 
nave, center piece of a wheel. 
knave, a rascal. 
new, not old. 
knew, did know, 
nay, no. 

neigh, the cry of a horse. 
need, to be in want of. 
knead, to work in a mass. 
night , the absence of day. 
knight, a military attendant. 
on' er a ry, burdensome. 
hon' or a ry, conferring honor. 
pal' ate, the roof of the mouth. 
pal' let, a small, rude bed. 
pal' ette, a thin tablet on which a 

painter mixes his pigments. 

prin' ci pal, most important. 

prin' ei pie, a fundamental truth. 

plane, a tool. 

plain, clear ; low, level land. 

pale, to turn white. 

pail, a vessel for carrying liquids. 

pane, a plate of glass. 

pain, bodily or mental distress. 

pray, to supplicate; to beg. 

prey, anything taken by force. 

peal, a succession of sounds from a 

•bell. 
peel, to break the skin off. 

peer, an equal ; a nobleman. 
pier, support of an arch. 
pour, to cause to flow in a stream. 
pore, a small opening in the skin. 
poor, needy. 

poll, the head. 

pole, long, slender piece of wood. 



155 



plum» a fruit. 
plumb, perpendicular. 
propb' et, one who foretells events. 
prof it, gain. 

port, safe place for ships. 

Porte, government of the Turkish 

empire. 
pear, a fruit. 
pair, two of a kind. 
pare, to peel; to trim. 
piece, a part of. 
peace, freedom from war; rest. 

quire, twenty-four sheets. 

choir, a company of singers. 

read, to peruse. 

reed, a plant. 

rote, repetition, 

■wrote, did write. 

row, a line of persons or things. 

.roe, eggs of a fish; female deer. 

rhyme, correspondence of sound. 

rime, white or hoar frost. 

rite, a ceremony. 

write, to form characters. 

right, correct. 

wright, a workman. 

red, a color. 

read, did read. 

raze, to lay level with the ground. 

raise, to lift. 

rays, lines of light. 

sail, a sheet of canvas. 

sale, act of selling. 

sail' er, a ship or other vessel. 

sail' or, a seaman. 

sum, the amount; to add. 

some, a little; not all. 

sane, in one's right mind. 

seine, net for catching fish. 

sta' tion ar y, not movable; fixed. 

sta' tion er y, articles sold by a 

stationer. 
slay, to kill. 

sleigh, a vehicle on runners. 
steak, a slice of beef, pork, &c. 
stake, a stick; a wager. 
strait, a body of water; narrow. 
straight, not crooked. 
surf, a swell of the sea. 
serf, a slave. 
seal' ing, fastening. 
ceil' ing, upper surface of a room. 
sun, the orb of day. 
son, a male child. 
seed, that from which a plant 

springs. 
cede, to surrender. 



seem, to appear. 
seam, a line formed by sewing. 
seer, a prophet. 
cere, to cover with wax. 
sere, withered; dry. 
steel, a metal made from iron. 
steal, to rob. 
scent, odor; perfume. 
cent, a small coin. 
sent, did send. 
sell' er, one who sells. 
eel' lar, underground part of a 
house. 

site, place for a building; situation. 

sight, view; act of seeing. 

cite, to name; to quote. 

slight, to neglect. 

sleight, dexterity; trickery. 

stile, steps for going over a high 
place. 

style, fashion; manner. 

sig' net, a seal. 

cyg' net, a young swan. 

sym' bol, a sign. 

cym' bal, a musical instrument. 

sole, only; bottom of the foot. 

soul, immortal part of man. 

scull, a short oar. 

skull, the bone of the head. 

sword, a weapon. 

soared, flew on high. 

sut' ler, one who follows an army, 
to sell provisions &c. 

subt' ler, more cunning. 

serge, a woolen cloth. 

surge, to swell. 

ton, 2240 lbs. 

tun, a cask containing four hogs- 
heads. 

threw, cast or flung. 

through, from end to end. 

throne, a chair of state. 

thrown, was flung or cast. 

their, belonging to them. 

there, in that place. 

tears, water from the eye. 

tiers, rows, one above another. 

vice. sin. 

vise, a kind of press. 

vi' al, a small bottle. 

vi' ol, a musical instrument. 

vale, low ground between hills. 

veil, 1 
or } a covering. 

vail, J 

vain, proud; fruitless. 

vein, a blood-vessel. 

vane, a weather-cock. 



156 



wretch, a worthless person. 
retch, to attempt to vomit. 
waist, middle of the body. 
waste; useless spending. 
wave, a billow. 



■waive, to put off; to set aside, 
wreak, to inflict. 
reek, to emit vapor; to steam. 
wrap, to fold up; to cover. 
rap, a slight blow. 



LESSON 108.— To be Corrected. 



A pore woman. 

Peal the apple. 

Prey for help. 

The sail of a house. 

A read dress. 

Give me sum food. 

Our eldest sun. 

He sells steal and iron. 

The cent of the flower. 

A fine sight for building. 

The serf of the ocean. 

The stile of the dress. 

The bell has wrung. 

He rites nicely. 

Rome through the fields. 

Rap your cloak around you. 

I wood not go. 

Waive the banner. 

Way the coal. 

A mail child. 

A vane is a blood-vessel. 

My vale is torn. 

He plays on the vial. 

His face was wet with tiers. 

The feelings of my hart. 

The rivers team with fish. 

Go threw the door. 

The bird sword on high. 

The feathers of the signet are 

soft. 
He is two sick too go. 
Rabbits borough. 
He was throne from a horse. 
Except this gift from me. 
She is my only confident. 
Knead the doe. 
She died the cloth. 
Go fourth to duty. 
He was bourne to rest. 
Apply the breaks on the car. 
Bare each other's burdens. 
You aught to do right. 
He fained sickness. 



She has a small waste. 

You are a worthless retch. 

He is vane of his beauty. 

What ales you ? 

He bard the door. 

He beet the boy. 

Let us walk on the beech. 

We berry our dead. 

An able core of workers. 

A diamond broach. 

She is well-bread. 

Please by me something. 

Course manners. 

Clime the hill. 

The railway fair. 

The isle of a church. 

A lion's main. 

So the flower cede. 

A peace of wry bread. 

The air to the throne. 

The colonel of the nut. 

Eat the currents. 

He has dun the work. 

A yew under a ewe-tree. 

To feint from exhaustion. 

The rain of a king. 

Flea from evil. 

The heal of the foot. 

The hare of the head. 

A man grater than you. 

A guilt surface. 

Come hear. 

The knave of a wheel. 

The money dew me. 

A draft of water. 

You are deer to me. 

Dey follows night. 

Toss the bawl. 

A breech in the enemy's line. 

He was fined $10. 

Sails are made of canvass. 

Thou dust not falter. 

The animal's fir. 




'^^^(Ip^i^na. 



Importance— Letter-Writing is the most largely prac- 
ticed form of prose composition, and is, therefore, by far the 
most important. It is indispensable in the business and in 
the social relations of life, and is an excellent means of im- 
proving one's penmanship, spelling, grammar and general 
diction. 

By means of letters, we necessarily give others a view of 
our intellectual, social and moral qualities. 

In the business world, the ability to write a clear, neat, 
concise, well-arranged letter is one of the best of recom- 
mendations; while in the social world, culture and refine- 
ment can in no way be better expressed than in the smooth, 
intelligent, clear-cut language of a good letter. 

LETTERS. 

Letters are written communications between persons. 
They may be divided into three classes: Business, 

Social and Public. 

1. Business Letters are letters on business affairs. 
They are of two classes: Personal and Official. 

A personal business letter is one on private or personal 
affairs, and includes the letters written by individuals, firms 
or companies, in connection with their business. 

An Official business letter is one written to or by a 
person holding a public office, on matters pertaining to this 
office. 

2. Social Letters are those prompted by friendship 
or by love. They include letters of Social Introduction, of 



159 

Congratulation, of Sympathy, of Domestic Relations — in 
short, all letters prompted by sentiment. 

3. Public Letters are communications intended for the 
public, but usually addressed to individuals. This form of 
writing is used, because it gives a personal interest and 
admits of a more familiar style of treating the subject 
discussed. 

STRUCTURE OF LETTERS. 

The structure of letters embraces Materials, Head- 
ing, Address, Body, Conclusion, Folding, 
Superscription, Stamp. 

MATERIALS. 

The Materials include Paper, Envelope, Pen, Ink. 

1. Paper.— The quality of the paper should be the 
best the writer can afford. The improved appearance of 
the letter and the good opinions formed in the minds of 
others are materially increased by the use of good paper. 

The Size varies with the use. For social letters, various 
sizes and styles of "note paper" (which is generally 5 bv 
8 inches), are used. 

In business, "commercial note paper" (about 6 by 9 
inches), or "letter paper" (about 8 by 10 inches), is used. 

The Color most used and best suited to all persons is 
white. Gentlemen should use no other color. Ladies may 
use a paper of very delicate tint, if preferred. 

For business letters, only pure white or bluish-white is 
allowable. Persons who have lost a near relative may use 
"mourning paper" (paper with a black border), and. en- 
velopes to match. 

Hilled or unruled paper may be used with good 
taste; but unruled paper is decidedly preferable, being more 
stylish and enabling a person to put much or little on a 
page, as desired. The ability to write straight on unruled 
paper is easily acquired and is a desirable accomplishment. 
The practice of putting heavy, black, ruled lines under the 
paper is to be condemned, keeping the writer always de- 
pendent upon such help. 



160 

2. EnvelopGS. — The envelope should correspond in 
quality, size and color to the paper. The length of the 
envelope should be a little more than the width of the 
paper. 

For social letters, use envelopes that will admit the paper 
after one or two foldings. 

For business letters, use envelopes that will be somewhat 
larger than the paper, after it has been folded two or three 
times. 

For official letters, manuscripts for newspapers or maga- 
zines, legal documents and all large communications sent 
by mail, use official envelopes, about 9 inches long— long 
enough to take the width of foolscap paper or the length of 
letter paper. 

3. Pens, — Using a bad pen nearly always produces 
poor writing. Good steel pens, large or small, according 
to the fancy of the writer, are most serviceable and are 
within the reach of all. 

4. Ink, — Discard all fancy inks, and use only black. It is 
most durable, and is almost exclusively used in all kinds of 
correspondence. 

THE HEADING. 

The Heading of a letter consists of the Date and the 
Place where the letter is written. 

Position and Arrangement— The heading may occupy 
one, two or even three lines. It should never be more than 
three lines, and should be as short as is consistent with 
neatness and clear arrangement. 

It should be placed about an inch and a half from the 
top edge of the paper, and should begin a little to the left of 
the middle of the page. If the heading occupies two lines, 
the second line should begin nearly an inch to the right of 
the first line. If there are three lines, the third should be 
the same distance to the right of the second line. The parts 
of the heading should be separated by commas, and periods 
should be placed after all abbreviations and at the end. 



161 

OUTLINE OF A LETTER. 



Heading 
Heading 

JVame and title 



Besidence 
Salutation 



Body 



Body 



Complimentary Close 
Signature 
Address, if not at top 



162 

1. A one-line address should be arranged as follows : 

Model 1. 

2. When writing from a city, if your correspondent is 
not very familiar with your address, arrange the heading 
thus: 

Model 2. 



3. When writing from a small town or from a country 
place, give your post-office, the county, the state and the 
date — thus : 

Model 3. 



4. When writing from a public institution or from a 
school, arrange the heading thus : 

Model 4. 



Jr^&^M'nd Cy^d€t<wt€& 



'<asu&nd y Ky c/'tz.; 



€4U. f, /&?£. 



5. If a heading occupies more than one line, be careful 
not to put part of a word on one line and part on the next; 
as, for instance, in writing "Broadway, New York," it 
would be wrong to put "New" on one line and "York" on 
the next. 



163 

6. When the heading occupies more than one line, be 
careful to divide the parts properly. For example, it would 
not do to write "165 Tremont St., Boston," on one line 
and " Mass., June 3, 1894," on the next. There must be a 
systematic arrangement of the parts. 

7. In writing the date, it is not customary to write "d," 
"th," "st," after the day of the month, when the year is 
given; as, "June 21, 1894." 

If, however, the year is not given, these letters must be 
used; as, "Yours of the 20th instant." Do not place a 
period after these letters. 

Sometimes the day of the month is written before the 
month, instead of after it; as, "St. Louis, 3 June, 1894." 
This has the advantage of clearness, which is especially 
desirable in business writing. 

8. Business men usually have their printed address at 
the top of their paper. This is an excellent plan to prevent 
mistakes. 

9. It is the custom of many persons of culture to date 
the letter at the bottom. While this is not the rule, it may 
be allowed in social letters. Letters or notes written in the 
third person are usually dated at the bottom. Business 
letters should always be dated at the top. When the place 
and the date are written at the bottom, they must be begun 
near the left edge of the paper, on the line below that on 
which the signature is written. 

The following model will illustrate: 

Model 5. 



3/0 





164 

Exercise. 

Arrange the following headings properly. When 
necessary, correct the capitalization. 

1. June 30, 1894, Mass., Boston, 200 Bond Street. 

2. Baltimore, Md., 82 Madison Av., Aug. 25, 1894. 

3. Richmond, va., 809 E. franklin St., May 1, 1894. 

4. July 5, 1894, 85 state street, ill., Chicago. 

5. Va., June 20, 1894, Middleton Academy, Culpeper Co. 

THE ADDRESS. 

The Address consists of the Name and Title, the Place 
of Business or Residence of the person written to and 
the Salutation.. 

Name and Title.— In the address, the name should be 
written in full, and politeness demands that some title be 
used. The most common titles are: ]\£iss, for an unmar- 
ried lady; JMvs., for a married lady or a widow; J\£v. 9 
for a man who has no other title; Messrs., { abbreviation 
of "Messieurs" French plural of Sir ), when several 
gentlemen are addressed; Waster, for a young boy; Esq., 
(Esquire), often written after a gentleman's name, instead 
of "Mr." before it. 

HOW Used. — Two of the titles above mentioned must 
not be used with the same name, nor should they be used 
with literary, military or professional titles, such as Prof., 
Dr., Col., D.D., LL.D., &c. "Mr. Dr. Jones," "Mr. Prof. 
James," "Mr. J. White, Esq.," "Mr. Col. Sims," are in- 
correct. 

Exceptions.— To the above rule, there are two exceptions: 

1. When writing to a clergyman whose surname alone 
is known, we may write "Rev. Mr. Brown," (the Mr. tak- 
ing the place of the first name). Do not write "Rev. Mr," if 
the first name or the initials are given. 

2. If a married man has a literary or a professional title, 
it may be used with "Mrs.," in writing his wife's name; as, 
"Mrs. Dr. James," "Mrs. Judge Lamar," &c. 

Order and Dropping Of Titles —Titles are written after 
a name, in the order in which they are supposed to have 
been conferred. The following are properly arranged: 
A. M., M. D., Ph. D., D. D., LL. D., F. R. S. A lower title 



165 

is dropped when a higher one is used. The "Hon." does 
away with the "Esq.," but not any title of special honor. 
The D. D. or the LL. D. causes the A. M. to be dropped, but 
both of these titles are usually retained. 

Residence.— The residence should include the full post- 
office address of the person to whom the letter is written. 
If the post-office is not-in a city, always give the name of 
the county. 

Position.— In business letters that are not official, 
the full address must be placed at the beginning of the 
letter. 

In military or official business letters, the address 
is written usually at the top, but sometimes at the bottom. 

In informal social letters, the address may be 
placed either at the beginning or at the end of the letter, as 
the writer may prefer. Placing it at the beginning implies 
more formality than placing it at the end; consequently, 
letters of domestic relation or of intimacy usually have the 
address at the bottom. 

Arrangement— The address should begin on the left 
hand side of the page, allowing a small margin, and on the 
line next below the date. Put the name and the title on the 
first line, the street and number of the house on the second 
line, the city and the state on the third line. Begin each 
line nearly an inch to the right of the line above it. 

Punctuation.— If a title follows the name, they should be 
separated by a comma. Separate the street, city and state 
by commas. Put a period at the end of the whole. Every 
abbreviation should be followed by a period. 

THE SALUTATION. 

The Salutation is the term of respect, politeness, friend- 
ship or affection, which we use in addressing a person. 

In business letters, the termsemployed are Sir, used 
in the most formal letters; Dear Sir, a more familiar 
term and the one most used in business; My dear Sir, 
denoting acquaintance or friendship. 



166 
In addressing firms, Sirs, Dear Sirs, My dear 

Sirs or Gentlemen may be used. Do not contract 
"Gentlemen" into "Gents" or "Dear" into "Dr." 

In addressing a married or an elderly unmarried lady, the 
proper term is Madam or Dear Madam, 

In addressing a young unmarried lady, the salutation is 
generally omitted, to avoid the repetition of "Miss," the 
address alone being used. 

Remember that "Miss" is not an abbreviation, and takes 
no period after it. 

In addressing strangers, say "Sir" "Madam," "Miss 
Boyd" &c; acquaintances, "Dear Sir" "Dear Madam " 
"Dear Miss Boyd"; friends, "My dear Friend " "Dear 
Mary" "Friend Johnson " &c; relatives and dear friends, 
"My dearest Mother" "My darling Child" &c. 

Capitals and Punctuation.— Begin the first word and 

every noun in the salutation with a capital. 

The salutation should be followed by a comma in 
informal letters, and by a colon in more formal ones. If the 
salutation is on the same line as the beginning of the body 
of the letter, use a dash with the comma or the colon. 

Position Of Salutation.— 1. If the address occupies three 
lines, the salutation should begin under the first letter of the 
second line, or under the first letter of the first line, as in 
Model 1. 

Model 1. 











icittt jfizu&'l -aj^/Ae^f^ 



167 

2. If the address occupies but two lines, begin the 
salutation under the first word of the first line, as in 
Model 2. 

Model 2. 



3. In writing business letters to a married lady, use 
Model 3, and for social letters, use Model 4. 

Model 3. 




4. In writing to intimate friends or to relatives, use the 
forms of Models 5, 6 and 7. 



Model 5. 






€£iw et^wK 



168 

Model 6. 



Q4^^^<^^k 



4/, <tie<tz4e t 



a/^ttna c&U'tas tzts72<e 



Model 7. 



5. The following form may be used in official letters: 
Model 8. 



ffiU ( ^^e-e^e^tz4yu- ^(/jC^k 



'at: 



USE OF TITLES. 
R0V. (Reverend) precedes the name of a clergyman. 

Ht, Mev. (Right Reverend) precedes the name of a 
Bishop. 

Rev. Dv. precedes the name of a Doctor of Divinity, or 
•'Rev." may precede the name and "D. D." follow. 

Hoil. (Honorable) precedes the names of judges, mayors, 
members of a state legislature, members of Congress, heads 
of government departments and others of similar rank 
below "Governor" and "President." 

JPTof. (Professor). This title is given by courtesy to 
anyone who has distinguished himself as an educator. 

T$sq. (Esquire). This title is by courtes}' used after the 
names of men of any prominence, especially those of the 
legal profession. 



169 

FORMAL ADDRESSES AND SALUTATIONS. 
(a) is followed by the form of address; (b), by the salutation. 

1. To a Bishop. 

(a) To the Eight Rev. James Dodd, D. D., Bishop of Virginia, (b) Eight 
Eeverend Sir: — or Eight Eev. and dear Sir: — 

2. To a Minister, Priest or Rabbi. 

(a) Eev. Dr. John Kane or Eev. Jno. Kane, D. D. (b) Reverend Sir: 

or Sir: — 

3. To a Judge or a Mayor. 

(a) The Honorable James J. KirJce. (b) Sir: — or Dear Sir: 

4. To Lawyers, Justices of the Peace, &c. 
(a) Henry C. Kidd, Esq. (b) Sir: — or Dear Sir: — 

5. To a Physician or Surgeon. 

(a) Dr. J. 0. Hoyt or J. 0. Hoyt, Esq., M. D. (b) Sir:— or Dear 
Sir: — 

6. To a Dentist. 

(a) Dr. S.E. Steel or S.E. Steel, D. D. S. (b) Dear Sir:— or Sir:— 

7. To a Professor, 

(a) Prof. E. H. Ward, D. D., LL. D. (b) Dear Sir:— 

8. To the President. 

(a) To the President, Executive Mansion, Washington, D. C. (b) Sir: 

or Mr. President: — 

9. To the Vice President and Cabinet Ministers, &c. 

(a) The Honorable Charles Wilson, Vice President of the United States. 
Hon. Jas. R. Wade, Secretary of War. (b ) Sir: — 

10. To the Governor of a state or a Foreign Minister. 

(a) His Excellency, Governor J. W. Ross, (b) Sir: — or Your 
Excellency: — 

11. To the Pope. 

(a) To His Holiness, Pope Leo X. (b) Most Holy Father: — or Your 
Holiness: — 

12. To Ladies. 

(a) 1. Mrs. Jno. W. Forbes (a married lady). 2. Mrs. Mary E. 
Young (widow). 3. Miss Sarah E. Jones (unmarried). 

(b) Madam:— or Dear Madam:— for land 2. No salutation 
for 3. 

Exercise. 
Arrange the following addresses and salutations properly. 

1. 295 Broadway, New York, Dear Sir, Mr. H. B. Young- 

2. Detroit, Mich., Rev. H. W. Dunn, D. D., My dear Sir 

3. Atlanta, Ga., Dear Madam, Mrs. James W. Tatum. 

4. Gentlemen, Topeka, Messrs. Hurd & Co., Kansas. 

5. Gov. H.L. Johns, Albany, N. Y., Your Excellency. 

6. Winchester, Miss Anna Mayo, Va. 

7. Washington, D. C, To the President. 



170 
THE BODY OF THE LETTER. 

The Body of the letter is the communication itself, ex- 
clusive of the heading, the address or the conclusion. It 
should usually begin just under the end of the salutation. 
If the salutation is long, it may begin on the same line. 

Paragraphing.— Make a new paragraph of each subject 
discussed in the body of the letter. 

Style. — Aim to be as Clear as possible in the expression 
of ideas, and to this add simplicity. It is no mark of 
culture to be able to use long words; on the contrary, the 
most highly cultured persons express themselves in the 
simplest manner possible. 

Clearness and simplicity are especially necessary in busi- 
ness letters, where men have no time to think out the 
meaning of a sentence or a word. 

A.VOid the use of slang or any expression liable to lower 
the tone of the letter. Aim always to write in a refined, 
intelligent manner. The style should be adapted to the 
person addressed and to the subject discussed. In writing 
to persons in superior positions, it should be respectful; to 
inferiors, courteous; to intimate friends, familiar and pleas- 
ant; to children, simple; to relatives, affectionate. 

In writing on official subjects, the style should be dignified 
and forcible; on ordinary business matters, short and to 
the point; on ordinary social matters, easy and sprightly. 

Domestic letters should not be stiff. The little incidents 
of home life generally prove most interesting reading. 

CONCLUSION. 

The Conclusion of a letter embraces all that follows the 
body of the letter. It includes the Complimentary 
Close, the Signature and the Address, if the last is not 
at the beginning of the letter. 

The Complimentary Close is the phrase of politeness, 
respect or affection at the end of a letter. 

The words used vary according to the relations existing 
between the correspondents. 

In Social letters, "Your sincere friend," "Your loving 
child," "Yours affectionately," &c, may be used. 



171 

In business letters, the customary forms are "Yours 
truly," "Yours very truly," "Yours respectfully," "Respect- 
fully yours," &c. 

In official letters, the style is more formal. The follow- 
ing are approved official forms: 

1. / have the honor to be, Sir, 

Your obedient servant, 

James Lyle. 

2. / have the honor to remain, 

Most respectfully yours, 
John Dean, 

3. I am, Sir, 

Your obedient servant, 
James Newton. 

The Signature. — The signature follows the compliment- 
ary close. It is the name of the writer of the letter. 
In signing a letter, there are several important points: 

1. All letters should be plainly signed. Often 

a letter is sent with no signature whatever, due, doubtless, 
to forgetfulness on the writer's part. See that the name is 
written plainly enough to be easily understood by others. 
One may be able to read his own signature with ease, while 
to other people, it would be entirely illegible. 

2. Letters written by ladies.— A lady's signature 

to her letter, in writing to strangers or to inferiors, should 
indicate both her sex and whether she is married or single. 
A letter written by "M. YY. Young" leaves one not ac- 
quainted with the writer in doubt as to whether to direct 
his answer to "Mrs.," " Miss"or "Mr. M. W. Young," and, 
also, whether to write the salutation "Sir," "Madam" or 
"Miss." The lady should sign her name "Miss Alice Noyes" 
or "Mrs. Mary Altoon" or "Mrs. John Edwards." If 
preferable, the title may be enclosed in parenthesis; as, 
"(Miss) Mary B. Young." A married lady generally uses 
her husband's name. She may, if desired, use her own 
name; and, if she is a widow, she should do so. 



172 

3. Letters of importance, even to intimate friends, 
should contain the writer's full name. A letter that does 
not reach its destination is sent to the Dead Letter Office. 
Here it is opened, and, if the writer's name and residence 
are contained, it is returned to him. Thousands of letters 
are lost yearly, and many thousands of dollars fail to reach 
their destinations, because the letters enclosing them do 
not contain the addresses of the writers. In letters of no 
importance, it is not necessary to write the name in full. 

4. Official letters may contain the position of the 
writer, written after or below the name; as, 

1. James E. Mason, Snpt. of Schools. 

2. John E. Hart, 

Commissioner of Agriculture. 

3. J. Harmon Wood, 

Chairman of Music Committee. 

The Address.— As previously stated, every letter should 
contain the address of the person written to. When not 
put at the beginning of the letter, it should, as a mark of 
respect, be placed at the end of the letter. Do not omit it, 
even in letters to relatives. 

Arrangement and Position— The complimentary 

close is written on the next line after the end of the body 
of the letter. It usually occupies only one line, but, if too 
long for one line, two or three lines may be used. It gener- 
ally makes several lines in official letters, and often in busi- 
ness letters. The signature comes on the next line to the 
close, and should begin nearly an inch to the right of the 
first letter of the line above it. The address, when it 
forms a part of the conclusion, is written on the next line 
below the signature, near the left hand edge. The parts 
should be arranged as when written at the beginning of 
the letter. 

Punctuation.— A comma should be placed after the com- 
plimentary close, and a period after the signature. If the 
close occupies more than one line, it may require several 
commas. Punctuate the address as when placed at the 
beginning of the letter. 



173 

Exercise. 

Arrange the following properly. Correct the capitalization, 

-when necessary. 

1. I am, Sir, your obedient servant, James Kirk. 

2. Believe me to be, as ever, your sincere friend, Mary 
Long. 

3. I have the honor to be, sir, yours most respectfully, 
Wm. Hall. 

4. Wishing you much good fortune in your enterprise, I 
remain, sincerely yours, Hannah B. Leonard. 

5. Hoping to hear from you soon, I remain, yours truly, 
W. A. Ball. 

6. I beg to remain, yours respectfully, Howard Kirkland, 
Pres. Board Commissioners. 

FOLDING. 

The folding of a letter, though very simple, adds to or 
detracts from the appearance of the letter, according as it 
is well or badly done. 

Note Paper. — It is supposed that the envelope corresponds 
to the paper in size. 

The sheet of paper lies before us, the first page up. There 
are several different ways of folding it. The first way is the 
usual manner of folding: 

First way.—l. Turn the bottom of the paper up to 
about one-third the length of the paper from the top. 

2. Turn the top down over this, fold and press neatly. 

Second way.— If a large, square envelope is used, fold 
the paper from bottom to top, and press the fold neatly. 

Third Way.—l. Fold lengthwise, bringing the right 
and the left edges together. 

2. Fold from bottom to top once, or as often as is 
necessary to fit the envelope. 

Fourth tvay.—lfthe sheet is to be put in an official 
envelope (about 9 inches long), put the right and the left 
edges together, folding lengthwise. 

Letter Paper.— To fold a sheet of letter paper to fit an 
ordinary envelope, 

1. Fold from bottom to top. 

2. Turn the right edge over to one-third the width of 
the paper from the left edge. 

3. Turn the left edge over, and press neatly. 



174 

To fold a sheet of letter paper to fit an official envelope, 

1. Turn the bottom up to one-third the length of the 
paper from the top. 

2. Turn the top down over this, and fold neatly. 
Insertion of the Letter.— Put the folded letter into the 

envelope in such a manner that the middle fold of the 
paper will be against the place on the envelope where the 
superscription is to be written. 

THE SUPERSCRIPTION. 

The Superscription, or outside address, is what is put on 
the envelope. It consists of the Name, Title and full 
Directions of the person written to. 

Name and Title,— As in the inside address of the letter, 
politeness demands that a title be used with the name. The 
common titles, "Mr." or "Esq.," may be used, if no other is 
appropriate. 

Besides being a mark of respect, the title may sometimes 
serve to distinguish the person written to from some one 
else bearing the same name. 

If a person is acting in an official capacity, his position 
should be shown, in addition to the ordinary title; as, "J. 
W. Hodges, Esq., Pres. of N. & W. R. R. Co."" 

Directions.— If the person written to lives inihQCity, the 
number, the street, the city and the state should be given. 

If a resident of the Country, the nearest post office, the 
county and the state should be given. 

Persons often forget that there are several cities of the 
same name in the different states; and, also, that in the 
same state, there are towns whose names are so nearly 
alike, that annexing the name of the county is all that saves 
letters from going to the wrong place, and frequently from 
being sent to the Dead Letter Office. 

Arrangement, — In directing an envelope, write straight 
across, beginning a little below the middle. Start the name 
a short distance from the left edge, according to the length 
of what the line will be. Write each of the lines that follow 
nearly an inch to the right of the line above, thus bringing 
the last item down near the right hand corner. 



175 



Punctuation— A comma should follow each line, except 
the last, where a period is used. All abbreviations should 
be followed by periods. If a title follows the name, separate 
it from the name by a comma; and, if two titles follow, put 
a comma between them. Capitalize every important word. 
In ordinary superscriptions, every word is capitalized. 

MODELS OF SUPERSCRIPTION. 
For a person living in a city, use Model 1. 
Model 1. 



1. 



Robert S. Johnson, Esq., 

16 Madison Square, 
Baltimore, 

Md. 



For a resident of a town, use Model 2. 
Model 2. 



Miss Mary Kingsley, 
Millerstown, 
Perry Co., 

Penn. 



3. In writing to the President of the United States, use 
Model 3. 



176 

Model 3. 



To the President, 

Executive Mansion , 
Washington, 
D. C. 



4. In writing to the Governor of a state, use Model 4. 

5. When writing to a person of official position, use 
Model 5. 

6. If the letter is addressed in the care of another person, 
arrange as in Model 6. 

7. The P. 0. Box usually takes the place of the number 
and the street, just under the name; but sometimes it is 
written down in the left hand corner, as may be, also, the 
name of the county. See Models 7 and 8. 

Model 9. 



IF NOT CALLED FOR IN 10 DAYS, RETURN TO 

WM. GLOVER & CO., 



Messrs. Wm. Cole & Co., 

195 Bond Street, 

\ Boston, 

Mass. 



177 

















.^i 




s 


-2lf 


N 


<w 


w 






&3 


s 






OS 


§ 






Si 


%> 






















8 


■^1 






1 


•re 

00 






£ 


1 






Cb 


a 













§ 1 








1^ 






•^ 




78 


^ 

^ ^ 





•2 *» 




5~ 








S> 




O 




^b 





„ 




so JJ ^ 




fi -^ir 




«5 _r £ 




S « s 




!""« 




H 


«o 


** 


|H 




0) 


<=>' *fe 


•tJ 


,8 ^ 





^ s> 


s 


^ 1 




■3 £> 




<*> 




n 













** 






© 




v 


§ 




r5g 

1 


8 

Cb 


GO 






•3 


£ 




•d 






o 


c> 




s 


* 

















ss 








g 




■6 


« 


% 




H3 


S 








•8 






| 


.4 




t- 


pq 


§ 




3 


K 









S 




)& 








<&l 




5- 




s 












1 




d 



178 

1. Self- Addressed Envelopes— A self-addressed envelope 
is one on which is written or printed the writer's address. 
A letter in which the writer asks for a reply for his own 
exclusive benefit should enclose a self-addressed envelope. 

2. Special Request Envelopes.— To insure safety and 

rapidity of delivery, most business men use envelopes having 
their address or a special request to return to their address 
within a given time, printed on them. If not printed, it 
may, when desired, be written. See Model 9. 

A letter with the address of the writer, but with no re- 
quest to return in a give« time, is supposed, in case of 
non-delivery, to be returned in thirty days. Such letters 
are not sent to the Dead Letter Office, but, when not de- 
livered, are returned directly to the writers. 

THE STAMP. 

The stamp should be placed on the upper right hand cor- 
ner, about a quarter of an inch from the top and the right 
hand edges of the envelope. See that it is put on perfectly 
straight. Any carelessness in the appearance of a letter is 
a mark of disrespect to the one addressed. 

Requirement. — It is necessary that all matter sent by 
mail should bear the government stamp. A two-cent stamp 
is sufficient to carry a letter containing two sheets of ordi- 
nary note paper or one sheet of large letter paper. The rate 
is two cents per ounce or for a fraction thereof. A letter 
overweight for the stamping will be delivered, and the 
postage due collected from the one to whom it is addressed. 

It seems strange that any one should attempt to send 
a letter by mail, without affixing the stamp properly; and 
yet hundreds of thousands of letters are every year sent to 
the Dead Letter Office, because of not being properly stamped , 
or sometimes not stamped at all. 

Exercise. 

Arrange the following superscriptions properly. Correct the 

capitalization, -when necessary. 

Note. — Draw on paper a figure the size and shape of an ordinary en- 
velope, and write the superscription on that. 

1. Miss Mattie B. Forrest, (55 Fifth Avenue, New York. 

2. P. O. Box 156, Washington, D. C, Mrs. Leonard Carter. 

3. 64 High St., Louisville, Ky., Mrs. Win. Roper, 



179 

Model Business Letter 



S S t&ye-ciz 



-tZW'tlZ; ^ 



&u^^dAtw^ ( ~y$&. d-a ■c<a<mm<e'n€id tl= 
d^-u^fa vn-e,; ^Htz/Cy A<e4,€4£'U -tzAA/^u 4%jl4 
^t^n-e^u d<n<tz€ed <j^f^/d dln-c^z. (@<n€./&de<ci 

tdsnt-niz <u-au <mucA duc-c&dd t<n 



<W&4t>'i 44<6t'ZA <£<n€e44tt<tde / 






4eWl€l44tj 



ff .■> 



g?-ezd. '- 



180 

4. Care of H. W. Miller, Esq., Greenwood, Va., Master T. 
W. Townes, Albemarle Co. 

5. Gov. J. B. Anderson, Mass., Boston, His Excellency. 

6. Philadelphia, Pa. , Commissioner of Agriculture, Wallace 
Bond, Esq. 

7. Washington, To the President, Executive Mansion, 
D. C. 

POSTAL CARDS. 

A communication sent by postal card should be expressed 
as briefly as possible. 

Neither heading nor complimentary close is necessary. 

Private or important matters should not be written upon 
a postal card. If anything but the address of the person 
written to appears on the face of the card, it is subject to 
the same postage as letters. Cards having anything pasted 
on them will not be delivered. 

IMPORTANT SUGGESTIONS. 

1. Answers. — Letters should be promptly answered. 
Business letters should, if possible, be answered on the day 
of their receipt, or at the earliest moment possible. 

2. Address. — Write the address on the envelope very 
plainly. "N. Y." and "N. J." are often mistaken for each' 
other, as may be "Me." and "Mo." and others. 

3. Abbreviations.— Do not abbreviate the salutation 
of a letter. Avoid using such abbreviations in the body of a 
letter as "&" for "and"; "bot." for "bought"; " reed/' for 
"received"; etc. Do not abbreviate the names of towns 
or cities; as, "Balto." for "Baltimore"; "P'k'psie" for 
"Poughkeepsie"; "J'nstown" for "Johnstown"; &c. Do 
not abbreviate abbreviations; as "Mess." for "Messrs."; 
"ad." for "adv." 

4. Beginning and Ending.— In beginning a letter, avoid 
such set phrases as "I take my pen in hand"; "I now seat 
myself"; &c. A letter should generally close with some 
term of affection or compliment. This is included in the 
last sentence or two of the body of the letter. 

5. Both Sides. — In business letters, it is better to write 
on only one side of the paper, as letters written on both sides 
are not easily transferred to a copying-book. In writing 
articles for publication, both sides of the manuscript must 
not be written on. 



181 

Model Social Letter. 



££ Wizfa Cslv-<£<nue / 



€sC<mtZj (^/£s£4Z. ; 



-a^u J, Jff£. 



'<&€M Cs>U'esnd: 



£€>€i<u-£ /-ad-tzif ttMfrnatt/ d<&et<n<tz <u<au. Cs 



V <t€r€i/te€ €<n<a€ Q/ <wittd 



^a^^n dM.<£ 4.44 ^n^u -ata^n <A<a'm<e / ^uA-e^n 
-c<a<n j^^M/it -e^-ait it-awl ^^e^zd-ez^ 



<c<a'mA4Z'nz<a<nd 



>d4<K 



<n €<ne <m<£4Z<n€i<m& / 4t€^u^ / u-e 4n<&, 



i<wpcei€<44t, tfrawldf 






Gvtytdd £$}&& c^^tdd. 



3 b (Q4m f^ft., <&€<c<m<a / Csltiz. 



182 

6. Copies. — Copies of all letters of importance should be 
kept, as a guard against future mistakes or even malicious 
misrepresentation . 

7. Carefulness.— Neatness and accuracy are among the 
best of recommendations to a letter-writer. Bad spelling, 
poor writing, untidy appearance, have been the causes of 
many failures to obtain positions. Men will judge by 
appearances. Avoid erasures, even if necessary to rewrite 
the letter. Avoid using any other than black ink. Do not 
write letters with a lead pencil. 

8. Exaggeration.— Avoid exaggerated or intensive ex- 
pressions, such as, "a perfectly splendid time"; "awfully 
lovely"; &c. Avoid being "gushing" in your manner of 
expression. Be moderate and refined in tone. 

9. Foolscap Paper. — Never write a private letter on fools- 
cap paper, unless it is impossible to obtain the proper 
kind. 

10. Foreign Words. — Foreign phrases are in bad taste. 
Your correspondent may not know their meaning, and to 
ask another is to own a defect in his own education. 

11. Figures. — Figures should not be used in letters, 
except in writing dates or sums of money. In business 
letters, numbers that are written in words are also ex- 
pressed parenthetically in figures; as, "Enclosed find my 
check for five thousand dollars ($5000). 

12. Filing Letters.— All business letters should have a 
brief outline of their contents jotted on the envelope, and 
they should then be filed for future reference. 

13. Instant, Ultimo and Proximo— The abbreviated 

forms are "inst.," "ult." or "ulto." and "prox." In corre- 
spondence, "instant" means "the present month"; "ultimo" 
means "the month last gone"; "proximo" means "the next, 
or coming month." 

14. Little Things.— In writing to those connected by 
warm ties of friendship or of domestic affection, do not 
neglect to write about the little things of your home life. It 
is these which will most interest them. 



183 

15. Money. — In opening letters containing money, the 
amount should be noted, and a receipt for the same prompt- 
ly sent. 

16. Naturalness. — Your letters should bear so strong 
an impression of your own personality, that the reader will 
involuntarily think, "That's just like , isn't it? " 

17. Paging. Where a letter occupies more than one 
page, it is better to number the pages. Pages of manu- 
script for publication must always be numbered. 

18. Paragraphing.— In answering letters, place in sep- 
arate paragraphs each subject discussed. 

19. Postscript.— The postscript is something added at 
the bottom, after the letter has been written. It is usually 
an after-thought. While a postscript may be used with 
perfect propriety, it is better to do without it and to put in 
the body of the letter all that is to be said. An expression 
of compliment or of affection should never be put in a post- 
script — it is not complimentary to the person addressed to 
write such an expression as an after- thought. The abbrevi- 
ation "N. B." is used for "Nota bene," which means "Mark 
well:' 

20. Repetition.— Avoid repeating words that have been 
already used. Vary your language by different forms of 
expression. Do not use a multitude of words to convey 
an idea. Let your language be simple and clear-cut. 

21. Senior and Junior— "Sr." or "Sen." and "Jr." or 
"Jun." are the abbreviations for these words (meaning Elder 
and Younger). "Junior" is adopted by the son, and 
"Senior" by the father, when both are living. On the death 
of the elder, the younger one usually drops the "Jr." These 
words do not take the place of other titles. It is correct to say, 
"H. P. Hines, Jr., Esq." or "Jas. Metz, Sr., Esq." 

22. Titles.— Titles should not be omitted, but they 
should be used sparingly in letters. 

23. Underlining.— Underlining words in a letter is not 
to be approved of. It is allowable only to give an unusual 
meaning to a word. 



184 

BUSINESS LETTERS. 

LETTERS OF RECOMMENDATION. 

Carefulness necessary. — A conscientious person will be 
very careful whom he recommends. By giving such a letter, 
he makes himself, to a certain extent, responsible for the 
character and conduct of the person he recommends. He 
should not hesitate to refuse, where he cannot conscientious- 
ly recommend. 

Style. — The letter should be as brief as possible, containing 
only the points necessary to be discussed. 

Recommendation for a Confidential Clerk. 

2 os W. 1 6th St., 

New York, May 12, 1804. 
Messrs./. W. Hill & Co., 
95 Adams St., 
Chicago, III. 
Gentlemen: 

The bearer, Mr. W. H. Field, being de- 
sirous of obtaining employment as confidential clerk in 
your house, it gives me pleasure to commend him to your 
confidence, both as to ability and integrity. 

I have known him for years, and have uniformly 
found him to be a man of irreproachable character and 
fine business ability. 

I feel sure that, should you employ him, you will find 
him a most useful addition to your establishment. 
Respectfully yours, 

Goodwin Lewis. 

Recommendation for a Teacher. 

Annandale, Ohio, 

June 30, 1894.. 
To whom it may concern: 

It gives me pleasure to testify to 
the skill of Miss Anna Forbes, as a teacher of music and 
English. Miss Forbes is a graduate of the Danesville 



185 

Female College, and has, for the past three years, taught 
under my supervision. The reputation she has acquired 
as a fine disciplinarian and as an excellent teacher 
sufficiently attests her merit. 

Leland T. Mason, 

Pres. of Board of Trustees. 

LETTERS OF APPLICATION. 

Requirements.— A letter of application should be written 
with the greatest care, as regards neatness, spelling and 
manner of expression. A letter containing smears, blots, 
erasures or scrawling writing is apt to stamp the writerfas 
a careless, untrustworthy person in business. Wrong spell- 
ing has, in many cases, caused theloss of a position. Imagine 
an applicant writing, "1 730 all the details of the buisness, 
and am holy confident I could," &c. 

Style.— Let the sentences be short, clear and business-like. 
The writer should state what education, advantages or 
previous experience he has had, that would bear upon the 
position he seeks. For qualifications and character, let him 
refer to others. While the tone of the letter should be 
modest, it should, also, be self-respectful. 

In answering advertisements, be very careful to 
give exactly the information asked for, without introducing 
any unnecessary matter. 

Application of Business Manager. 

125 State Street, 
Chicago, May 4., 1894.. 
Messrs. Davis & Co., 
up Baltimore St., 
Baltimore, Md. 
Gentlemen: 

I beg to forward a recommendation given me 
by Messrs. Green & Co., of this city, for the position of 
general manager of your wholesale department. For 
some years I was employed by them to manage a branch 
establishment at Detroit, which is now progressing most 
satisfactorily. 



186 

I am a good correspondent in German and French, 
and understand the business in all its branches. 
Hoping that you zvill consider favorably my application, 
I remain, 

Yours respectfully, 

James R. Whiting. 

Application of Stenographer and Bookkeeper. 

2 75 Venable St., 

Richmond, Va.,Jan. 8, 1894.. 
Mr. G. R. Graham, 
212 Gary St., 

Richmond, Va. 
Dear Sir: 

Seeing your advertisement in The Times for a 
stenographer and bookkeeper, I desire to apply for the 
position. I am a graduate of the Acme Business College, 
and, also, hold the diploma <of the Wade Seminary, of this 
city. I have had very little experience, but feel sure I can 
satisfy you, if you will be kind enough to give me a trial. 
For information concerning my character, I refer you 
to Rev. I. R. D odd and F. M. Ellett, Esq., of this city, 
both of whom have known me intimately f or years. 
Hoping to meet with your favorable consideration, 
I remain, 

Very respectfullyyotirs, 

J. Wilson Tabb. 

LETTERS OF INTRODUCTION. 

1. Whom to introduce.— A Letter of Introduction should 
not be given to anyone for whom you are not entirely will- 
ing to vouch. You may do the greatest injury to a friend, 
by introducing someone with whose character you are not 
sufficiently acquainted. 

2. Character Of the letter— The letter introducing a 
person should be left unsealed, as fastening it would be im- 
polite to the bearer. The principal characteristics are that 
it should be (1) short, so as not to embarrass the bearer by 
waitingso long a time while it is being read, and (2)moder- 



187 

ate in expression, containing language of warm friendship 
or merited praise, but not extravagant eulogy, which would 
be much out of place. 

3. Delivery. — The person introduced should present the 
letter in person, at a time which will be entirely convenient 
and suitable. Of course, no stamp is necessary on such a 
letter. The superscription would be the same as if sent by 
mail, except that "Introducing Mr. A — B — ," should be 
written on the lower left hand corner. 

A Business Introduction. 

Martinstown, Pa., July /, i8g^.. 
Mr. J as. Goodwin, 
Albany, N. Y. 
My dear Sir: 

This will introduce to you Mr. William 
Channing, who visits your city on matters of business, 
which he will explain to you. 

Any assistance you may be able to give him will be 
gratefully appreciated by 

Yours faithfully, 

Jacques Donaldson. 

Introducing a Firm. 

125 Market Street, 

Cincinnati, Ohio, 

March 20, 1894.. 
Messrs. Stokes & Dayle, 

Chicago, III. 
Gentlemen: 

I have the pleasure of introducing to you the 
firm of Bayne & Cole, of this city, the senior member of 
which, Mr. Bayne, is about to visit your city. These 
gentlemen are large dealers in dry goods, and, from 
conversation with Mr. Bayne, I am led to believe that they 
will give your house a preference of their orders. Should 
this lead to the establishment of permanent relations, I 
shall be most gratified. Believe me, gentlemen, 

Yours very respectfully, 

Chas. Kingdon. 



188 
LETTERS OF CREDIT 

A Letter of Credit is one in which the writer loans his 
credit to another person for a limited amount. 

It is very closely allied to the Letter of Introduction; and, 
in fact, a letter of introduction often contains a request 
that credit be given, if the bearer desires it. 

The signature of the person for whom credit is asked 
should be given at the close of the letter, so that he may be 
identified as the person spoken of in the letter. 
Specimen Letter of Credit. 

250 Water St., 

Allegheny, Pa., 

Nov. 6, 1893. 
Messrs. Van Ness & Co. , 
18 Bond St., 
New York. 
Dear Sirs: 

Please allozu Mr. William Bryan credit for 
any goods he may wish, to an amount not exceeding five 
hundred dollars {fyoo), on six months time, and I will 
be respojtsible for prompt payment of the same. You will 
please inform me of the amount for which you give 
credit, and, in default of payment, let me know im- 
mediately. 

Yours truly, 
*Mr. Bryan's signature. Henry Cleveland. 

William Bryan. 

Letter of Introduction and Credit Combined. 

New Orleans, La., June 10, 1894.. 
Messrs. Byrd & Co., 

Cleveland, 0. 
Gentlemen: 

This zvill be handed you by Mr. Lewis Deane, 
of the firm of Deane Bros., of this city, for whom we ask 
any advice or assistance you can render. 

Should Mr. Deane find it necessary to take up any 
cash for expenses, oblige us by accommodating him to any 



189 

sum not exceeding one thousand dollars ($1000), taking 
his draft upon us, at three days' sight, in payme7it. 
We refer to this letter for Mr. Deane's signature. 
We remain, gentlemen, 

Yours very truly, 

*Mr. Deane's signature. Hill & Co. 

LETTERS ORDERING GOODS. 

A Letter Ordering Goods should be perfectly clear. If 
there are any special instructions to be given, the order 
should be written on a separate sheet. 

Delivery Of Goods. — Always state how you wish goods 
sent (by mail, freight or express), unless by previous deal- 
ing, it is already known. 

C. 0. D. — These letters stand for "Collect on Delivery". 
When goods are sent, marked C. 0. D., the bill is payable 
to the Express Company, on the delivery of the goods, and 
the receiver of the goods also pays for returning the money. 
Bills for small amounts or those ordered from a house with 
which a business standing has not been established are 
usually ordered in this manner, unless money is enclosed. 

_ Letter Ordering Goods. 

Hillsboro, New York, 
May jo, 1894.. 
Messrs. J as. White & -Co. , 

86 Broadway, New York. 
Gentlemen: — Please send by "Adams Express" the fol- 
lowing goods: 

80 Books of Exchange, 
10 gross pens, 
100 Allen's Arithmetics, 
50 SmithdeaV s Bookkeeping. 

Please forward at your earliest convenience, with 
enclosed invoice. 

Yours truly, 

Harrison W. Garber. 



190 

Answer, Enclosing Invoice. 

86 Broadway, N. P., 
June i, 1894.. 
Harrison W. Garber, Esq., 

Hillsboro, N. Y. 
Dear Sir: 

We have this day sent to your address the goods 
ordered in, your favor of May joth. 

Enclosed find invoice, amounting to $137.50. 
Hoping to receive further orders from you, we remain, 
Very truly yours, 

Jas. White & Co. 

Enclosed Invoice* 

New York, June 1, 1894.. 
Mr. Harrison W. Garber, 

Bought of Jas. White & Co. 





80 Books of Exchange 


at $.50.. 


40 






10 gross pens, 


at 1. 00.. 


10 






100 Allen's Arithmetics, 


at .50.. 


So 






jo SmithdeaV s Bookkeeping, 


at .75.. 


37 
$137 


50 
50 



Received payment, 

Jas. White & Co. 

Remittances. — Remittances not in currency may be sent in 
the form of checks, drafts, money orders, postal notes, 
registered letters or express orders. 

Checks. — This is the customary way in which business 
houses pay their bills . A check is a written order on a bank. 
It may be made payable to "order" or to "bearer". Unless 



191 

a check is to be presented immediately for cashing, it should 
be made payable to "order". A check is usually worded: 
"Pay to John Smith, or order, Fifty Dollars, &c. " 

Drafts. — A draft is a written order on an individual, firm 
or bank. Bank drafts are frequently used for making ' 
remittances. The usual form is: "Pay to the order of John 
Smith, Fifty Dollars, value received, and charge to my 
account." 

Money Orders.— Money Orders are issued by the Govern- 
ment, on all the principal post-offices of the United States. 
The following are the rates: Orders not exceeding $5, 
4cts. ; exceeding $5 and to $10, 8c. ; exceeding $10 and to 
$15, 10c. ; exceeding $15 and to $30, 15c. ; exceeding $30 
and to $40, 20c. ; exceeding $40 and to $50, 25c. ; exceeding 
$50 and to $60, 30c; exceeding $60 and to $70, 35c; ex- 
ceeding $70 and to $80, 40c. ; exceeding $80 and to $100 
inclusive, 45c. A money order for more than $100 cannot 
be obtained. 

Registered Letters.— A remittance may be sent in a 
registered letter, at an extra cost of 8 cents. 

Postal Notes. — Postal notes are issued for any sum less 
than $5, and the charge of purchasing is 3 cents. 

Express Orders.— These are money orders issued by 
the principal express companies, at the following rates: 
Not over $5, 5c; over $5 and not over $10, 8c; over $10 
and not over $20, 10c; over $20 and not over $30, 12c; 
over $30 and not over $40, 15c; over $40 and not over 
$50, 18c 

Remittance and letter. — A letter should always accom- 
pany a remittance, explaining why the remittance is sent. 

Sometimes instead of a letter, an invoiced bili is deemed 
sufficient. In the following letter, the bill and the check 
should be enclosed. 

Indianapolis, Ind., Feb. 2, i8g/j.. 
Mr. James Lohman, 

St. Paul, Minn. 
Dear Sir, — Enclosed find check for $85 and bill for 
same. Please receipt the bill and return. 
Respectfully, 

Sol. Hawes & Son. 



192 
TELEGRAMS. 

It is necessary for all persons, especially those in business, 
to be able to write telegrams properly, forming, as they do, 
so important a part of correspondence. 

Style. — A telegram should be expressed in just as few 
words-as will clearly convey the message intended. 

Telegraph companies usually charge a certain amount for 
ten words, and so much for each word more. We thus see 
why brevity is desirable. 

Specimen Telegram. 

Mrs.Jno. Young: 

Arrived safe today. Mother better. 
Will be ivith you tomorrow. 

J. B. Young. 

ADVERTISEMENTS. 

Circulars and newspaper advertisements have grown to 
be indispensable features of all departments of business. 

Style. — Newspaper advertisements should, as a rule, be 
as concise as possible. Advertisers are charged according 
to the space occupied and the circulation of the paper or 
magazine. The language used must be attractive and to 
the point. 

Advertisements for the purpose of gaining the public eye 
in favor of a business are often elaborate and extended. 
Here originality and attractiveness count for much. 

A ClVCllldV is a printed slip or a paper setting forth in 
as attractive a form as possible a certain business. It may 
be short or elaborate, at pleasure. 

Specimen Advertisement. 

WANTED.— A court stenographer. One with 
own typewriter preferred. State age and ex- 
perience. Address at once, P. O. BOX 750. 



193 
EXERCISES IN BUSINESS LETTERS. 

LETTERS OF INTRODUCTION. 

1. Write a letter to a friend in New York, introducing 
Jas. R. Bennett, of your city, who intends making atrip to 
that city. 

2. Write a letter to a friend in Buffalo, N. Y., introduc- 
ing a friend who goes to that city to try to secure a position 
as manager in a wholesale dry goods house. 

3. Introduce Mr. Jas. Allen, of Akron, Ohio, senior mem- 
ber of the firm of Allen Bros., to Mr. Jas. Hall, of Boston, 
Mass. Request kind and cordial attention for him. 

LETTERS OF RECOMMENDATION. 
1: Write a letter of recommendation for Miss Anna Hoy, 
from J. D. Hartman, Chairman of School Board of Rome, 
Ga., to Prof. E. M. Knowles, Dayton, Ohio. Then write 
her a general letter of recommendation. 

2. Write a recommendation for E. Burnett, who was 
employed by you as salesman for a number of years. 

3. Write a recommendation for someone who has kept 
books for you for several years. 

LETTERS OF CREDIT. 

1. Write to a firm in New Orleans, La., asking credit for 
three months' time for a friend, to an amount not exceeding 
three hundred dollars. 

2. Write a letter introducing Mr. Jas. Mayo to a firm in 
Chicago, 111., and ask that he be allowed to obtain dry 
goods from this firm on four months' credit, for an amount 
not exceeding five hundred dollars. 

LETTERS ORDERING GOODS. 

1. Write a letter to a firm in St. Paul, Minn., ordering 
four articles of dry goods. State the manner of shipment 
and of payment. 

2. Order a bill of stationery and typewriter supplies 
from a firm in Philadelphia, to be sent "C. 0. D." 

3. Write an order for school books to a firm in Washing- 
ton, D. C. State how the goods are to be sent; also state 
how much cash you can pay and how much time you wish 
for the rest. 



194 

LETTERS ENCLOSING INVOICE. 

1. Write a letter, enclosing invoice of the goods named in 
the first order above. 

2. Write an invoice of the stationery and typewriter 
supplies ordered above. 

REMITTANCES. 

1. Write to Chas. Mason, Philadelphia, enclosing bill of 
goods and check for $156. Ask that bill be receipted and 
returned. 

2. Write to a firm in Danville, Va., sending money order 
for $50 for goods purchased. 

3. Write to a firm in Pittsburg, Pa., enclosing $25, to be 
paid on an account, and ask time on the balance. 

RECEIPTS. 

1. Write a receipt for a tenant, for one month's rent of a 
house. 

2. Write a receipt for $56, in payment of balance due 
on an account. 

3. Write a receipt for the payment of a bill of dry goods, 
amounting to $250. 

ADVERTISEMENTS. 

(1) WANTED.— Man of large experience in shipping busi- 
ness as general manager. Must be thoroughly familiar 
with shipping to all parts of the countiw, and able to com- 
mand some trade. Address Shipper,- Dispatch office. 

(2) WANTED. — Young man as bookkeeper and corre- 
spondent. Must be good penman and accurate accountant. 
State age and references. Address in own handwriting, 
Hammond Bros., P. O. Box 200. 

(3) WANTED.— A lady amanuensis. Must write a clear, 
rapid hand and give best of references. Address Rapid 
Writer, Sun office. 

(4) WANTED. — A governess for small children. State 
qualifications. References given and required. Address 
Teacher, Box 25. 

(5) WANTED. — A traveling agent for a hardware house. 
Must be of good address and able to command some 
patronage. Address in own handwriting, Box 203. 

6. You are about to move into larger quarters and to 
greatly extend your business. You are to have a clearing- 
out sale for three days. Prepare a suitable advertisement. 



195 

7. You are proprietor of a Wholesale Clothing House at 
90 High Street. You are to move to 251 Chestnut Street. 
You are to have an opening June 1. Prepare an advertise- 
ment, apprising your customers of the change and asking 
their attendance and a continuance of past favors. 
TELEGRAMS. 

1. Write a message not to exceed thirteen words, to be 
sent to W. Holmes, Detroit, saying that you have sent by 
railroad five hundred tons coal, and that you have drawn 
on him for two thousand dollars in payment of same. 

2. Send a message of eight words to your father, an- 
nouncing that you have arrived safe in Boston, and that 
you expect to be at home the following day. 

3. Telegraph in ten words to the purser on a steamer to 
reserve the best stateroom on the "Pilgrim" for you, for the 
afternoon trip of June 27. 

SOCIAL LETTERS. 

The styles of social letters most frequently used are: 
1, Letters of Introduction; 2, Letters of Sympathy; 3, Let- 
ters of Congratulation; 4, Letters of Affection and Friend- 
ship. 

LETTERS OF INTRODUCTION. 

The directions given under Business Letters of Introduc- 
tion apply to those of a social character. 
Specimen Letter, 1. 

Buffalo, N. K, June 5, 1894, 
Mr. Arthur Fleming, 

Batesville, Ohio. 
Dear Friend: 

I take pleasure in introducing to you my 
esteemed friend, Mr. William Jenkins, and I solicit for 
him a large share of your store of cordiality. Believing 
that you will be good enough to render him any attention 
you may be able y I remain, as ever, 

Your old friend, 

Waller Thompson. 



196 

Specimen Letter, 2. 

Detroit, Mich., Mar. i, 1894.. 
My dear Jennie, 

Allow me to introduce to you the bearer 
of this, Miss May Moore, of whom you have heard me 
speak so often. Believing that -an acquaintance would be 
mutually pleasant to you both, I have asked her to call 
on you and deliver this in person. Any attentions you 
may show her will be warmly appreciated by 

Your affectionate friend, 

Belle M. Troy. 
Miss Jennie Adair, 

Memphis, Tenn. 

LETTERS OF SYMPATHY. 

A Letter of Sympathy is one written to a friend who has 
sustained a loss. 

Character Of the letter— A letter of sympathy is diffi- 
cult to write properly. The writer should not call up 
distressing scenes or events. The only object of the letter 
should be to show a warm sympath}^ in the distress and to 
offer what consolation is possible. A few loving words, a 
desire to share the grief, a reference to the One who can heal 
all sorrow, are all that such a letter requires. 
Specimen Letter. 

Charleston, S. C, Nov. 1, 1894.. 
Dear Mr. Deane: 

I cannot tell you zuith what pain and 
grief I heard this morning of the death of your brother. 
It is a loss that all who knew him can feelingly estimate; 
and, if the sympathy of friends can be a consolation 
under such circumstances, be assured that many sorrow 
with you in your loss. 

There is, however, a higher source of consolation, 
and, commending you to that, I remain, 

Your sincere friend, 

John T. Harris. 
W. S. Deane, Esq., 
Greensboro, N. C. 



197 
LETTERS OF CONGRATULATION. 

Letters of Congratulation are written to friends who 
have had some good fortune. 

Character Of the letter.— The letter should be written 
with great warmth and heartiness. It should be written 
as soon as possible after the event, for a delay causes 
congratulations to sound forced. 

Specimen Letter. 

Portland, Me., Oct. 8, 1894. 
My dear Downing: 

Today s mail brings me news of your 
approaching marriage, for which I return most lie arty 
congratulations, both for your prospective bride and for 
yourself. 

You have chosen wisely a woman who is noble as well 
as beautiful, and whose love will be an unfailing comfort 
to you; and I believe that, in the years to come, she will 
find in you the shelter and the confidence that a true 
man gives. 

Hoping that you may both be very happy and that 
your happiness may increase with years, I remain^ as 
ever. 

Your true friend, 

fohn Davidson. 
Mark Downing, Esq. , 
Boston, Mass. 

LETTERS OF AFFECTION OR FRIENDSHIP. 
The principal charm of such letters is their naturalness. 
They should be sprightly in tone, with an undercurrent of 
affection or friendship, corresponding in warmth to the 
relations existing between the correspondents. 

NOTES. 

A Note, which is in reality a short letter, may be of a 
formal or of an informal character. 

1. Informal Notes are short communications between 
persons, written in the first and second persons, and some- 
what familiar in tone. 



198 

2. Formal Notes are short communications, written 
in the third person, having neither salutation nor signa- 
ture, and dated at the bottom. 

Specimen— Informal Note. 

J7 Riverview Park, June 2J, 1894.. 

Dear Mary, 

We are getting up a picnic party for next 

Tuesday, and shall be so glad to have you make one of 

us. Do try to go. We promise to be as gay as possible. 

Hoping to receive a favorable answer, I remain, 

Your sincere friend, 

Mattie Lathrop. 
Specimen — Formal Note. 

Miss Davis requests the pleasure of Mr. Boyd's com- 
pany tomorrow everting, at half -past 7iine. 

25 Russell Square, Jan. 13. Dancing. 

INFORMAL NOTES. 

An informal note may be written upon any occasion. The 
only requirement is that a certain degree of familiarity be 
allowable and that the occasion shall not be one requiring 
dignity or formality. 

FORMAL NOTES. 

Formal notes are usually written on occasions of invi- 
tations to weddings, dinners, balls, parties or 
any formal gatherings. 

Third Person.— Formal notes should be written in the 
third person. This is not always easy, if the note is of any 
length. Be careful not to change from the third to the first 
or second person. The following is an example of this error: 

Miss Green requests the pleasure of Mr. Jackson's 
company tomorrow evening, to meet Miss Anna Lee. I 
hope you will be able to come, as I am quite anxious for 
you to know my friend. 

18 Eutaw Place, Jan. 23. 

Acceptances or Regrets.— Answers to invitations, except 
those to dinner, are usually unnecessary, unless JR. S. V» _P. 
(Answer, if you please), or another form of request for 
answer is contained. 



199 

Third Person,— Answers to notes written in the third 
person should, also, be written in the third person. 

Whom to address.— The answer to an invitation should 
be addressed to the person or persons sending it; but, if 
sent by a lady and a gentleman cojointly, it should be 
acknowledged to both on the inside, but theenvelope should 
be addressed to the lady alone. 

When to answer.— An invitation to dinner should be 
answered immediately. Invitations to balls, parties, wed- 
dings, etc., may be answered as late as the third day. 

If unable to attend, a regret should be sent the day after 
the occasion; and it is always more courteous to assign a 
reason for not attending. 

Paper and Penmanship— The paper used for formal 

invitations should be plain and elegant in quality. For 
weddings, only white or cream is allowable; delicate tints 
may be allowed for other occasions, but white is always in 
good taste. 

The Size of paper most used, is the sheet that, with one 
folding, can be admitted into the almost square envelope. 

When invitations are sent by mail, and often when de- 
livered in person, there should be an outer, coarser envelope, 
to protect the finer, inner one. 

The writing or engraving should be plain, but very 
elegant. Ornamentation is out of place here, and elegant 
simplicity is in best taste. 

French Phrases.— The following French phrases are often 
used on notes and cards: 

M. S. V. -P.j Repondez s'il vous plait— Answer, if you 
please. 

jP. P, C, Pour prendre conge — To take leave. 

JBal masque— Masquerade ball. 

Costume de rigueur— Full dress, in character. 

Fete Champetre—k rural entertainment. 

JEJ. V. 9 En ville — In the town or city. 

Soiree dansant e— Dancing party. 



200 
MODELS OF NOTES OF INVITATION. 

1. Formal Invitation to a Party. 

Mr. and Mrs. William Logan request the pleasure of 
Mrs. Durand's company on Thursday evening, Novem- 
ber sixth, from nine to twelve. Dancing. 

1 8 Madison Ave., Feb'y 12. Please answer. 

2. Formal Invitation to a Dinner. 

Miss Mason requests the pleasure of Mr. and Mrs. 
Jno. B. Cummin's company to dinner on Tuesday, Oc- 
tober fifth, at seven d clock. 
Magnolia Park, October i . 

3. Formal Invitation to meet Friends. 

Senator and Mrs. Gorman request the pleasure of Mr. 
and Mrs. J. B. Hill's company on Wednesday evening, 
May sixth, at eight o'clock, to meet General and Mrs. 
McAdam. 
824 LeGrand St. R. S. V. P. 

4. Formal Invitation to attend a Concert. 

Mr. Manson solicits the pleasure of attendi?ig Miss 
Owens to the concert to be given by the Boston Ideals next 
Thursday evening. 
Russell House, Jan . j . Please answer. 

5. Informal Invitation to a Dinner. 

Wednesday, March 8. 
Dear Minnie: 

Will you and your husband favor us with 
your company to dinner on Tuesday next? There will be 
present only a few old and valued friends, whom, I am 
sure, you will be pleased to meet. 

Hoping for a favorable reply, I remain, as ever, 

Your sincere friend, 

Marian Derby. 
Mrs. J. B. Manson, 
2 jo Arch St. 



201 

6. Formal Acceptance of a Dinner Invitation. 

Mr. Lawtoris compliments to Mrs. Melton, accepting 
with pleasure her kind invitation for Tuesday evening, 
March sixth . 

Plaza Hotel, Feb. 28. 

7. Formal Regret, (answer to same). 

Mr. Lawton regrets that, owing to unexpected press of 
business, he will be unable to accept Mrs. Melton's kind 
invitation f or Tuesday evening, March sixth. 
Plaza Hotel, Feb. 28. 

8. Informal Acceptance. 

18 Carlisle St., May 20. 
Dear Mrs. Gray, 

It gives me much pleasure to accept your 
kind invitation for Thursday next. I am delighted at 
the prospect of enjoying a musical evening at your house, 
and promise to contribute all I can, as you so kindly ask. 
With pleasant anticipatio7is, I remain, 

Sincerely yours, 

Mary L. Anderson. 

WEDDING INVITATIONS. 

Invitations to weddings are sent out by the parents of 
the bride, if living, ten days or two weeks before the cere- 
mony. 

Paper.— The paper should be heavy and of fine quality. 
The writing may be script type or from an engraved plate. 

The size of the paper is regulated by the prevailing 
fashion. The following is a popular form of wedding 
invitation: 



202 



fe* 



t. ana? 'QpCte. 

iea-uetX-t yowl Meo ence 



au& 



at tfie 



et>vtnj 



ie &/ -PM0U aa^an/01 
(Q^awame 

-fa 

(^/dui^t/ay eventn 

a-f 60V'0K o J cwc&j 
w. dtamed' C ^^ 
■-icnmonaf. 



Sometimes notes are issued just after a wedding, an- 
nouncing the marriage and enclosing cards to those desired 
to call. The following form will illustrate: 

Dr. Homer P. Belvin, 

Miss Adelaide Mayo, 

Married 

Thursday, June seventh, 1894.. 

A card like the following should be enclosed: 



Dr 


and Mrs. Homer P. Belvin, 






At Home 




aft 


<>r July first, 1894., 




820 


Michigan Avenue. 



203 

Anniversary Weddings— Sometimes persons celebrate 
happy marriage anniversaries at certain periods. These 
are called anniversary marriages. The first anniversary is 
called the Cotton Wedding; the second, the Paper Wed- 
ding; the fifth, the Wooden Wedding; the seventh, the 
Woolen Wedding; the tenth, the Tin Wedding; the twelfth, 
the Silk and Fine Linen Wedding; the fifteenth, the Crystal 
Wedding; the twentieth, the China Wedding; the twenty- 
fifth, the Silver Wedding; the thirtieth, the Pearl Wedding; 
the fortieth, the Ruby Wedding; the fiftieth, the Golden 
Wedding; the seventy-fifth, the Diamond Wedding. 

The Wooden Wedding Invitations should be printed 
on a thin sheet of wood. 

The Tin Wedding Invitations, on tin-foil paper. 

The Crystal Wedding Invitations, on cards with a 
fine glass finish. 

The China Wedding Invitations, on cards with a 
smooth, dead-white surface. 

The Silver Wedding Invitations, on fine white paper, 
with silver letters. 

The Golden Wedding Invitations, on heavy white or 
cream paper, in rich gilt letters. 

CARDS. 

Quality and Color— Fine, unglazed card-board is best. 
The color in best taste is white or cream, and these alone 
are allowable for weddings. On other occasions, delicately 
tinted cards may be used, but are not in so good taste. 

Wedding Cards.— Invitations to weddings, when short in 
form, are often printed on large cards, instead of note 
paper. The size is a matter of taste. When personal cards 
are enclosed in a wedding invitation, the gentleman's card 
is a little larger than that of the lady. 

Betrothal Cards.— Among the Hebrews, it is customary 
to announce betrothals. For this purpose may be used 
notes or cards worded as follows: 

Mr Jacob Grcenbaum, 
Miss Sara All stein, 

Betrothed 
December first, i8g^j. 



204 

Presentation Cards.— A visiting card generally accom- 
panies a gift, when a note is not sent. 

Memorial Cards.— It is customary with many persons to 
send to the friends of a dead person, about a week after the 
funeral, black-bordered cards (narrow border for the young, 
wide for the aged), bearing the name, the dates of the birth 
and the death of the deceased, together with a short sen- 
tence of eulogy or affection. 

Business Cards.— These are cards used by persons to 
show their kind and place of business. They are generally 
large and not fine in the printing or the quality of the card. 

Professional Or Official cards are used by pro- 
fessional men generally for professional purposes. Official 
cards may, also, be used for social purposes. 

Visiting Cards —This is the most largely used form of 
cards. There are several important points to be noticed: 

1. Inscription.— A lady's card should have "Mrs." or 
"Miss" with the name. The card of the eldest unmarried 
daughter should read simply "Miss Smith," not "Miss 
Mary Smith." The younger sisters, if unmarried, should 
have their given names on their cards; as, "Miss Sarah 
Smith," "Miss Irene Smith." A married lady generally uses 
her husband's name; as, "Mrs. Thos. Carlton." A widow 
alwa\ r s uses her own name; as, "Mrs. Grace Watson." 

Sometimes a husband and a wife use a joint card; as, 
"Mr. and Mrs. G. W. White." 

A gentleman's card should have "Mr." or any pro- 
fessional title, with the name; as, "Mr. ]ames Dixon"; 
"John Walton, M. D." or "Dr. John Walton"; "Rev. S. W. 
Travers, D. D."; &c. 

2. Residence.— When the residence is given on the 
card, as is usually the case, it is put in very small letters 
in the lower right hand corner. 

If a lady receives on a certain day, she indicates it by 
writing in the lower left hand corner "Thursdays," "Tues- 
days," or whatever the day may be. 

3. Style.— A lady's visiting cards are usually larger 
than a gentleman's; but that is much a matter of taste. 
Visiting cards should be plain, both in material and inscrip- 
tion. They should be engraved or written. 



205 
4. Uses. — The chief uses of visiting cards are 

1. To announce a visitor 9 s name. 

The card is handed to the person who opens the door, and 
the caller inquires for the person or persons for whom the 
call is intended. 

If there is a visitor in the house, two cards should be left, 
one for the visitor and one for the family. 

If there are elderly as well as young ladies who are called 
on, two cards should be left. 

If the person called on is not at home, leave a card, 
turning over one end to denote a call in person. 

2. To announce a guest's name at a reception. 

The person who attends the reception should hand a card 
to the usher at the door and should, also, leave one on the 
card receiver. 

3. To announce a long stay from home. 

A person leaving home for a long period sends his friends 
a card with P. P. C. (pour prendre conge, to take leave) on 
one of the lower corners. Frequently the English words 
are written out. 

4. To announce a return home. 

It is customary, after a long stay from home, to an- 
nounce a return, by sending visiting cards to friends. 

5. To accompany a letter of introduction. 

A person in a strange city, with a letter of introduction, 
should, if the letter is not presented in person, send the 
letter with his card, bearing his temporary address, en- 
closed in an envelope. 

6. To make known one's name to a stranger. 

A person wishing to make himself known to another, for 
any purpose, hands him his card. 

7. To serve as a credential. 

A person hands his card to another, to whom he is un- 
known, with a written endorsement on the back, to show 
that he is the person he represents himself to be. 



206 
EXERCISES IN SOCIAL LETTERS. 

LETTERS OF INTRODUCTION. 

1. You are away from home. Write a letter of introduc- 
tion to your mother for a friend who is to spend some time 
in that city. 

2. You have a friend who intends spending a few weeks 
in Washington. Introduce him by letter to your brother, 
who is a member of the Senate, and ask that he aid as much 
as possible in making his visit interesting. 

LETTERS OF SYMPATHY. 

1. Your friend has just lost his mother. Write a letter 
of sympathy. 

2. You have just heard of a terrible fire, which has en- 
tirely destroyed a business block belonging to your friend, 
and left him almost penniless. Write a letter, expressing 
sorrow at his loss and encouraging him not to lose heart. 

LETTERS OF CONGRATULATION. 

1. Write a letter of congratulation to your friend, who 
has come into possession of a large fortune. 

2. Write a letter of congratulation to a friend who has 
just been married. 

FAMILY LETTERS. 

1. You are away from home, attending school. Write a 
letter to your mother. 

2. Write a letter from a father to a son who has just left 
home to engage in business in another city. 

INVITATIONS AND CARDS. 

1. Write a formal invitation from a lady to a gentleman, 
to attend a dinner party. 

2. Write a letter of acceptance from the gentleman. 

3. Write an informal invitation to a lady to attend a 
concert with you. 

4. Write a note of regret from the lady. 

5. Mr. and Mrs. Chas. Hinen's daughter Mary is to be 
married to Mr. A. J. Mayo, Wednesday, June 6, at eight 
o'clock, at St. Andrew's Church. Write a form of wedding 
invitation. Write, also, announcement cards. 

6. Write visiting cards for Dr. H. A. Owens, for his wife 
and for his two daughters, Misses Mary and Jennie Owens. 
They live at 114 Grove Ave. The ladies receive on Fridays. 



207 



BUSINESS FORMS, 

PROMISSORY NOTES. 



85 

Too 



Troy, N. Y., ^OatCK J, 1894. 

(QlrMiee m&ndn4< ajftei warf&j I promise to pay 

to the order of £^f€Wit4> S§g'te&et$d> &> < ^0. 

@/niee nuMHet? ant/ d even/it — ^ Dollai 



Value received. 



< No. 



9 Due June 2—5. 



tttzam 



advn. 



1. A Note is a written promise to pay a certain sum to a 
certain person at a specified time. 

2. The person who promises is called the maker, and 
the person he promises is called the payee, 

3. The face of the note is the sum promised. 

4. A negotiable note is one made payable to the 

bearer or to the order of the payee. It can be sold 

or transferred. 

A non-negotiable note is payable only to the person 
or persons mentioned in the note. 

5. The indorser is the person who writes his name on 
the back. By so doing, he guarantees its payment. The 
holder of the note has a claim against every person who 
has indorsed it, unless the indorser has written ''without 
recourse" after his name. When indorsing Notes, Bills, &c, 
write your name on the back as it is written on the face. 
If spelled incorrectly on the face, indorse it in the same 
manner, or write it correctly and incorrectly in both places. 

6. The date of maturity is the day on which the 
note becomes due. Three days Of grace are usually 
allowed beyond the specified time. 



208 

7. Notes bear interest only when so stated, except 
after maturity. 

8. A note written with either ink or pencil is good; 
if made on Sunday, or if made by a minor, an idiot 
or an insane person, it is void. 

9. A protest of a note or draft is a formal statement by 
a notary public, that said note or draft was presented for 
payment or acceptance, and was refused. 

1. Time Note. 



Troy, N. Y., March 5, 1894- 
Thirty days after date, I promise to pay W. T. Logan, or order, 
Two Hundred Dollars, value received. 

J. W. Ashley. 

2. Time Note, payable at the Bank. 

$500. New York, July 2, 1894. 

Sixty days after date, I promise to pay to the order of J. P. Long, 
Five Hundred Dollars, at the Planters' Bank, Camden, N. J. , value 
received. 

L. P. Lear. 

3. Demand Note, with Interest. 

$100. Atlanta, Ga., Jan. 9, 1894. 

For value received, I promise to pay L. R. Smith, or order, One 
Hundred Dollars, on demand, with interest at six per cent, per annum. 

S. G. Sloan. 

4. Time Note, with Interest. 

$700. Buffalo, N. T., May 2, 1894. 

Six months after date, for value received, I promise to pay L. A. 
Kline, or order, Seven Hundred Dollars, with interest at six per cent. 

P. L. Roan. 

5. Joint and Several Note. 

$1000. Mobile, Ala., June 4, 1894. 

Three months after date, we jointly arid severally promise to pay 
L. R. Catlin, One Thousand Dollars, value received. 

W. L. Long, 
R. H. Carter, 
G P. Hunt. 
6. Non-Negotiable Note. 

$300, Rome, Ga., Feb. 6, 1894. 

Six months after date, 1 promise to pay L. A. Sands, Three 
Hundred Dollars, value received. 

Mason Littleton. 



209 

DRAFTS. 

\fjoo J?. Troy, N. K, <^jfbv. ^ i<S94. i 



d-UWU vaw4> £ta&Z, — pay to the 



order c/ V&TeJfonOttm 



d&ve <^4mt/iet/ ^ Dollars > 

value received, and charge same to account of 



To S. E. Carter, 

Wilmington, >. a ^Tm^. ^ane. > 

1. A Draft is a written order by one person on another, 
to pay a third person a certain sum named therein. Drafts 
are often called Bills of Exchange. 

2. A batik draft is a written order by one bank on 
another, for the payment of a specified sum to a person 
named therein, or to his order. 

3. A sight draft must be paid when presented. 

4. A time draft is one payable at a certain time 
mentioned. If it is payable at "ten days' sight," it is due 
ten days (with three days of grace added) after acceptance. 

A time draft is presented to the person on whom it is 
drawn for his acceptance. He accepts by writing across 
the face of the draft, usually in red ink, "accepted," with 

the date, over his signature. 

A draft, when accepted, is the same as a note, and is 
governed by the same laws. 

A draft does not bind anyone until it is accepted. 

A draft presented for acceptance or payment and refused 

is said to be dishonored. 

Bank Draft. 

$5000. Boston, Mass., Jan. 5, 1894. 

STATE NATIONAL BANK. 
Pay to the order of Burton Bryan, Five Thousand Dollars. 

Samuel L Beese, 
To the Traders' Bank, 

Chicago, III. 



210 



Time Draft. 

$700. 

At thirty days' sight, pay to the order of T. W. Tignor, Seven 
Hunired Dollars, value received, and charge the some to our account. 

Hoge & Johnson. 
To Wm. S. Hatcher, Chicago, III. 

Sight Draft. 

$900. Philadelphia, May 6, 1894- 

At sight, pay to the ord r of Nelson & Co., Nine Hundred Dollars, 
value received, and charge the same to our account. 
Jacob Straus, Cleveland, 0. J. T. Williams & Co. 



CHECKS. 



Boston, Mass. 



/sloe* 2SL 

|F iisl jfoA iiitil 




94.) 



1894 



Hi Paj to the order of ^/^m^ <^iad&?t> 



<&/t&eA>e @&4mcfiec/>* 



Dollars, 



; No.JS- <&K- "-<§>. ^fft*. s 

1. A Check is a draft on a bank for money deposited 
therein. Checks are usually regarded as cash in business 
transactions, but are not recognized as actual payment 
until cashed. 

Checks are usually drawn payable to "Order," and, 
thus drawn, a check is negotiable; that is, can be trans- 
ferred from one person to another. 

A check drawn payable to "bearer " is payable to the 
person holding it. It should not be made payable to 
bearer, unless it is to be presented immediately and 
vri person. 

2. A check should be dated on the day on which it 
is drawn. Do not give or receive a check dated ahead. 

3. In indorsing Checks, (1) write near the upper end, 
across the back, not lengthwise; (2) write your name on 



211 

the back as it appears on the face. For instance, if the 
check is payable to "Wm. R. Young," indorse "Win. R. 
Young," not "William Young" or "W. R. Young." To 
deposit a check, simply write your name across the back. 
The signature should always be written the same way. 
Simply writing your name on the back of a check means 
that it has passed through your hands and is payable to 

bearer. 

4. The amount is usually written twice, once in words 
and once in figures. Leave no margin on either side of 
the amount written. Checks are usually numbered. 

5. Persons unknown to the Paying Teller must be 
identified, before a check is cashed. 

RECEIPTS. 

A Receipt is a written acknowledgment that certain 
money or merchandise has been received. A receipt should 
always be given when payment is made. A statement 
should be made as to what the receipt is given for. 

When a clerk receives money for his employer, he should 
sign the bill, "Received payment, Duncan & Co., per John 
Smith"; or "Received payment, John Smith, for Duncan 
& Co." 

1. Receipt for Merchandise. 
Received, Richmond, Va., Jan. 5, 1894, of Smith & Co., five tons 
of coal, per John Simmons, teamster. 

R. G. Burroughs. 
2. Receipt indorsed on a Note. 

Received, May 3, 1894, on the within note, Seventy -five Dollars. 

J. G. Peterson. 
Receipt for Money on Account. 
Received, Atlanta, Ga., May 3, 1894, of Jno. Mason, Fifty 
Dollars y on account. 

$50. J. B. Ewell. 

The above form is used when money is paid on an unset- 
tled account. When the money closes an account, substi- 
tute for "on account," "in full of balance on 
settlement." If the payment is in discharge of all in- 
debtedness, use the words, "in full" or "in full 
of all demands" 



212 

Receipt in Full. 

$500. New York, June 5, 1894. 

Received of Wilson Martin, Five Hundred Dollars, in full of 
all demands. 

J. B. Thompson. 
Receipt for Rent. 
Received, Baltimore, Mil., March 2, 1894, of A. P. Boss, One 
Hundred Hollars, in full, for rent of Store 256 Baltimore St., for the 
month of February, 1894. 

J. B. Pierce, 

per Ghas. Harrison. 

ORDERS. 

An Order is a paper addressed to an individual or firm, 
requesting the payment or delivery of certain money or 
goods on the account of the writer. 

Order for Money. 

New Orleans, La., May 1, 1894- 
Mr. Bichard Dean, 

Please pay to Holm<s Bnwn, Sixty-five Dollars, 
on my account. 

Ed. P. Stacy. 
Order for Merchandise. 

Detroit, Mich., Jan. 5, 1894. 
Mr. J. W. Parsons will please give the bearer, Mr. Ghas. Thorpe, 
ten dollars in goods, and charge the same to my account. 

Milton E. Folkes. 

DUE BILLS. 

A Due Bill is a written acknowledgment that a certain 
amount is due. 

A due bill should always be given and required for money 
lent and for any business accommodation and indebtedness, 
unless a promissory note or other obligation is used. 

Payable in Money. 
$50. Boanoke, Va., Aug. 5, 1894. 

Due Frank Mayo, on demamd, Fifty Dollars, for value received. 

Bobert Long. 
Payable in Merchandise. 
$10. Cincinnati, 0., Oct. 3, 1894. 

Due Gonrad Terrell, Ten Dollars, for work done, payable on de- 
mand, in Merchandise at our store. 

Jenkins & Co. 
Peculiar Form of Due Bill. 

Danville, Va. t Feb. 2, 1894. 
I. 0. U. Fifty Dollars. 

Joshua L. White. 



213 



BILLS AND INVOICES. 

1. A Bill, or an Account is a detailed statement of mer- 
chandise sold or of services rendered. 

The person owing the money, goods, &c, is the (LebtOV. 
The person to whom the money, &c. , is due is the CVeditOV, 
Goods are sold On account or Ofl credit, if not 
paid for when delivered. 

2. An Invoice is a detailed statement of merchandise sold 
at wholesale by onedealerto another. For in voice seep. 190. 

Form of Bill. 

Austin, Tex., Oct. 3, 1894. 
Mrs. G. R. Dean 

To W. E. Brown & Co., Dr. 



Jan. 


25 




29 


Feb. 


6 



10 yds. Silk at .50 

20 yds. Flannel , at .25 

5 doz. Buttons at .10 

15 yds. Trimming at .§0 



5 
5 

7 
18 



50 
50 
00 



Received pay m ent, 

W. E. Brown & Co., 

per J. Moss. 

ABBREVIATIONS. 

BUSINESS. 



Account acct. 

Agent Agt. 

Advertisement adv. 

Amount amt. 

Barrel bbl. 

Brothers Bros. 

Company Co. 

Credit, Creditor Cr. 

Clerk Clk. 

Ditto do. 

Dozen doz. 



Errors and omissions excepted 

E. O.E. 

East .E. 

Foot, feet f^ 

Hundred weight cwt. 

Hogshead Mid. 

Interest int. 

Number. No. 

North Jf t 

Ounce oz# 

Pound II,, 



214 



Pennyweight. 

Peck 

Pint 

Payment . . 
Per annum . . . 

Quart 

Railroad 



•pwt 



dwt. 
•pk. 

Pt. 

payt. 
per an. 

qt. 

R.R. 



Received reed. 



Street St. 

South S. 

Tonnage ton. 

West W. 

Yard yd. 

Against (versus) v. or vs. 

Commissioner Com. 

Department Dept. 



MISCELLANEOUS. 



Anonymous anon. 

Answer ans. 

Appendix app. 

Capitals — Cap. 

Small Capitals .,... S. Cap. 

Chapter chap. 

Editor Ed. 

Edition edit. 

Et ccetera (and other things) etc.,&c. 

Example ex. 

For example (exempli gratia) — e. g. 

Manuscript MS. (pi. MSS.) 

Page, pages p., pp. 

Preface pref. 

Postscript P. S. 

Review rev. 

Remark rem. 

That is (id est) i. e. 

Volume vol. 



Verse v. 

Forenoon (ante meridiem) A.. M. 

Noon (meridiem) M. 

Afternoon (post meridiem) P. M. 

Christmas Xmas. 

Before Christ B. C. 



In the Christian Era (Anno 

Domini) A. D. 

Old Style O. S. 

New Style N. S. 

God willing (Deo volente) D.V. 

His( Her) Royal Highness, H. R. H. 

His (Her) Majesty H. M. 

Methodist Episcopal M. E. 

Member of Parliament M. P. 

Post Office P. O. 

Post Master P. M. 

Superintendent Snpt. 



Exercise. 

1. Write up the following invoice: Chicago, 111., June 30, 1894. J. W. 
Davis & Co. bought of Ross Bros. 40 bags Rio Coffee @ $20; 10 lbs. 
Nutmegs @ 80 cents; 5 bbls. Granulated Sugar @ $8; 20 boxes Currants 
(«j $1.50; 1 bbl. Syrup @ $15. Discount of ten per cent, for cash. Bill 
receipted by the bookkeeper. 

2. New York, July 17, 1894. R. W. Lee borrows $250 from W. S. 
Hamlin, and gives his note at ninety days in payment. Write this note. 

3. F. R. Rand buys goods to the amount of $50.85 from Dame Bros., 
and gives his check on the City Bank of Baltimore. Write the check, mak- 
ing it payable to order. 

4. Atlanta, Ga., Jan. 8, 1894. J. H. Laird contracts for $25 worth ot 
advertising in S. Pullman's paper. The bill is due. Draw a draft at 
ten days' sight on J. H. Laird, in favor of S. Pullman, for the amount. 
Accept and indorse for J. H. Laird. 

5. Give D. Burt a due bill for $15, for work done by him. 

6. Give S. Catlin an order on R. I. Trice for $5 worth of goods from 
his store. 

7. Give the abbreviations for the following: For Example; That is; 
Forenoon; Noon; Afternoon; Before Christ; Company; Clerk; Against; 
God willing; His Majesty; Department; Received; Barrel; Pound; Post 
Office; Manuscript; In the Christian Era; Pages; Hundred weight; Ac- 
count; Ounce; Creditor; Amount; Christmas; Appendix; Anonymous; 
Agent; Hogshead; Railroad; Peck; Methodist Episcopal; Pint; Quart* 
Her Royal Highness; Member of Parliament; Per Annum; Payment. 



SMITHDEAL'S 

First Book in Double-Entry Bookkeeping 

is a small, inexpensive book; but be assured it treats the subject 
well, or it would not receive such commendations as the following : 

For its size I deem it the most comprehensive, full and complete treatise on this 
subject I have seen, and a most valuable adjunct to any accountant's desk. Your 
rules for computing interest, averaging accounts, &c, are alone well -worth the 
price of the book. Jno. H. Hampton, 

First Bookkeeper, Planters' National Bank, Richmond. 
T pronounce it one of the most unabridged, to-the-point works in a nut shell that 
I have seen. A. Baker, A. B., 

Formerly teacher of Mayhew's University Course. 

Price 75 cents by mail, post paid. 

For the accommodation of those who wish to learn bookkeeping 
at home, this book, with blank Daybook, Journal and Ledger, will 
be sent, post paid, for $1.25. 

Smithdeal's Grammar, Speller and Letter-Writer 

will be sent by mail, post paid, for $ 1.00. 

Smithdeal'S B« C. PenS are the nicest pens for beautiful 
writing we have ever seen. 
We could fill several pages with such testimonials as this one: 

After teaching penmanship for nine years, and thoroughly testing quite a number 
of the leading pens, I have not found any to excel yours. A. W. Lemmond. 

$1 per gross, Nos. 1 's or 2's, post paid. 

Smithdeal's Glossy Black Ink hasaiithe desirable quaii- 

ties of a first-class ink, besides possessing a beautiful satin gloss, 
which will not rub off nor fade. Sample writing done with this ink 
will be sent on application. 25c. per 1% oz. bottle; 6 bottles, $1 ; 
12 bottles, $1.50, by express, at purchaser's expense. Can't be sent 
by mail. 
All these goods furnished at special prices to schools and the trade. 
Address, 




GEOGRAPHY OF VIRGINIA, 

By JULIA R. HENNING. 

Adopted for use in the public schools of Richmond, Va. Complete 
and concise; suitable for either very young or considerably advanced 
pupils. A State geography, easily understood by all. 
For particulars, apply to 

J. R. HENNING, 
(525 N. 8th St., Richmond, Va. 



RfflH&ti 





Wmmm 

illil 

69£raB9R9m 
EH sSHn 




n 



HSBk 



